srinathmkce/CarAssistant

1[{"page_number": 47, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nDriver\u2019s Seat Floor\nFloor Mats\nExample for genuine floor m\nTo prevent the driver\u2019s side flo\nsliding forward and possibly in\nthe operation of the pedals, M\ngenuine floor mats are recomm\nWhenever you put the driver\nmat back in the vehicle after\nremoved, hook the floor mat\nthe fasteners and position th\nproperly in the footwell.\nWhen you replace the floor\nvehicle with a different type\nweather floor mats, we highly\nto use Maruti Suzuki genuine\nproper fitting.\n2-1 mat\n55T020010\nloor mat from\nnterfering with\nMaruti Suzuki\nmended.\nr\u2019s side floor\nr it has been\ngrommets to\nhe floor mat\nmats in your\nsuch as all-\ny recommend\nfloor mats for 69RHS157\n55TH0-74E"},2{"page_number": 48, "page_text": "Seat Belts and Child R\nSystems Restraint\n59RN02300\n59RN02390 FOR SAFE DRIVING\nAcross the pelvis\n59RN02400\n59RN02380\n2-2\n55TH0-74E"},3{"page_number": 49, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-3  55TH0-74E"},4{"page_number": 50, "page_text": " C\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022 FOR SAFE DRIVING\nCorrect Use of Seat Belt\n69RHS158\n\u2022 Adjust the seat to the correct position.\nSit your body fully into the seat.\n\u2022 Make sure that the seat belt is not\ntwisted.\n\u2022 Make sure that you place the lap portion\nof the belt as low as possible across the\npelvis.\n\u2022 The upper belt should rest on the area\nmidway between the shoulder and the\nbase of the neck.\n\u2022 Confirm that the belt is not twisted in any\nway, and remove any slack.\n2-4\n55TH0-74E"},5{"page_number": 51, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-5 Front Seats\nSeat Adjustment 55TH0-74E"},6{"page_number": 52, "page_text": "Seat position adjustment lev\nPull the lever up and slide the\n(2)\nSeatback angle adjustment\nPull the lever up and move the H\nver (1) Seat height adjustment lever (3) (if\ne seat. equipped) H\nPull the lever up to raise the seat. Push the r\nlever down to lower the seat. o\nt\nAfter adjustment, move the seat and seat-\nh\nback back and forth to check if it is\ne\nsecurely latched.\ns\na\nNOTE:\nTo operate the seat back smoothly, pull the\nseat back adjustment lever (2) in upward\ndirection. Ensure to move seat back only\nafter lever is moved to fully up position.\nAfter adjustment of seat back, release the\nlever gently. Check that seat back is locked\nby moving it forward and backward.\n55T020170\nlever (2)\ne seatback. FOR SAFE DRIVING\nHead Restraints\n80J001\nHead restraints are designed to help\nreduce the risk of neck injuries in the case\nof an accident. Adjust the head restraint to\nthe position which places the center of the\nhead restraint closest to the top of your\nears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-\nsengers, adjust the head restraint as high\nas possible.\n2-6\n55TH0-74E"},7{"page_number": 53, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-7 NOTE: T\nIt may be necessary to recline the seat-\nS\nback to provide enough overhead clear-\nance to remove the head restraint.\n(1)\n55T020190 T\nTo raise the front head restraint, pull c\nupward the head restraint until it clicks. To\n1\nlower the head restraint, push down the\nhead restraint while holding in the lock but-\n2\nton (1). If a head restraint must be\nremoved (for cleaning, replacement, etc.),\npush in the lock button (1) and pull the\nhead restraint all the way out. 3 Tilt / Telescoping (if equipped)\nSteering Lock Lever\n55TB0201\n(1)LOCK\n(2)UNLOCK\nThe lock lever is located under the steering\ncolumn. To adjust the steering wheel height:\n1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the\nsteering column.\n2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired\nheight and fore-aft position and lock the\nsteering column by pulling up the lock\nlever.\n3) Try moving the steering wheel up and\ndown back and forth to check that it is\nsecurely locked in position.\n55TH0-74E"},8{"page_number": 54, "page_text": "Mirrors\nInside Rearview Mirror (3)\n(2)\n(1)\n83S02352\n(1)Night driving\n(2)Day driving\n(3)Selector tab\nYou can adjust the inside rearview mirror\nby hand to see the rear of your vehicle in\nthe mirror. To adjust the mirror, set the\nselector tab (3) to the day position, then\nmove the mirror up, down or sideways by\nhand to obtain the best view.\nWhen driving at night, you can move the\nselector tab (3) to the night position to\nreduce glare from the headlights of vehi-\ncles behind you.\n81M30360 FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-8\n55TH0-74E"},9{"page_number": 55, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nAuto Dimming Rearview M\n(if equipped)\nYou can adjust the auto dimm\nmirror by hand so you can se\nof your vehicle in the mirror. T\nmirror has a function of a\nreducing glare from the lights\nbehind you. The function wor\nignition mode has been chan\nby pressing the engine switch\n\u2022 The mirror is always set to t\ndimming mode when the ign\n\u201cON\u201d.\n\u2022 When the switch (2) is\ngreen indicator (1) is lit, in\nthe mirror is set to the au\nming mode. To cancel th\ndimming mode, push the sw\nindicator (1) then goes out.\n2-9 Mirror \u2022 The auto dimming rearview mirror is\nautomatically deactivated while the gear-\nshift lever is in the \u201cR\u201d position.\nN\nming rearview A\nee to the rear o\nThis rearview \u2022\nautomatically\ns of vehicles \u2022\nrks when the\nnged to \u201cON\u201d\nh.\nthe automatic\nnition mode is\npushed, the\nndicating that\nutomatic dim-\nhe automatic\nwitch (2); the NOTE:\nAuto dimming system may not work in any\nof the following cases:\n\u2022 Light from the rear is not directly focused\nto the sensor (3).\n\u2022 Rear window glass is not transparent\nenough or is dark tinted glass.\n55TH0-74E"},10{"page_number": 56, "page_text": "You can adjust the outside r\nrors by hand so as to see the\nvehicle in the mirrors. center position to help prevent unin-\n55T020220\ntended adjustment.\nrearview mir-\nsides of your FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-10\n55TH0-74E"},11{"page_number": 57, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nOutside Rearview Mirror\nSwitch (if equipped)\n2-11 Folding You can fold the mirrors when you park the R\nvehicle in a narrow space. Push the folding (\nswitch to fold and unfold the mirrors. Make\nW\nsure the mirrors are completely unfolded\ns\nbefore you start driving.\ns\nu\ni\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If you press the folding switch to open\nthe outside rearview mirrors and simulta-\nneously start the engine, then the out-\nside rearview mirrors may get stuck\nduring that moment. To open the outside\nrearview mirrors completely, again press\nthe folding switch after starting the\nengine.\n\u2022 Slight time difference in opening of both\noutside rearview mirrors is due to angu- N\nlar positioning of the driver seat. \u2022\n\u2022 Remote Folding Mirrors\n(if equipped)\nWhen the outside rearview mirror folding\nswitch is in the unfolded position, the out-\nside rearview mirrors are folded or\nunfolded in conjunction with the door lock-\ning or engine switch operation.\n\u2022 When you lock the doors (including the\ntailgate) by using the remote controller\nor pushing the request switch, the mir-\nrors will be folded automatically.\n\u2022 To unfold the mirrors, push the engine\nswitch to change the ignition mode to\nACC or ON.\n\u2022 The factory setting is that the function is\nenabled. You can switch the function\nfrom enabled to disabled, and vice\nversa. To switch the function for your\npreference, refer to \u201cHow to switch the\nremote folding mirror function\u201d in this\nsection.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If the doors are locked by using the key\nor lock knob, the mirrors will not be\nfolded automatically.\n\u2022 If the outside rearview mirror folding\nswitch is in the folded position, the mir-\n55TH0-74E"},12{"page_number": 58, "page_text": "rors will not be unfolded a\neven when the engine swit\nto change the ignition mod\nON.\n\u2022 If any of the doors is not o\nabout 30 seconds after th\nunlocked by using the keyle\nsystem remote controller\nswitch, the doors will be l\nand the mirrors will be fold\ncally.\nHow to switch the remote fo\nfunction\nWhen the ignition mode is L\nyou can switch the functio\nenabled state to the disable\nvice versa, using the following\n1) Sit in the driver\u2019s seat an\nthat all doors are closed.\n\u2022 If any door is open, th\nwarning light comes on. automatically,\n2) Turn the lock knob (1) on the driver\u2019s\ntch is pushed\ndoor rearward (2).\nde to ACC or\nNOTE:\nopened within All operations included in the following\nhe doors are steps 3) and 4) must be completed within\ness push start 15 seconds.\nor request\nlocked again\n4 times\nded automati-\n(3)\nolding mirror\nLOCK (OFF), (2)\non from the\ned state, and\ng method.\nnd make sure 4\n(1)\nhe open door\n74TB02004\n3) Turn the lock knob (1) on the driver\u2019s\ndoor forward (3) to lock the doors, and\nthen turn rearward (2) to unlock the\ndoors. Repeat this operation 4 times. E\na\ni\nr\nc\nd\nb\nl\n74TB02003 FOR SAFE DRIVING\n(4)\n(5)\n59RN02110\n(4)LOCK button\n(5)UNLOCK button\n4) Push any of the buttons on the keyless\npush start system remote controller 3\ntimes.\n\u2022 Push any buttons described above\nyou like.\n\u2022 During operation, the doors are not\nlocked, unlocked, opened or closed.\nEvery time you perform the series of the\nabove steps, the state of the remote fold-\ning mirror function changes from the cur-\nrently selected one to the other. You can\ncheck whether the system is enabled or\ndisabled by the number of interior buzzer\nbeeps at the end of the procedure as fol-\nlows.\n2-12\n55TH0-74E"},13{"page_number": 59, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n\u2022 If you cannot complete the\nstep 3) and 4) within 15 s\nrectly, the state of the remot\nror function will not chan\ninterior buzzer does not be\nthe procedure again from th\n2-13 Rear Seats\nHead Restraints (if equipped)\nHead restraints are designed to help\nreduce the risk of neck injuries in the case\nof an accident.\noperations in\nseconds cor-\nte folding mir-\nnge and the\neep. Perform\nhe beginning.\nN\nI\ns\nc NOTE:\nIt may be necessary to fold forward the\nseatback to provide enough overhead\nclearance to remove the head restraint.\n55TH0-74E"},14{"page_number": 60, "page_text": "To raise the rear head restrain\nhead restraint until it clicks.\nhead restraint, push down\nrestraint while holding in the\n(1). If a head restraint must (for cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in S\nthe lock button (1) and pull the head\nF\nrestraint all the way out.\nT\nWhen installing a child restraint system, f\nadjust the height of the head restraint or s\nremove it for fitting the child restraint sys-\nT\ntem, as necessary.\n1\n55TB0207\n(((111))\n55TB0209 2\nWhen using the rear center head restraint,\npull it up and lock it securely before driving.\n55TB0208\nnt, pull up the\nTo lower the\nn the head\ne lock button\nbe removed FOR SAFE DRIVING\nSeat Utility\nFolding Rear Seats\nThe rear seats of your vehicle can be\nfolded forward to provide additional cargo\nspace.\nTo fold the rear seats forward:\n1) Lower the head restraint fully.\n2) Hook the webbing of the outboard lap-\nshoulder belts in the belt hangers.\n2-14\n55TH0-74E"},15{"page_number": 61, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n3) Slide the release lever o\neach split seat in arrow d\nfold the seatbacks forward.\n2-15 To return the seat to the normal position,\nfollow the procedure below.\nR\nA\n55TB02011\nb\non the top of\ns\ndirection, and\n. Unlock\nRed\nLock\n55TB02012\nRaise the seatback until it locks into place.\nAfter returning the seat, move the seat-\nback back and forth to check if it is\nsecurely latched.\n55TH0-74E"},16{"page_number": 62, "page_text": " Safety for Child\nFor safety, carefully drive at lower speed\nthan usual.\nPlace a Child in the Rear Seat\n51K0188\n\u2022 Seat a child next to an adult when possi-\nble, and ensure that the child can be\nvisually monitored.\n\u2022 Select an appropriate child restraint sys-\ntem suitable for the child\u2019s age and phys-\nical size. FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-16\n55TH0-74E"},17{"page_number": 63, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-17 vide the best performance, result-\ning in severe injury.\nDo not allow two or more people to\nuse a single seat belt. head upright or sit on their own.\n55TH0-74E"},18{"page_number": 64, "page_text": "Do not Let a Child Play w\nUsing the Child Restraint\nRefer to \u201cSecuring Child Rest\nby Seat Belt\u201d in this section. An Adult Needs to Open or Close\nwith Seat\nEach Door or Window, and Adjust\nSeats\nOnly an adult should open or close each\ndoor or window and adjust seats, not to get\na child\u2019s hands, arms, legs or neck, etc.\ncaught in.\nD\nt System\ntraint System FOR SAFE DRIVING\nWARNING\n(Continued)\n\u2022 If you leave the power window in\nready condition, it may cause unin-\ntended operation of the power win-\ndow by a child, resulting in an\naccident.\nWhen you leave the vehicle, make\nsure to press the engine switch to\nchange the ignition mode to OFF or\nturn the ignition switch to \u201cOFF\u201d\nposition, keep the key with you and\nleave the vehicle with your child.\nDo not Let a Child Stick His/her\nHead or Hands out of the Window\n69RHS163\n2-18\n55TH0-74E"},19{"page_number": 65, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-19 69RHS165 55TH0-74E"},20{"page_number": 66, "page_text": "Lap-shoulder Belt\nEmergency locking retracto\nThe seat belt has an emerg\nretractor (ELR), which is desi\nthe seat belt only during a su\nimpact. It also may lock if you\nacross your body very quickly\npens, let the belt go back to u\nthen pull the belt across you\nslowly. or (ELR)\ngency locking\nigned to lock\nudden stop or\nu pull the belt\ny. If this hap-\nunlock it, and\nur body more\nTo reduce the risk of sliding under the belt\nduring a collision, position the lap portion\nof the belt across your lap as low on your\nhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit\nby pulling the shoulder portion of the belt FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-20\n55TH0-74E"},21{"page_number": 67, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nTo unfasten the seat belt, p\n\u201cPRESS\u201d button on the buckl\nthe belt slowly while holding th\nthe latch plate.\nNOTE:\nIf the seat belt cannot be pu\nfully retracted position, firmly\nand release it. Then smoothly\nout of the retractor.\n2-21 Adjustment of Seat Belt Length\nThe seat belt does not require length\nadjustment. The seat belt extends and\nretracts according to the movement of the\nbody. If the seat belt gets a strong impact,\nthe belt locks its tension automatically, in\norder to secure the body.\nCorrect Use of Seat Belt\n59RN02340\npush the red\nle and retract\nhe belt or/and\nulled from its\npull the belt\ny pull the belt 55TH0-74E"},22{"page_number": 68, "page_text": " N\nA\nr\ni\nr\n(1)\n55TB0206 FOR SAFE DRIVING\nbelt before starting the engine.\nNOTE:\nAlong with the seat belt reminder light, a\nreminder message shall also come on the\ninformation display (if equipped), for un-\nrestrained driver and/or front passenger.\n2-22\n55TH0-74E"},23{"page_number": 69, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nDriver\u2019s seat belt reminder\nIf the driver\u2019s seat belt remain\nwhen the ignition switch is tu\nposition or the engine switch i\nchange the ignition mode\nreminder works as follows:\n1) The driver\u2019s seat belt remin\ncome on. The front pass\nbelt reminder light will also\nfront passenger does not f\nseat belt.\n2) After the vehicle\u2019s speed\nabout 15 km/h, the drive\nreminder light will blink a\nwill sound for about 95 sec\n3) The reminder light will rem\nthe driver\u2019s seat belt is buc\nIf the driver has buckled his or\nand later unbuckles the se\nreminder system will be ac\nStep 1) or 2) according to\nspeed. When the vehicle\u2019s s\nthan 15 km/h, the reminder w\nStep 1). When the vehicle\u2019s sp\nthan 15 km/h, the reminder w\nStep 2).\nThe reminder will be autom\nceled when the driver\u2019s seat b\nor the ignition switch is turned\nengine switch is pressed to\nignition mode to LOCK (OFF).\n2-23 Front passenger\u2019s seat belt reminder\nns unbuckled If there is a person sitting in the front pas-\nurned to \u201cON\u201d senger seat and the front passenger seat\nis pressed to belt is unbuckled when the ignition switch\nto ON\nnder lig\nsenger\u2019\no come\nfasten\nhas re\ner\u2019s se\nand a\nconds.\nmain o\nckled.\nr her se\neat bel\nctivated\nthe ve\nspeed i\nwill star\npeed is\nwill star\nmatically can-\nThe seat belt reminder sensor (2) detects\nbelt is buckled\nwhether a person is sitting in the front seat.\nd to off, or the\nThe sensor of the front passenger's seat\no change the\nbelt reminder is located in the seat cush-\n.\nion. The front passenger\u2019s seat belt\nreminder works in the same manner as the\ndriver\u2019s seat belt reminder. 55TH0-74E"},24{"page_number": 70, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 If you put an object on the\nseat, the weight of the o\nsensed by the sensor and t\nsenger\u2019s seat belt remind\ncome on and then the int\nmay beep.\n\u2022 If a child or a small sized p\nthe front passenger\u2019s seat o\nis put on the front passenge\nweight will not be sensed b\nand the interior buzzer may Rear passenger\u2019s seat belt reminder H\nIf the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d posi- B\ntion or the engine switch is pressed to\nS\nchange the ignition mode to \u201cON\u201d, the seat\nbelt reminder light comes on unless all rear\npassenger\u2019s seat belts are fastened for\nirrespective of the presence or absence of\npassenger. The rear passenger\u2019s seat belt\nreminder works in the same manner as the\ndriver\u2019s seat belt reminder.\ne passenger\u2019s\nobject will be\nthe front pas- P\nder light will p\nterior buzzer w\na\nperson sit on s\nor the cushion a\ner\u2019s seat, the\nby the sensor\nnot beep. FOR SAFE DRIVING\nHandling and Care for Seat\nBelt\nSeat Belt Handling\n55T020330\nPeriodically check if the seat belts work\nproperly and are not damaged. Check the\nwebbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors,\nanchorages and guide loops. Replace any\nseat belts which do not work properly or\nare damaged.\n2-24\n55TH0-74E"},25{"page_number": 71, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-25 S\nSeat Belt Care\nCaring for seat belts is the same as caring\nfor any type of regular cloth material, etc. Seat Belt Hanger\n55TB02013\n55TH0-74E"},26{"page_number": 72, "page_text": "Seat Belt Pretensione\nSystem (Only for Fro\nTo determine if your vehicle\nwith a seat belt pretensioner s\nfront or rear seating position\nlabel on the seat belt at the b\nthe letter \u201cp\u201d appears as illu\nvehicle is equipped with the s\ntensioner system. You can us er sioner seat belts in the same manner as m\nordinary seat belts. i\nont Seat)\nRead this section and \u201cSupplemental\nS\nRestraint System (Airbags)\u201d section to\nn\nlearn more about the pretensioner system.\nb\nThe seat belt pretensioner system works l\nwith the supplemental restraint system (air- P\nbags). The crash sensors and the elec- a\ntronic controller of the airbag system also t\ncontrol the seat belt pretensioners. The R\npretensioners are triggered only when p\nthere is a frontal or side collision severe\nP\nenough to trigger the airbags and the seat\nw\n4 belts are fastened. For precautions and\nt\ngeneral information including servicing the\nd\npretensioner system, refer to \u201cSupplemen-\no\ntal Restraint System (Airbags)\u201d section in\n55T020520 p\naddition to this \u201cSeat Belt Pretensioner\nI\nsystem\u201d section, and follow all those pre-\nt\ncautions.\nt\nThe pretensioner is located in each front\nS\nseat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-\np\nens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-\npant\u2019s body more snugly in the event of a T\nfrontal or side collision. The retractors will t\nremain locked after the pretensioners are l\nactivated. Upon activation, some noise will 1\noccur and some smoke may be released.\nis equipped\nThese conditions are not harmful and do\nsystem at the\nnot indicate a fire in the vehicle.\nns, check the\nbottom part. If The driver and all passengers must be\nustrated, your properly restrained by fastening seat belts\nseat belt pre- at all times, whether or not a pretensioner 2\nse the preten- is equipped at their seating position, to FOR SAFE DRIVING\nminimize the risk of severe injury or death\nin the event of a collision.\nSit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; do\nnot lean forward or sideways. Adjust the\nbelt so the lap portion of the belt is worn\nlow across the pelvis, not across the waist.\nPlease refer to \u201cSeat Adjustment\u201d section\nand the instructions and precautions about\nthe seat belts in this \u201cSeat Belts and Child\nRestraint Systems\u201d section for details on\nproper seat and seat belt adjustments.\nPlease note that the pretensioners along\nwith the airbags will activate in severe fron-\ntal or side collisions. They are not\ndesigned to activate in rear impacts, roll-\novers, or minor frontal side collisions. The\npretensioners can be activated only once.\nIf the pretensioners are activated (that is, if\nthe airbags are activated), have the pre-\ntensioner system serviced by Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop as soon as\npossible.\nThe pretensioner system or the airbag sys-\ntem may not work properly if any of the fol-\nlowing conditions occurs:\n1) If the air bag warning light on the instru-\nment cluster does not come on briefly,\nwhen the ignition switch is turned to the\n\u201cON\u201d position or the engine switch is\npressed to change the ignition mode to\n\u201cON\u201d.\n2) If the air bag light comes on and stays\non for more than 10 seconds, when the\nignition switch is turned to the \u201cON\u201d\n2-26\n55TH0-74E"},27{"page_number": 73, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nposition or the engine switc\nto change the ignition mod\n3) If the air bag light comes o\ning.\nHave both systems inspecte\nSuzuki authorized workshop\npossible.\nService on or around the prete\ntem components or wiring m\nformed only by Maruti Suzuk\nworkshop who is specia\nImproper service could res\ntended activation of pretensio\nrender the pretensioner inope\nof these two conditions may\nsonal injury.\nTo prevent damage or uninte\ntion of the pretensioners, ch\nlead-acid battery is disconne\nignition switch has been in \u201cLO\nor the ignition mode has be\n(OFF) for at least 90 seconds\nforming any electrical service\nMaruti Suzuki vehicle.\nDo not touch pretensioner sys\nnents or wiring. The wires a\nwith yellow tape or yellow tub\ncouplers are yellow. When sc\nMaruti Suzuki vehicle, ask a M\nauthorized workshop, body re\nscrap yard for assistance.\n2-27 ch is pressed For Proper Operation of Seat Belt S\nde to \u201cON\u201d. Pretensioner System\nS\non while driv-\nDo not modify any parts that can affect the\nfunctionality of the seat belt pretensioner\ned by Maruti system. The seat belt may be retracted\nas soon as unexpectedly, or it may not be properly\nretracted when necessary.\nensioner sys-\nmust be per- Disposal and Scrapping\nki authorized Seat belt pretensioners that have not been\nally trained. activated must be activated according to\nsult in unin- the predetermined procedure before dis-\noners or could posal.\nerative. Either\nresult in per-\nI\nf\nended activa- o\nheck that the o\nected and the r\nOCK\u201d position l\neen in LOCK t\ns before per-\nwork on your\nstem compo-\nare wrapped\nbing, and the\ncrapping your\nMaruti Suzuki\nepair shop, or Seat Belt Force Limiter\nSystem (Only for Front Seat)\n69RHS167\nIn the event of a strong impact coming\nfrom the front, the seat belt force limiter\noperates in two stages (driver\u2019s seat) and\none stage (front passenger\u2019s seat) to\nreduce a force to the shoulder strap, thus\nlessening the impact being sustained by\nthe front passengers.\n(2)\n55T020340\n55TH0-74E"},28{"page_number": 74, "page_text": "  FOR SAFE DRIVING\n55TH0-74E"},29{"page_number": 75, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nable; check that the restraint\nselect meets applicable safety\nAll child restraint systems are\nbe secured in vehicle seats e\nbelts (lap portion of lap-shou\nby special rigid lower ancho\nonto the floor. Whenever pos\nSuzuki recommends that ch\nsystems be installed on the\nAccording to accident statist\nare safer when properly restr\nseating positions than in front\ntions.\nNOTE:\nObserve any statutory regu\nchild restraints.\n2-29 t\ny\ne\ne\nul\no\ns\nh\ne\nt\nr\nu system even though its appearance\nlooks normal.\n55TH0-74E"},30{"page_number": 76, "page_text": "Child Restraint Syste\nChild Restraint\nThe suitability of each passen\nWhenever you carry children\nrestraints, referring to the table\nKey of letters to be inserted in\nU =Suitable for \u2018universal\u2019 cate\nX =Seat position not suitable f\nN.A = Seat position not availab\nNOTE:\n\u2022 \u2018universal\u2019 is the category in\n\u2022 \u2018Outboard\u2019 indicates window em for India\nnger\u2019s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child rest\nup to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which c\ne.\nn the above table:\negory restraints approved for use in this mass group\nfor children in this mass group\nble for children in this mass group.\nn the AIS 072.\nw side seat. FOR SAFE DRIVING\ntraint system is shown in the table below.\nconform to AIS 072, the standard for child\n2-30\n55TH0-74E"},31{"page_number": 77, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-31 S\nT\nr\n1\ninjured in a collision.\nNOTE:\nStow the removed head restraint in the lug-\ngage compartment so it will not cause\ninconvenience to the occupants. Securing\nThis section explains securing the child\nrestraint system in the rear seat.\n55TB02014\n1) When the child restraint system con-\ntacts the head restraint, adjust the\nheight of the head restraint or remove it\nfor fitting the child restraint system.\n55TH0-74E"},32{"page_number": 78, "page_text": "2) If your vehicle is equipp\nreclining mechanism of re\nadjust the angle of the sea\nthere is no gap betwee\nrestraint system and the se\n3) Make sure that the child r\ntem is securely fastened\nseat.\n4) Make sure to pass the se\npassenger\u2019s seat through\nparts, according to the inst\nual that came with the c\nsystem. seat belt buckle (4) until you hear a\nped with the click.\near seatback, \u2022The child restraint system in the above\natback so that figure is a typical example.\nen the child\neatback.\nrestraint sys-\nto the main\neat belt of the\nthe specified\ntruction man-\nchild restraint\n72M00172\n6) If the child restraint system does not\nhave a seat belt locking mechanism or\na locking clip, secure it to the seat by\nusing the aftermarket locking clip.\n\u2022The aftermarket locking clip shown in\nthe above figure is a typical example. FOR SAFE DRIVING\nhe child restraint system back\nh, and left and right to check if it\nely in position.\nnnot ensure secure positioning,\ne instruction manual that came\nwith the child restraint system or consult\nthe authorized workshop where you pur-\nchased the seat.\n2-32\n55TH0-74E"},33{"page_number": 79, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nanchorages in the rear seat ou\ning positions for securing a IS\nchild restraints with the conn\nThe lower anchorages are lo\nthe rear of the seat cushion m\ntom of the seatback.\n2-33 FIX type child restraint sys- H\nto the instructions provided\nstraint system manufacturer.\non, try moving the child\nm in all directions especially\nck that connecting bars are\nd to the anchorages.\n(2)\nN\nS\ng\nutboard seat- i\nSOFIX type of\nnecting bars. 55T020360\nocated where (2)Top tether anchorage\nmeets the bot-\nYour vehicle is equipped with the top tether\nanchorages. Use the top tether strap of the\nchild restraint according to the instructions\nprovided by the child restraint system man-\nufacturer. Here is a general instruction:\nNOTE:\nStow the removed head restraint in the lug-\ngage compartment so it will not cause\ninconvenience to the occupants.\n55TB02014\n55TH0-74E"},34{"page_number": 80, "page_text": "  FOR SAFE DRIVING\nhild restraint toward the anchor-\nat the connecting bar tips are\nooked to the anchorages. Use\nto confirm the position.\n54G185\nfront of the child restraint and\nchild restraint forcefully to\nconnecting bars. Check that\nsecurely latched by trying to\nchild restraint system in all\nespecially forward.\ntop tether strap referring to\nn of child restraint with top\nction.\nu put your child in the child\nystem, appropriately slide the\nforward not to touch a part of\ns body.\n2-34\n55TH0-74E"},35{"page_number": 81, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nInstallation of Child Restr\nTop Tether\nSome child restraint systems\nuse of a top tether strap. Top te\nages are provided in your v\nlocations shown in the illustrati\nThe number of the top tethe\nbrackets provided in your veh\n2-35 on the vehicle specification. Install the child\nrestraint system as follows:\n1) Remove the luggage compartment\ncover (if equipped).\n2) Secure the child restraint on the rear\nseat using the procedure described\nabove for securing a restraint system\nthat does not require a top tether strap.\nraint with\n3) Hook the top tether strap to the top\ntether anchorage and tighten the top\ntether strap according to the instruc-\ntions provided by the child restraint sys-\ntem manufacturer. Attach the top tether\nstrap to the corresponding top tether\nanchorage located directly behind the\nchild restraint. Do not attach the top 4\ntether strap to the luggage restraint\nloops (if equipped).\n5\n55T020380\ns require the\nether anchor-\nvehicle at the\nions.\ner anchorage\nhicle depends 52RS20431\n4) When routing the top tether strap, pass\nthe top tether strap as shown in the\nillustration. (Refer to \u201cHead Restraints\u201d\nsection for details on how to adjust the\nheight of head restraint or remove it.)\n5) Check that cargo does not interfere\nwith routing of the top tether strap.\n55TH0-74E"},36{"page_number": 82, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nSupplemental Restra\nSystem (Airbags)\nYour vehicle is equipped wi\nmental restraint system cons\nfollowing components in addi\nshoulder belt at each seating p\n(1)Side curtain airbag\nequipped)\n(2)Side crash sensor (if equ\n(3)Front passenger\u2019s front a\nmodule\n(4)Driver\u2019s front airbag mod\n(5)Forward crash sensor\n(6)Front seat belt pretension\n(7)Side airbag module (if eq\n(8)Airbag controller\n2-36 aint\n((66)) ((11)) ((22))\nith a supple-\nsisting of the\nition to a lap-\nposition.\nmodule (if\nuipped)\nairbag\ndule\nner\nquipped)\n((22)) ((22)) ((77)) ((33)) ((11)) ((44)) ((55))\n((77)) ((66)) ((88)) ((22))\n74TB02006\n55TH0-74E"},37{"page_number": 83, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\nWhat is SRS Airbag Syste\nSRS stands for \u201cSupplemen\nSystem\u201d. This system aims to\nsengers in their seats for safe\ncluster does not blink or come\nignition switch is first turned t\ntion, or the ignition mode is firs\nON, or airbag warning light\ncomes on while driving, the a\n(or the seat belt pretensioner\nnot work properly. Have the a\ninspected by Maruti Suzuk\nworkshop as soon as possible\n2-37 em?\nntal Restraint\nrestrain pas-\nety.\ne on when the\nto \u201cON\u201d posi-\nst changed to\nstays on, or\nairbag system F\nsystem) may r\nNOTE:\nairbag system m\nVia the event data recorder (EDR) system,\nki authorized o\nthis vehicle records and accumulates data\ne. d\nwhen the airbag is deployed.\nt\nn\nm\nT\ns\na\nt\ni Front airbags are not designed to inflate in\nrear impacts, side impacts, rollovers or\nminor frontal collisions, since they would\noffer no protection in those types of acci-\ndents. Since an airbag deploys only one\ntime during an accident, seat belts are\nneeded to restrain occupants from further\nmovements during the accident.\nTherefore, an airbag is not a substitute for\nseat belts. To maximize your protection,\nalways fasten your seat belts. Be aware\nthat no system can prevent all possible\ninjuries that may occur in an accident.\n55TH0-74E"},38{"page_number": 84, "page_text": "collisions when the ignition mo\nSide airbags and side curtain\nnot designed to inflate in fronta\nlisions, rollovers or minor sid\nsince they would offer no\nthose types of accidents. Only\nbag and side curtain airbag o\nthe vehicle that is struck will\never, in a frontal angle collis\nairbags and side curtain a\ninflate. Since an airbag deplo\ntime during an accident, se\nneeded to restrain occupants\nmovements during the acciden\nTherefore, an airbag is not a\nseat belts. To maximize you\nalways fasten your seat belt\nthat no system can prevent\ninjuries that may occur in an a When Driving the Vehicle with\nSRS Airbag System\nMake Sure to Fasten Seat Belt\nT\nt\na\n65J106 t\node is ON.\nn airbags are\nal or rear col-\nde collisions,\nprotection in\ny the side air-\non the side of\ninflate. How-\nsion, the side\nairbags may\noys only one\neat belts are\ns from further\nnt.\nsubstitute for\nur protection,\nts. Be aware\nt all possible\naccident. FOR SAFE DRIVING\nThere is a possibility of major impact from\nthe front airbags when the airbags activate\nand deploy instantaneously, the driver and\nthe passenger should sit deeply into their\nh their backs lightly to the\nddition, the seat should be\nhat it is not too far forward.\n59RN02190\n2-38\n55TH0-74E"},39{"page_number": 85, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-39  55TH0-74E"},40{"page_number": 86, "page_text": "  74TB02001\n2-40\n55TH0-74E"},41{"page_number": 87, "page_text": "2-41  55TH0-74E"},42{"page_number": 88, "page_text": "Handling for Airbags\nFor Proper SRS Airbag S\nOperation\nIf objects are positioned with\nwhere the airbag deploys, s\nmight be impacted and blown\nbag may not deploy properly. s\nSystem\nhin the range\nsuch objects\noff or the air- FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-42\n55TH0-74E"},43{"page_number": 89, "page_text": "2-43  69RHS171\n55TH0-74E"},44{"page_number": 90, "page_text": " c\ns\ns\np\nt\nt\nS\no FOR SAFE DRIVING\nn of Airbags\nystem Works\ncollision, the collision sensors\nrapid deceleration, and if the\ndges that the deceleration rep-\nevere frontal collision, the con-\nigger the inflators. The inflators\nappropriate airbags with nitro-\nn gas. The inflated airbags pro-\nhion for your head and upper\nairbag inflates and deflates so\nyou may not even realize that it\ned. The airbag will neither hin-\nw nor make it harder to exit the\nhelps keep you in the proper\nmaximum protection when an\ntes. Adjust your seat as far\nossible while still maintaining\ncontrol of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your\nseat; sit up straight; do not lean over the\nsteering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-\npants should not lean on or sleep against\nthe door. Refer to \u201cSeat Adjustment\u201d sec-\ntion and \u201cSeat Belts and Child Restraint\nSystems\u201d section in this section for details\non proper seat and seat belt adjustments.\n2-44\n55TH0-74E"},45{"page_number": 91, "page_text": "2-45 (Continued) cause severe injury.\n(Continued)\n55TH0-74E"},46{"page_number": 92, "page_text": " S\nI\nr\nS\np\nI\nt\nc\np\ns\na\nS\ni\no\ns\ny\nv\na\nS\no\nS\nYour vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic s\nmodule which records information about d\nthe airbag system if the airbags deploy in a i\ncollision. The module records information m\nabout overall system status, and which T\nsensors activated the deployment. o\nt\nh\nm\n9\nc\nv\np\nw\nc FOR SAFE DRIVING\nServicing the airbag system\nIf the airbags inflate, have the airbags and\nrelated components replaced by Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop as soon as\npossible.\nIf your vehicle ever gets in deep water and\nthe driver\u2019s floor is submerged, the airbag\ncontroller could be damaged. If this hap-\npens, ask Maruti Suzuki authorized work-\nshop to check the airbag system as soon\nas possible.\nSpecial procedures are required for servic-\ning or replacing an airbag. For that reason,\nonly Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop\nshould be allowed to service or replace\nyour airbags. Remind anyone who ser-\nvices your Maruti Suzuki vehicle that it has\nairbags.\nService on or around airbag components\nor wiring must be performed only by Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop. Improper\nservice could result in unintended airbag\ndeployment or could render the airbag\ninoperative. Either of these two conditions\nmay result in severe injury.\nTo prevent damage or unintended inflation\nof the airbag system, check that the bat-\ntery is disconnected and the ignition switch\nhas been in \u201cLOCK\u201d position or the ignition\nmode has been in LOCK (OFF) for at least\n90 seconds before performing any electri-\ncal service work on your Maruti Suzuki\nvehicle. Do not touch airbag system com-\nponents or wires. The wires are wrapped\nwith yellow tape or yellow tubing, and the\ncouplers are yellow for easy identification.\n2-46\n55TH0-74E"},47{"page_number": 93, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-47  55TH0-74E"},48{"page_number": 94, "page_text": "than about 30 degrees at le\nangles from the front of your v\nin certain collisions at low sp\nbag may not inflate. eft and right \u2022 Collision that the front of your vehicle\nvehicle. Also, goes under the bed of a truck etc. \u2022\npeed, the air- 80J105E\n\u2022 Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail at\nleft and right angles of greater than\nabout 30 degrees (1) from the front of\nyour vehicle\n2-48\n55TH0-74E"},49{"page_number": 95, "page_text": "  (if equipped) and Side\ngs (if equipped)\nConditions\nand side curtain airbags\non)\n80J119\nthe side at about a right\nneral passenger car to your\nre than about 30 km/h or in\nact\n55TH0-74E"},50{"page_number": 96, "page_text": "  2-50\n55TH0-74E"},51{"page_number": 97, "page_text": "2-51  55TH0-74E"},52{"page_number": 98, "page_text": "  FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-52\n55TH0-74E"},53{"page_number": 99, "page_text": "FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-53  55TH0-74E"},54{"page_number": 100, "page_text": " \u2022 If animals move about in the vehi-\ncle, it may interfere with driver's\nview. Also, in a sudden braking, it\nmay result in an accident.\nWhen you bring animals into the\nvehicle, make sure that animals do\nnot move about. FOR SAFE DRIVING\n2-54\n55TH0-74E"},55{"page_number": 101, "page_text": " BEFORE DRIVI\nKeys ............................\nDoors ..........................\nKeyless Entry System\nKeyless Push Start Sy\nSecurity System (if equ\nWindows ....................\nHeadlight Leveling Sw\nLighting Control Lever\nTurn Signal Control Le\nHazard Warning Switc\nWindshield Wiper and\nHorn ............................\nHeated Rear Window S\n60G404 BEFORE DRIVING\nING\n...........................................................3-1\n...........................................................3-1\nTransmitter /\nystem Remote Controller ...............3-5\nuipped) ............................................3-15\n...........................................................3-17\nwitch ..................................................3-20\nr ........................................................3-21\never ..................................................3-24\nch ......................................................3-25\nWasher Lever ................................3-26\n...........................................................3-29\nSwitch ..............................................3-29\n55TH0-74E"},56{"page_number": 102, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nKeys\nYour vehicle comes with a pa\nkeys. Keep one of the keys as\nin a safe place. One key can o\nlocks on the vehicle.\nKey Number Plate\nThe key identification num\nstamped on a metal tag (2) p\nthe keys. Keep the tag in a s\nyou lose your keys, you will ne\nber to have new keys mad\nnumber below for your future r\nKEY NUMBER:\n3-1 NOTE: D\n\u2022 Carefully keep the tag in the place other\nair of identical\nthan your vehicle, so that someone does\ns a spare key\nnot find out about the key identification\nopen all of the\nnumber. If you lose your key, inform the\nkey identification number to a Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop.\n\u2022 When you resell or transfer your vehicle\nto a new owner or operator, give the key\nnumber plate with your vehicle to him or\nher.\nImmobilizer System\nFor detail of immobilizer system, \u201cImmobi-\nlizer System\u201d in the \u201cOPERATING YOUR\nVEHICLE\u201d section\nmber (1) is\nprovided with\nsafe place. If\need this num-\nde. Write the\nreference. Doors\n55TH0-74E"},57{"page_number": 103, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 When leaving the vehicle\nshort period of time, do not l\nvaluables in the vehicle, to\ntheft.\n\u2022 Depending on the setting\nthe security alarm and the o\nditions of the doors, an alar\nate. Refer to \u201cSecurity\nequipped)\u201d in this section. Side Door Locks\n(2)\n(1)\n(3)\n(4)\n59RN03180\n(1)UNLOCK\n(2)LOCK\n(3)Front T\n(4)Rear t\nr\ne even for a\nTo lock a front door from outside the vehi-\nleave cash or T\ncle:\navoid risk of c\n\u2022 Insert the key and turn the top of the key t\nconditions of toward the front of the vehicle, or t\nopening con- \u2022 Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and\nrm may oper- hold the door handle as you close the N\nSystem (if door. B\nc\nTo unlock a front door from outside the\nn\nvehicle, insert the key and turn the top of\nthe key toward the rear of the vehicle. BEFORE DRIVING\n74TB03001\n(1)UNLOCK\n(2)LOCK\nTo lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn\nthe lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob\nrearward to unlock the door.\nTo lock a rear door from outside the vehi-\ncle, turn the lock knob forward and close\nthe door. You do not need to pull and hold\nthe door handle as you close the door.\nNOTE:\nBe sure to hold the door handle when you\nclose a locked front door, or the door will\nnot remain locked.\n3-2\n55TH0-74E"},58{"page_number": 104, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nCentral Door Locking Sys\n(1)\n(4)\n(1)UNLOCK\n(2)LOCK\n(3)Front\n(4)Rear\nYou can lock and unlock all d\ning the tailgate) simultaneou\nthe key in the driver\u2019s door loc\nTo lock all doors simultaneous\nkey in the driver\u2019s door lock\ntop of the key toward the fron\ncle.\nTo unlock all doors simultane\nthe key in the driver\u2019s door l\nthe top of the key toward the\nvehicle twice.\n3-3 stem NOTE: N\nYou can switch the function that unlocks all \u2022\ndoors from requiring two turns to requiring\none turn, and vice versa, via the informa-\ntion display setting mode. For details on\nhow to use the information display, refer to\n(2)\n\u201cInformation display\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT \u2022\nCLUSTER\u201d section.\nTo unlock the driver\u2019s door only, insert the\n(3) key in that door lock and turn the top of the\nkey toward the rear of the vehicle once.\nC\n59RN03180\ndoors (includ-\nusly by using\nck.\nsly, insert the\nand turn the 74TB03002\nnt of the vehi- (1)LOCK\n(2)UNLOCK\neously, insert\nYou can also lock or unlock all doors by\nlock and turn pressing the front or rear of the switch,\ne rear of the respectively.\nE\nc\np NOTE:\n\u2022 You can also lock or unlock all doors by\noperating the transmitter or remote con-\ntroller. Refer to \u201cKeyless Entry System\nTransmitter / Keyless Push Start System\nRemote Controller\u201d in this section.\n\u2022 If your vehicle is equipped with the key-\nless push start system, you can also lock\nor unlock all doors by pushing the\nrequest switch. Refer to \u201cKeyless Entry\nSystem Transmitter / Keyless Push Start\nSystem Remote Controller\u201d in this sec-\ntion.\nChild-proof Locks (Rear Door)\n(1)\n(2)\n55TB0303\n(1)UNLOCK\n(2)LOCK\nEach of the rear doors is equipped with a\nchild-proof lock which can be used to help\nprevent unwanted opening of the door\n55TH0-74E"},59{"page_number": 105, "page_text": "from inside the vehicle. Wh\nlever is in the lock position\ndoor can only be opened f\nWhen the lock lever is in the\ntion (1), the rear door can be\ninside or outside.\nNOTE:\nWhen you open a door from\nyour hand out of the window\ndoor handle. hen the lock\n(2), the r\nfrom outsi\ne unlock p\nopened fr\nm inside,\nand use\npletely. BEFORE DRIVING\n3-4\n55TH0-74E"},60{"page_number": 106, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nUnlocking from inside the v\nIf you cannot unlock the tailg\nthe key in the driver\u2019s door lo\ndischarged lead-acid battery\ntion, ask Maruti Suzuki auth\nshop. In emergency situation\nprocedures below.\n1) Remove the luggage c\ncover (if equipped) and f\nseat forward for easier acc\n\u201cFolding rear seats\u201d in\nDRIVING\u201d section for deta\nfold the rear seat forward.\n(5)\n2) Remove the cover (5) u\nbladed screwdriver.\n3-5 vehicle K\ngate by using\nT\nock due to a\nor malfunc- (6) S\nhorized work-\nC\nns, follow the (7)\ncompartment\nfold the rear\ncess. Refer to\n\u201cFOR SAFE\nails on how to\n55T030460\n3) Open the cover (6), and then, move the\nemergency lever (7) to the direction of\nthe arrow with a flat-blade screwdriver\nas shown in the illustration.\n4) Push open the tailgate from inside. The\ntailgate will be latched again by simply\nclosing the tailgate. Y\nl\nIf the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push- l\ning the unlatch switch (3), have the vehicle (\ninspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorized e\nworkshop . k\n55T030450 s\nusing a flat- l Keyless Entry System\nTransmitter / Keyless Push\nStart System Remote\nController\n((22)) ((11))\n55T030010\nYour vehicle is equipped with either a key-\nless entry system transmitter (1) or a key-\nless push start system remote controller\n(2). The transmitter has only a keyless\nentry system. The remote controller has a\nkeyless entry system and a keyless push\nstart system. For details, refer to the fol-\nlowing explanations.\n55TH0-74E"},61{"page_number": 107, "page_text": " Keyless Entry System Transmitter C\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\nN\nY\nd\ni\n(1)\nm\n(2)\nh\n\u201c\n79MH0237 C\n(1)LOCK button\nT\n(2)UNLOCK button\nt\nw\nYou can lock or unlock all doors (including\nthe tailgate) simultaneously by operating\nW\nthe transmitter near the vehicle.\n\u2022\n\u2022\nC\no BEFORE DRIVING\nCentral door locking system\n\u2022 To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1)\nonce.\n\u2022 To unlock only the driver\u2019s door, push\nUNLOCK button (2) once.\n\u2022 To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK\nbutton (2) once again.\nNOTE:\nYou can switch the function that unlocks all\ndoors from requiring two pushes to requir-\ning one push, and vice versa, via the infor-\nmation display setting mode. For details on\nhow to use the information display, refer to\n\u201cInformation display\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT\nCLUSTER\u201d section.\nThe turn signal lights will flash once and\nthe siren will sound once (if equipped)\nwhen the doors are locked.\nWhen the doors are unlocked:\n\u2022 The turn signal lights will flash twice and\nthe siren will sound twice (if equipped).\n\u2022 If the interior light switch is in DOOR\nposition, the interior light will turn on for\nabout 15 seconds and then fade out. If\nyou insert the key into the ignition switch\nduring this time, the light will start to fade\nout immediately.\nCheck that the doors are locked after you\noperate LOCK button (1).\n3-6\n55TH0-74E"},62{"page_number": 108, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nNOTE:\nIf no door is opened within a\nonds after UNLOCK button (2)\nthe doors will automatically loc\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If you lock the doors using\nter when the engine hood\nsiren will sound 3 times to r\nequipped).\n\u2022 If the security system was t\nto an unauthorized entry int\nand then you unlock the do\ntransmitter, the siren will so\nto remind you. If this hap\nwhether your vehicle has\ninto while you were away fro\n\u2022 Once you push both of the\n(1) and UNLOCK button (\npush one of the buttons w\nonds, the siren will no\nequipped). However, push\nbuttons 5 seconds later, t\nsound.\n\u2022 You can set whether the sir\nequipped) when locking or u\ndoor(s) via the setting mode\nmation display. For details o\nthe information display, refe\ntion Display\u201d in \u201cINSTRUM\nTER\u201d section.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The maximum operating dis\nkeyless entry system transm\n5 m (16 ft.), but this can var\non the surroundings, esp\n3-7 other transmitting devices such as radio T\nabout 30 sec- towers or CB (Citizen\u2019s Band) radios. 2\n) is operated, \u2022 The door locks cannot be operated with a\nck again. the transmitter, if the ignition key is T\ninserted in the ignition switch. a\n\u2022 When any door is open, the door locks Y\nthe transmit-\ncan only be unlocked with the transmit- \u201c\nis open, the\nter, and the turn signal light will not flash. f\nremind you (if\n\u2022 If you lose one of the transmitters, ask\nN\nyour Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop\ntriggered due T\nas soon as possible for a replacement.\nto the vehicle w\nHave your Maruti Suzuki authorized\noors using the w\nworkshop program the new transmitter\nound 4 times s\ncode in your vehicle\u2019s memory so that\nppens, check\nthe old code is erased.\nbeen broken\nom it.\nLOCK button\n(2), then you\nwithin 5 sec-\not sound (if\nh one of the\nthe siren will\nren sounds (if\nunlocking the\ne of the infor-\non how to use\ner to \u201cInforma-\nMENT CLUS- Car locator function (if equipped)\nThis function helps in locating the vehicle.\nPush both of the LOCK button (1) and\nstance of the UNLOCK button (2) for more than 3 sec-\nmitter is about onds.\nry depending\npecially near The turn signal lights will blink for about\n27.5 seconds. Also, the siren will sound for\nabout 27.5 seconds at the same time.\nTo cancel the car locator function, press\nany button (LOCK or UNLOCK).\nYou can also turn the ignition switch to the\n\u201cON\u201d position to cancel the car locator\nfunction.\nNOTE:\nThe car locator function will not activate\nwhen the key is in the ignition switch or pre\nwarning / full blast warning by shock sen-\nsor or alarm is in activated condition.\n55TH0-74E"},63{"page_number": 109, "page_text": "Battery replacement\nIf the transmitter become\nreplace the battery.\nTo replace the battery of the tr\n1) Remove the screw (1), a\ntransmitter cover.\n2) Remove the transmitter (2) (3)Lithium disc type battery:\nes unusable, CR1616 or equivalent\n3) Put the edge of a flat-bladed screw-\nransmitter: driver in the slot of the transmitter (2)\nand pry it open.\n4) Replace the battery (3) so its + terminal\nfaces \u201c+\u201d mark of the transmitter.\n5) Close the transmitter and install it into\nthe transmitter holder.\n6) Close the transmitter cover, install and N\ntighten the screw (1). U\n7) Check that the door locks can be oper- e\nated with the transmitter. l\n8) Dispose of the used battery properly o\naccording to applicable rules or regula-\ntions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-\nies with ordinary household trash.\n55T030370\nNOTICE\nand open the\n\u2022 The transmitter is a sensitive elec-\n). tronic instrument. To avoid damag-\ning it, do not expose it to dust or\nmoisture or tamper with internal\nparts.\n\u2022 When replacing the battery by\nyourself, the transmitter controller\ncould be damaged affected by\nstatic electricity. Discharge the\nstatic electricity built up in your\nbody by touching metal before\nreplacing the battery.\nT\ni\nl\nt\n55T030380 BEFORE DRIVING\nNOTE:\nUsed batteries must be disposed of prop-\nerly according to applicable rules or regu-\nlations and must not be disposed of with\nordinary household trash.\n(1)\n80JM133\n(1)Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol\nThe crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1)\nindicates that a used battery should be col-\nlected separately from ordinary household\ntrash.\n3-8\n55TH0-74E"},64{"page_number": 110, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nBy ensuring the used battery\nof or recycled correctly, you w\nvent potential negative conse\nthe environment and human h\ncould otherwise be caused b\nate battery disposal. The\nmaterials will help to cons\nresources. For more detailed\nabout disposing of or recycling\nbattery, consult a Maruti Suzu\nworkshop .\nBe careful not to lose your\nleave it in the locked vehicle.\n3-9 Keyless Push Start System Remote T\ny is disposed\nwill help pre- Controller d\no\nequences for The remote controller enables the follow-\nn\nhealth, which ing operations:\nby inappropri- \u2022 You can lock or unlock the doors by C\nrecycling of operating LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on \u2022\nserve natural the remote controller. Refer to the expla-\nd information nation in this section. \u2022\ng of the used \u2022 You can lock or unlock the doors by\nuki authorized pushing the request switch. For details, \u2022\nrefer to the explanation in this section.\nr key and to \u2022 You can start the engine without using\nN\nan ignition key. For details, refer to\nY\n\u201cEngine switch (vehicle with keyless\nd\npush start system) (if equipped)\u201d in\ni\n\u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section.\nm\nh\n\u201c\nC\nT\n(2)\nt\nw\n(1)\nW\n\u2022\n\u2022\n52RM20060\n(1)LOCK button\n(2)UNLOCK button C\no There are two ways to lock or unlock all\ndoors (including the tailgate) simultane-\nously by operating the remote controller\nnear the vehicle.\nCentral door locking system\n\u2022 To lock all doors, push LOCK button (1)\nonce.\n\u2022 To unlock only the driver\u2019s door, push\nUNLOCK button (2) once.\n\u2022 To unlock other doors, push UNLOCK\nbutton (2) once again.\nNOTE:\nYou can switch the function that unlocks all\ndoors from requiring two pushes to requir-\ning one push, and vice versa, via the infor-\nmation display setting mode. For details on\nhow to use the information display, refer to\n\u201cInformation display\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT\nCLUSTER\u201d section.\nThe turn signal lights will flash once and\nthe siren will sound once (if equipped)\nwhen the doors are locked.\nWhen the doors are unlocked:\n\u2022 The turn signal lights will flash twice and\nthe siren will sound twice.\n\u2022 If the interior light switch is in DOOR\nposition, the interior light will turn on for\nabout 15 seconds and then fade out. If\nyou press the engine switch during this\ntime, the light will start to fade out imme-\ndiately.\nCheck that the doors are locked after you\noperate LOCK button (1).\n55TH0-74E"},65{"page_number": 111, "page_text": "NOTE:\nIf no door is opened within a\nonds after UNLOCK button (2)\nthe doors will automatically loc\nCar locator function\nThis function helps in locating\nPush both of LOCK butto\nUNLOCK button (2) for more\nonds. The turn signal lights\nabout 27.5 seconds. Also, t\nsound for about 27.5 seconds\ntime.\nTo cancel the car locator fun\nany button (LOCK or UNLOCK\nYou can also cancel the car\ntion in any of the following ope\n\u2022 Press the engine switch to\nignition mode to \u201cON\u201d.\n\u2022 Bring the remote controller\npress the request switch.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The car locator function wil\nwhen the ignition mode is \u201cA\nor pre warning / full blast\nshock sensor or alarm is\ncondition.\n\u2022 If you lock the doors using\ncontroller when the engin\nopen, the siren will sound 3\nremind you.\n\u2022 If the security system was t\nto an unauthorized entry int\nand then you unlock the do\nremote controller, the siren\ntimes to remind you. If th check whether your vehicle has been K\nabout 30 sec- broken into while you were away from it. r\n) is operated, \u2022 Once you push both of LOCK button (1)\nck again. and UNLOCK button (2), then you push\none of the buttons within 5 seconds, the\nsiren will not sound. However, push one\ng the vehicle.\nof the buttons 5 seconds later, the siren\non (1) and\nwill sound.\ne than 3 sec-\n\u2022 You can set whether the siren sounds\nwill blink for\nwhen locking or unlocking the door(s) via\nthe siren will\nthe setting mode of the information dis-\ns at the same\nplay.\n\u2022 For details on how to use the information\nnction, press\ndisplay, refer to \u201cInformation Display\u201d in\nK).\n\u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d section.\nlocator func-\n\u2022 The maximum operating distance of the\nerations.\nremote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),\no change the\nbut this can vary depending on the sur- W\nwith you and roundings, especially near other trans- o\nmitting devices such as radio towers or y\nCB (Citizen\u2019s Band) radios. (\n\u2022 The door locks cannot be operated with s\nll not activate the remote controller if the ignition mode f\nACC\u201d or \u201cON\u201d is other than the \u201cLOCK\u201d (OFF).\nt warning by \u2022 When any door is open, if you push W\nin activated LOCK button on the remote controller, \u2022\nthe exterior buzzer will sound and doors\ng the remote cannot be locked.\nne hood are \u2022 If you lose one of the remote controllers, T\ntimes to ask a Maruti Suzuki authorized work- t\nshop as soon as possible for replace- a\ntriggered due ment. Have a Maruti Suzuki authorized\nto the vehicle workshop program the new remote con- T\noors using the troller code in your vehicle\u2019s memory so \u2022\nwill sound 4 that the old code is erased.\nhis happens, BEFORE DRIVING\nKeyless unlocking/locking using the\nrequest switches\n\uff081\uff09\n55TB0305\nWhen the remote controller is within the\noperating range described in this section,\nyou can lock or unlock all the doors\n(including tailgate) by pushing the request\nswitch (1) on the driver\u2019s door handle or\nfront passenger\u2019s door handle or tailgate.\nWhen all doors are unlocked:\n\u2022 To lock all doors, push one of the\nrequest switches once.\nThe turn signal lights will flash once and\nthe siren will sound once when the doors\nare locked.\nTo unlock a door or all doors:\n\u2022 Push one of the request switches once\nto unlock only one door.\n3-10\n55TH0-74E"},66{"page_number": 112, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\n\u2022 Push one of the request sw\nto unlock all doors.\nNOTE:\nYou can switch the function th\ndoors from requiring two push\ning one push, and vice versa,\nmation display setting mode. F\nhow to use the information dis\n\u201cInformation display\u201d in \u201cIN\nCLUSTER\u201d section.\nWhen the doors are unlocked:\n\u2022 The turn signal lights will fla\nthe exterior buzzer will soun\n\u2022 If the interior light switch\nposition, the interior light w\nabout 15 seconds and then\nyou press the engine switc\ntime, the light will start to fad\ndiately.\nCheck that the doors are lock\noperate the request switch\ndoors.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The door locks cannot be\nthe request switch under\nconditions:\n\u2013 If any door is open or is no\nclosed.\n\u2013 If the ignition mode is i\nmode than LOCK (OFF).\n\u2022 If no doors are opened wit\nseconds after unlocking th\npushing the request switch\nwill be locked again automa\n3-11 witches twice \u2022\n(1)\n\u2022\nhat unlocks all\nhes to requir-\nvia the infor- (1)\nFor details on\nsplay, refer to\nNSTRUMENT\n(1)\n:\nash twice and\nnd twice.\nis in DOOR 68PH00210\nwill turn on for (1)80 cm (2.6 ft)\nn fade out. If\nch during this When the remote controller is within\nde out imme- approximately 80 cm (2.6 ft) from a front\ndoor handle or the tailgate switch, you can\nlock or unlock the doors by pushing the\nked after you request switch.\nto lock the\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If the remote controller is outside the\nrequest switch operating range\noperated by described above, you will not be able to\nthe following operate the request switch.\n\u2022 If the battery of the remote controller\nN\not completely runs down or there are strong radio\nT\nwaves or noise, the request switch oper-\nf\nin any other ating range may be reduced or the\no\nremote controller may be inoperative.\na\nthin about 30 \u2022 If the remote controller is too close to the\n\u2022\nhe doors by door glass, the request switches may not\nh, the doors operate.\natically. \u2022 If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-\ncle, the request switches may not oper-\nate normally.\n\u2022 The remote controller will only operate a\nrequest switch if it is within the switch\u2019s\noperating range. For example, if the\nremote controller is within the operating\nrange of the driver\u2019s door request switch\nbut not the front passenger\u2019s door\nrequest switch or the tailgate request\nswitch, the driver\u2019s door switch can be\noperated but the front passenger\u2019s door\nswitch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-\nated.\nNOTE:\nThe keyless push start system may not\nfunction correctly in certain environments\nor under certain operating conditions such\nas the following:\n\u2022 When there are strong signals coming\nfrom a television, power station or a cel-\nlular phone.\n55TH0-74E"},67{"page_number": 113, "page_text": "\u2022 When the remote controller\nwith or covered by a metal o\n\u2022 When a radio wave type rem\nentry is used nearby.\n\u2022 When the remote controll\nnear an electronic device s\nsonal computer.\nSome additional precautions\ntake and information you shou\nof are:\n\u2022 Check that the key is sto\nremote controller. If the rem\nbecomes unusable, you wil\nto lock or unlock the doors.\n\u2022 Check that the driver alway\nremote controller.\n\u2022 If you lose one of the remot\nask a Maruti Suzuki auth\nshop as soon as possible f\nment. Have a Maruti Suzu\nworkshop program the new\ntroller code in your vehicle\u2019s\nthat the old code is erased.\n\u2022 You can use up to four rem\nlers and the keys for your v\nMaruti Suzuki authorized w\ndetails.\n\u2022 The battery life of the remo\nis about two years, but\ndepending on usage conditi r is in contact\nR\nobject.\nT\nmote keyless\no\ny\nler is placed\n\u2022\nsuch as per-\ns you should\nuld be aware\n\u2022\nowed in the\nmote controller\nll not be able\n55T030030\nys carries the To stow the key into the remote controller,\npush the key in the remote controller until\nte controllers, you hear a click.\nhorized work-\nP\nfor a replace-\nt\nki authorized\nW w remote con- A) (\n(\ns memory so\no\nv\nmote control-\np\nvehicle. Ask a\nworkshop for\note controller\nit can vary\nions.\n55T030040\nTo remove the key from the remote control-\nler, slide the lock knob (A) in arrow direc-\ntion and pull the key out from the remote\ncontroller. BEFORE DRIVING\nRequest switch warning buzzer\nThe exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec-\nonds in the following conditions to warn\nyou that the request switch is not working:\n\u2022 The request switch is pressed after all\ndoors are closed with the ignition mode\nchanged to ACC or ON position by\npressing the engine switch when the\nremote controller is outside the vehicle.\n\u2022 The request switch is pressed in any of\nthe following conditions after changing\nthe ignition mode to LOCK (OFF) by\npressing the engine switch.\n\u2013 The remote controller is left inside the\nvehicle.\n\u2013 Any door (including the tailgate) is\nopen.\nPress the request switch again after doing\nthe following:\nWith the ignition mode changed to LOCK\n(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bring\nout the remote controller if it is inside the\nvehicle and check that all doors are com-\npletely closed.\n3-12\n55TH0-74E"},68{"page_number": 114, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nReminder function\nIf the remote controller is not i\nunder the following conditions\nsounds intermittently for abou\nand the immobilizer/keyless pu\ntem warning light on the instru\nblinks:\nWhen one or more doors are\nall of the doors are later clo\nignition in any other mode\n(OFF).\n3-13 The indicator light will turn off within sev- B\neral seconds after the remote controller is\nreturned to an area of the vehicle other\nthan the rear luggage area.\nIf the remote controller is left in the vehicle\nand you lock the driver\u2019s door or front pas-\nsenger\u2019s door as described below, the door\nwill be automatically unlocked.\n\u2022 If you open the driver\u2019s door and lock the\ndoor by turning the lock knob forward or\npushing the power door locking switch,\nthe driver\u2019s door will be automatically\nunlocked.\n\u2022 If you open the front passenger\u2019s door\n74TB03006 and lock the door by turning the lock\nin the vehicle knob forward or pushing the power door\ns, the buzzer locking switch, the front passenger\u2019s\nut 2 seconds door will be automatically unlocked.\nush start sys-\nument cluster NOTE:\n\u2022 The reminder will not operate when the\ne opened and remote controller is on the instrument\nosed with the panel, in the glove box, in a storage\nthan LOCK compartment, in the sun visor or on the N\nfloor, etc.\n\u2022\n\u2022 Check that the driver always carries the\nremote controller.\n\u2022 Do not leave the remote controller in the\nvehicle when leaving the vehicle.\n\u2022\n\u2022 Battery Replacement\nNOTE:\n\u2022 Used batteries must be disposed of\nproperly according to applicable rules or\nregulations and must not be disposed of\nwith ordinary household trash.\n\u2022 You may damage the remote controller\nwhen replacing its battery. Asking Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop is recom-\nmended.\n\u2022 When you purchase the battery by your-\nself at a Maruti Suzuki authorized work-\n55TH0-74E"},69{"page_number": 115, "page_text": "shop or the other stores, ch\nof manufacture for the batte\nIf the remote controller bec\nable, replace the battery as fo\n(2)\n1) Pry open the remote contro\n\u2022 To prevent the case from\naged, cover the flat-bl\ndriver with a soft cloth. In\nbladed screwdriver in th\npry it open.\n2) Replace the battery.\n\u2022 Remove the old battery\nthe case from being da heck the year the flat-bladed screwdriver covered\nery. with a soft cloth.\ncomes unreli-\nollows:\n(3)\nCR2032\n(1)\n59RN03070\n(3)Lithium disc type battery:\nCR2032 or equivalent T\n59RN03060\ni\noller. 3) Place the battery (3) so its + terminal l\nm being dam- faces up as shown in the illustration. t\nladed screw- 4) Close the remote controller firmly.\nnsert the flat- 5) Make sure the door locks can be oper- B\nhe slot (1) to ated with the remote controller. o\nv\n6) Dispose of the used battery properly\nt\naccording to applicable rules or regula-\nc\ntions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-\na\nies with ordinary household trash.\nm\nr\na\nb\nw\ny. To prevent\namaged, use BEFORE DRIVING\n(1)\n80JM133\n(1)Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol\nThe crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (1)\nindicates that a used battery should be col-\nlected separately from ordinary household\ntrash.\nBy ensuring the used battery is disposed\nof or recycled correctly, you will help pre-\nvent potential negative consequences for\nthe environment and human health, which\ncould otherwise be caused by inappropri-\nate battery disposal. The recycling of\nmaterials will help to conserve natural\nresources. For more detailed information\nabout disposing of or recycling of the used\nbattery, consult Maruti Suzuki authorized\nworkshop.\n3-14\n55TH0-74E"},70{"page_number": 116, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nSecurity System (if e\nThe security system is arme\nclose and lock all doors (inclu\nhood and tailgate) by using\nentry system transmitter, k\nstart system remote controlle\nswitch.\nOnce the system is armed, an\nopen a door by using any oth\nthan the keyless entry system\nkeyless push start system rem\nler, request switch or open\nhood, will cause the alarm to b\n* These means include the fol\n\u2013 The key\n\u2013 The lock knob on a door\n\u2013 The central door locking s\n\u2013 The tailgate unlatch switc\nAlso, in case that you have s\nsensor to enabled state and s\nof the pre-warning function a\nwarning function to a level oth\nwarning will be triggered in\nattempt to tamper with the\nshock sensor can be selecte\ndisabled state, and sensitiv\nwarning can be adjusted as de\nthe shock sensor, ask your M\nauthorized workshop or use\nmode of the information displa\n3-15 equipped) NOTE: \u2022\n\u2022 The default setting of the shock sensor\ned after you is in the disabled state. Set to the\nuding engine enabled state and adjust sensitivity of\nthe keyless each warning according to your prefer-\nH\nkeyless push ence. For details on how to use the infor-\ner or request mation display, refer to \u201cInformation L\nDisplay\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d t\nny attempt to section. t\nher means (*) \u2022 Your authorized workshop may have r\nm transmitter, already set the shock sensor of the vehi- W\nmote control- cle to the enabled state before you pur- c\nn the engine chase it. m\nbe triggered. Consult your authorized workshop for\nllowing: further information.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The security system generates alarms\nswitch\nwhen any of the predetermined condi-\nch\ntions is met. However, the system does\nset the shock\nnot have any function of blocking unau-\nset sensitivity\nthorized entry into the vehicle.\nand full blast\n\u2022 Always use the keyless entry system\nher than 0, the\ntransmitter, keyless push start system\ncase of any\nremote controller or request switch to\nvehicle. The\nunlock the doors when the security sys-\ned enabled or\ntem has been armed.Using a key\nvity of each\ninstead will trigger the alarm.\nesired. To set N\n\u2022 If a person who does not know the secu-\nMaruti Suzuki \u2022\nrity system is going to drive the vehicle,\ne the setting\nwe recommend you explain the system\nay.\nand its operation to the person. Mistak-\nenly triggering the alarm may cause a\nnuisance to others. \u2022 Even if the security system is armed,\nyou should still be careful to guard\nagainst theft. Do not leave money or\nvaluable things in the vehicle.\nHow to Arm the Security System\nLock all doors (including engine hood and\ntailgate) using the keyless entry system\ntransmitter, keyless push start system\nremote controller or request switch.\nWhen the system is armed, the indicator\ncontinues to blink at intervals of approxi-\nmately 2 seconds.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 To prevent the alarm from being acci-\ndentally triggered, avoid arming it while\nanyone remains inside the vehicle. The\nalarm will be triggered if any person\ninside opens the door, tailgate, engine\nhood, or the warning may be triggered if\nanyone swings the vehicle (if the shock\nsensor is in the enabled state).\n55TH0-74E"},71{"page_number": 117, "page_text": "\u2022 The security system is not\nall doors are locked using\noutside, using the door lock\ncentral door locking switch f\n\u2022 If any door is not operated w\nimately 30 seconds after the\nbeen unlocked using the k\nsystem transmitter, keyless\nsystem remote controller\nswitch, the doors are a\nlocked again. When the\nlocked, the security syst\narmed.\n\u2022 If the security system indica\nwhen the ignition switch is\nposition or the ignition mo\nthere may be something wr\nsecurity system. Ask your M\nauthorized workshop to ins\ntem.\nHow to Disarm the Secur\nSimply unlock the doors using\nentry system transmitter, k\nstart system remote controlle\nswitch. The security system\ngo out, indicating that the sec\nis disarmed. armed when How to Stop the Alarm C\nthe key from B\nShould the alarm be triggered accidentally,\nk knobs or the\nthe alarm will stop by the following opera- I\nfrom inside.\nwithin approx- tions. t\n\u2022 Press the engine switch to change the t\ne doors have\nignition mode to ON or turn the ignition t\nkeyless entry\nswitch to \u201cON\u201d position in case of emer- s\ns push start\ngency. d\nor request\n\u2022 Unlock the doors using the keyless entry w\nautomatically\nsystem transmitter, keyless push start w\ne doors are\nsystem remote controller or request\ntem will be S\nswitch.\nator (1) blinks NOTE: \u2022\ns in the \u201cON\u201d \u2022 Even after the alarm has stopped, if you\node is \u201cON\u201d, lock the doors using the keyless entry\nrong with the system transmitter, keyless push start\nMaruti Suzuki system remote controller or request\nspect the sys- switch, the security system will be\nrearmed.\n\u2022 If you disconnect the battery while the\nrity System\nsecurity system is in the armed condition\ng the keyless or the alarm is actually in operation, the\nkeyless push alarm will be re-triggered when the bat- \u2022\ner or request tery is reconnected.\nindicator will \u2022 Even after the alarm has stopped at the\ncurity system end of the predetermined operation time,\nit will be triggered again if any of the\ndoors, tailgate or engine hood is opened, (\nwithout disarming the security system. \u2022 BEFORE DRIVING\nChecking Whether the Alarm has\nBeen Triggered During Parking\nIf the alarm was triggered and you then\nturn the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d position or\nthe ignition mode is ON the security sys-\ntem indicator will blink rapidly for about 8\nseconds and a buzzer will beep 4 times\nduring this period. If this happens, check\nwhether the vehicle has been broken into\nwhile you were away from it.\nSecurity System Indication\n\u2022 If any of the doors or tailgate are opened\nwithout unlocking by the keyless entry\nsystem transmitter, keyless push start\nsystem remote controller or request\nswitch, all turn signal lights start to blink\nand the interior buzzer beeps intermit-\ntently. After 5 seconds, the siren will\nsound for about 27.5 seconds. The\nsecurity system indicator continues to\nblink during this time.\n\u2022 If the engine hood is opened, all turn sig-\nnal lights blink, and the siren sounds for\nabout 27.5 seconds. The security sys-\ntem indicator continues to blink during\nthis time.\n(If the shock sensor is in the enabled state)\n\u2022 If the vehicle feels a shock higher than\nthe pre-warning sensitivity, the siren\nsounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warn-\ning). If the vehicle feel a shock higher\nthan the full blast warning sensitivity, the\nsiren sounds for about 5 seconds (full\n3-16\n55TH0-74E"},72{"page_number": 118, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nblast warning). The security\ncator continues to blink duri\nNOTE:\nIf you set the full blast warnin\nhigher than the pre-warning\nthe setting mode of the inform\nor the vehicle feels such sho\nable to trigger the full blast wa\nblast warning will be trigger\ntially. In this case, the pre-wa\nbe triggered.\n3-17 y system indi-\ning this time.\nng sensitivity\nsensitivity in\nmation display,\nock as to be\narning, the full\nred preferen-\narning will not\nThe driver\u2019s door has a switch (1) to oper-\nate the driver\u2019s window, and a switch (2) to\noperate the front passenger\u2019s window or\nthere are switches (3), (4), to operate the\nrear left and right passenger windows,\nrespectively. 81A009\n55TH0-74E"},73{"page_number": 119, "page_text": "To open a window, push the to\nswitch. To close the window, l\npart of the switch.\nThe driver\u2019s window has A\nand AUTO-UP features for gr\nnience (at toll booths or d\nrestaurants, for example). Th\nallow the driver to open or cl\ndow without holding the wind\nDOWN or UP position. Press\nup the driver\u2019s window switc\nand release it. To stop the win\nreaches the FULL-DOWN\nposition, pull up or push dow\nbriefly.\nLock switch\nThe driver\u2019s door also has a lo\nthe passenger\u2019s window(s).\npush in the lock switch, the\nwindow(s) cannot be raised o op part of the operating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)\nlift up the top or (5). To restore normal operation, release\nthe lock switch by pushing it again.\nAUTO-DOWN\nreater conve-\ndrive-through\nhese features\nlose the win-\ndow switch in\ns down or lift\nch completely\nndow before it\nor FULL-UP\nwn the switch\nN\nI\no\nb\nt\nn\n74TB03005\nock switch for\n. When you\npassenger\u2019s\nor lowered by BEFORE DRIVING\nNOTE:\nIf you drive with one of the rear windows\nopen, you may hear a loud sound caused\nby air vibration. To reduce the sound, open\nthe driver\u2019s or front passenger\u2019s window, or\nnarrow the rear window opening.\n3-18\n55TH0-74E"},74{"page_number": 120, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nPinching Prevention Func\nThe driver\u2019s window is equi\npinching prevention function.\ndetects a foreign object that\nthe window as it is being close\nUP feature, which allows you\nwindow without holding the w\nin UP position, and stops the\nclosing to prevent damage.\nNOTE:\nEven if you cannot close the w\nAUTO-UP feature because th\nsomething wrong with the pinc\n3-19 ction tion function, you can close the window by\nipped with a holding the window switch in UP position.\nThis function If you drive in extreme off-road condition,\nis caught in the pinching prevention function may oper-\ned by AUTO- ate accidentally because the window\nu to close the reacts to vehicle jolting.\nwindow switch\nwindow from Pinching prevention function initializa-\ntion\nWhen you disconnect and reconnect the I\nlead-acid battery or replace the fuse, the w\nfunction will be deactivated. In this condi- s\ntion, the AUTO-DOWN feature will be t\ndeactivated, while the AUTO-UP feature b\nmay remain activated. The pinching pre-\nvention function needs to be initialized.\nTo initialize the pinching prevention func-\ntion, use the following procedure:\n1) Turn the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d position\nor press the engine switch to change\nthe ignition mode to ON.\n2) Open the driver\u2019s window fully by hold-\ning the window switch in DOWN posi-\ntion.\n3) Close the driver\u2019s window by holding\nthe switch in UP position, and keep\nholding the switch for 2 seconds after\nthe window is fully closed.\n4) Check the driver\u2019s window to see if the\nAUTO-DOWN/UP feature works.\nwindow by the\nhere may be\nching preven- If the AUTO-DOWN/UP feature will not\nwork after initialization, there might be\nsomething wrong with the pinching preven-\ntion function. Have your vehicle inspected\nby Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\n55TH0-74E"},75{"page_number": 121, "page_text": "Level the headlight beam acc\nload condition of your vehicl\nthis switch. The chart shows\nate switch position for differen\nconditions. For Petrol Model F\ncording to the\nle by turning\nthe appropri-\nnt vehicle load BEFORE DRIVING\nFor CNG Model\n3-20\n55TH0-74E"},76{"page_number": 122, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nLighting Control Leve\nAutomatic Light Operatio\n(if equipped)\n(4)\n(3)\n(2)\n(1)\n3-21 er Your vehicle\u2019s lighting system is controlled by tw\nand the auto-on headlight system (when the lig\non\nThe two systems work together to operate your\nON: Lights ON\nLIGHT: When it is light around the light sens\nDARK: When it is dark around the light sens\n)\n55TB301\n\uff085\uff09\n55T030190 wo main systems: the lighting control lever\nghting switch is in \u201cAUTO\u201d position).\nr lights as shown in the following chart:\nsor (5).\nsor (5).\n55TH0-74E"},77{"page_number": 123, "page_text": "To turn the lights on or off, tw\non the end of the lighting c\nThere are four positions:\nOFF (1)\nAll lights are off.\nAUTO (2) (if equipped)\nThis function works when\nswitch is turned to \u201cON\u201d po\nengine switch is pressed to\nignition mode to ON. The he\nposition lights are turned on\nmatically according to the am\nside light detected by a sens\nout automatically when you t\ntion switch to \u201cACC\u201d or \u201cLOCK\nchange the ignition mode to A\n(OFF) by pressing the engine\nThe light sensor (5) for sensin\nof outside light is installed on\nger\u2019s seat side of instrument p\nNOTE:\n\u2022 Avoid covering the light se\nthe windshield with a sticke\nmay impair the performance wist the knob sor and make the system unable to con- W\ncontrol lever. trol operation of the lights correctly. w\n\u2022 If you turned the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d b\nposition or changed the ignition mode to s\nON by pressing the engine switch and b\n\u201cAUTO\u201d position remains selected, the i\nheadlights and position lights come on m\nthe ignition automatically as it gets dark outside, b\nosition or the even with the engine not running. Leav- s\no change the ing the lights lit for a long time may lead h\neadlights and to a completely discharged battery.\nA\nand off auto-\n(3) (\nmount of out-\nFront position lights, tail lights, license\nsor. They go\nplate light and instrument lights are on, but\nturn the igni-\nheadlights are off.\nK\u201d position or\nACC or LOCK (4)\nswitch. Front position lights, tail lights, license\nplate light, instrument lights and headlights\nng the amount\nare on.\nn the passen-\npanel.\nT\nc\nt\nt\nensor area of\nC\ner. The sticker\no\ne of the sen-\n55TB302 1 BEFORE DRIVING\nWith the headlights on, push the lever for-\nward to switch to the high beams (main\nbeams) and pull the lever toward you to\nswitch to the low beams. When the high\nbeams (main beams) are on, a light on the\ninstrument cluster will come on. To\nmomentarily activate the high beams (main\nbeams) as a passing signal, pull the lever\nslightly toward you and release it when you\nhave completed the signal.\nAuto-on headlight system\n(if equipped)\n\uff085\uff09\n55T030190\nThe auto-on headlight system automati-\ncally turns on all lights that are operated by\nthe lighting switch, when the following\nthree conditions are all met.\nConditions for auto-on headlight system\noperation:\n1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).\n3-22\n55TH0-74E"},78{"page_number": 124, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\n2) The lighting switch is in \u201c\ntion.\n3) You turn the ignition sw\nposition or press the engi\nchange the ignition mode t\nThis system is activated by a\nthe light sensor (5) on the pa\nof instrument panel. Do not co\nsor (5). Otherwise, the system\ncorrectly.\nNOTE:\nThe light sensor reacts even\nrays, so it may operate inco\nthere are strong infrared rays.\n3-23 \u201cAUTO\u201d posi- Light Reminder Buzzer G\nThe interior buzzer continuously beeps if G\nwitch to \u201cON\u201d\nyou open the driver\u2019s door without turning h\nine switch to\noff the headlights and position lights. This b\nto ON.\nfunction is triggered under the following\n\u201c\na signal from condition:\nassenger side The headlights and/or position lights are E\nover the sen- on even after the ignition switch is turned w\nm will not work off, or the engine switch is pressed to f\nchange the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF). l\ns\nThe buzzer stops sounding when you turn\nt\noff the headlights and position lights.\nt\nNOTE: i\nA message is indicated on the information\nT\ndisplay in the instrument cluster while the\n1\nbuzzer is sounding.\nDaytime Running Light (D.R.L.) 2\nSystem (if equipped)\nWhen the engine is started, the daytime\nn to infrared running lights are turned on by this system.\n3\norrectly when\nConditions for D.R.L. system operation\n.\n1) The engine is running.\n2) Headlights are off.\nNOTE:\nBrightness of the daytime running lights is\ndifferent from the brightness of the position\nlights, but it is not a malfunction. Guide Me Light (if equipped)\nGuide me light has two functions of \u201cTo\nhome\u201d and \u201cTo car\u201d for improving your visi-\nbility in the dark.\n\u201cTo home\u201d function\nEven after you leave the car, the ground\nwill be illuminated for a short while with this\nfunction. You can turn on the front position\nlights and the headlights in the low beam\nsetting for about 10 seconds after the igni-\ntion switch is turned to \u201cLOCK\u201d position or\nthe engine switch is pressed to change the\nignition mode to LOCK (OFF).\nTo set the function:\n1) Turn the lighting switch to \u201cAUTO\u201d posi-\ntion.\n2) Turn the ignition switch to \u201cLOCK\u201d posi-\ntion or press the engine switch to\nchange the ignition mode to LOCK\n(OFF).\n3) Pull the lighting control lever toward\nyou once and open the driver\u2019s side\ndoor within 60 seconds. Or pull the\nlighting control lever toward you once\nwhile the driver\u2019s side door is open.\n55TH0-74E"},79{"page_number": 125, "page_text": "To cancel the function:\nPerform any of the following o\n\u2022 Pull the lighting control leve\nonce.\n\u2022 Turn the ignition switch to \u201cA\nposition or change the igni\nACC or ON by pressing\nswitch.\n\u2022 Turn the lighting switch t\nposition than \u201cAUTO\u201d positio\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When the \u201cTo home\u201d is fun\nfront fog lights (if equippe\nlight (if equipped) and th\n(high beam) are not turned o\n\u2022 Lighting time of the \u201cTo ho\ncan be changed on the info\nplay. Refer to \u201cInformation\n\u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d\n\u201cTo car\u201d function\nBefore you get in the vehicle\nwill be illuminated for a short w\nlead the driver to the vehicle\nbutton of the keyless push\nremote controller is pressed w\ning switch is positioned in\nfront position lights and the\nthe low beam are turned on\nonds.\nThis function will operate on\ndark outside the vehicle. To cancel the function: T\noperations. Perform any of the following operations.\nY\ner toward you \u2022 Lock the doors by using the keyless\nw\npush start system remote controller, the\nt\nACC\u201d or \u201cON\u201d request switch or the key in the driver\u2019s\nition mode to door lock. T\ng the engine \u2022 Change the ignition mode to ACC or ON\nW\nby pressing the engine switch.\nt\nto any other \u2022 Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON\nu\non. position or the engine switch is pressed\nr\nto change the ignition mode to ACC or\nON.\nnctioning, the\n\u2022 Turn the knob at the end of the lighting\ned), rear fog\ncontrol lever to any other position than\nhe headlights\nAUTO position.\non.\nome\u201d function NOTE:\normation dis- \u2022 When the \u201cTo car\u201d is functioning, the\nn display\u201d in front fog lights (if equipped), rear fog\n\u201d section. light (if equipped) and the headlights\n(high beam) are not turned on.\n\u2022 Lighting time of the \u201cTo car\u201d function can\ne, the ground\nbe changed on the information display.\nwhile to easily\nRefer to \u201cInformation display\u201d in\ne. If UNLOCK\n\u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d section.\nstart system\nwhile the light-\n\u201cAUTO\u201d, the \u2022\nheadlights in\nn for 10 sec-\nnly when it is\n\u2022\n\u2022 BEFORE DRIVING\nTurn Signal Control Lever\nYou can use the turn signal control lever\nwhen the ignition switch in \u201cON\u201d position or\nthe ignition mode ON.\nTurn Signal Operation\nWith the ignition switch in \u201cON\u201d position or\nthe ignition mode ON, move the lever\nupward or downward to activate the left or\nright turn signals.\nTurning left ((aa))\n(((11))\n((bb))\nTurning right\n55TB303\n\u2022 Move the turn signal control lever (1) as\nfollows:\n\u2013 Turning left: Move the lever upward.\n\u2013 Turning right: Move the lever down-\nward\n\u2022 When you move the lever, the turn signal\nlights as well as the turn signal light indi-\ncators on the instrument cluster will flash\nsimultaneously.\n\u2022 When you move the lever to its original\nposition, the turn signal lights as well as\n3-24\n55TH0-74E"},80{"page_number": 126, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nthe turn signal light indica\ninstrument cluster will be tur\nNOTE:\nIf the angle by which you turn\nwheel is small, the lever wi\nautomatically to its original po\ncase, return the lever to its orig\nmanually.\nLane change signal\nMove the lever partially upwa\nward to when turning leftward\nand hold the lever in the move\n\u2022 The turn signal and its in\nwhile the lever is held at the\ntion.\n\u2022 The turn signal and its indi\ntimes even if you returne\nimmediately after the activa\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The turn signal and its indi\nset whether they flash 3 tim\nturn signal lever is returned\n3-25 ators on the mation display. Refer to \u201cInformation dis-\nrned off. play\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d\nsection.\n\u2022 You can customize the setting for the\nn the steering\nnumber of flashing times of the turn sig-\nwill not return\nnal and its indicator (1 to 4 times).\nosition. In this\nPlease ask Maruti Suzuki authorized\nginal position\nworkshop for the customization.\nY\nw\nt\ni\n\u2022\n\u2022\nard or down-\n\u2022\nd or rightward\ned position.\nndicator flash\ne moved posi-\nicator flash 3\ned the lever\nation.\nicator can be\nmes after the\nvia the infor- You can use the hazard warning switch to\nwarn the other drivers of possible risk of\ntraffic hazard when you park your vehicle\nin case of emergency.\n\u2022 Push the hazard warning switch to acti-\nvate the hazard warning lights.All the\nturn signal lights as well as both turn sig-\nnal indicators will flash simultaneously.\n\u2022 Push the switch again to turn off the haz-\nard warning switch.\n\u2022 The instrument panel in the above figure\nis a typical example; the actual equip-\nment depends on the vehicle type.\n55TH0-74E"},81{"page_number": 127, "page_text": "Windshield Wiper and\nLever\nWhen the ignition switch in \u201c\nor the ignition mode ON, you\nwiper/washer lever. d Washer W\ns\nW\ns\n\u201cON\u201d position\np\nu can use the\nt\ne\nw\nI\na\n1\n2\n3\n4\nI\nt\nS\nw BEFORE DRIVING\nWhen the operative wipers suddenly\nstop\nWhen the wipers are under heavy load\nsuch as covered by snow and the tem-\nperature of the wiper motor becomes high,\nthe breaker will be activated and the wip-\ners will temporarily stop to protect the\nwiper motor from overheating.\nIf this happens, perform the following oper-\nations:\n1) Stop the vehicle in a safe place, and\nturn the ignition switch to \u201cACC\u201d or\n\u201cLOCK\u201d position or press the engine\nswitch to change the ignition mode to\nACC or LOCK (OFF).\n2) Move the wiper lever and switch to\n\u201cOFF\u201d position.\n3) Remove obstacles such as snow on the\nwipers.\n4) After a while, when the temperature of\nthe wiper motor becomes low enough,\nthe breaker will be reset automatically\nand you can use the wipers.\nIf you cannot use the wipers after a while,\nthere may be another problem. Ask Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop to have the\nwipers inspected.\n3-26\n55TH0-74E"},82{"page_number": 128, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nWindshield Wipers\nYou can operate the windshie\nmoving the lever (1) upward o\n3-27 W\n((11))\n((11))\n55TB306\n55TB305\nIf the lever is equipped with \u201cINT TIME\u201d\neld wipers by control, turn the control forward or back- I\nor downward. ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera- w\na\ntion to the desired interval.\nc Windshield Washer\n55TB307\nIf you pull the lever (1) toward you, the\nwindshield washer fluid will be sprayed\nand the windshield wipers will automati-\ncally operate a few times.\n55TH0-74E"},83{"page_number": 129, "page_text": " Rear Window Wiper R\n55TB308\n\u2022\nYou can operate the rear window wiper by\ntwisting the lever (2) as shown in the illus-\ntration.\n\u2022 BEFORE DRIVING\nRear Window Washer\n55TB309\n\u2022 If you twist the lever (2) in the direction\nof \uf0c7 and align it to (washer) position\nabove \u201cON\u201d position, the rear window\nwasher fluid will be sprayed and the rear\nwiper will operate simultaneously. If you\nrelease your hand from the lever, it will\nreturn to \u201cON\u201d position.\n\u2022 If you twist the lever (2) in the direction\nof \uf0c8 and align it to (washer) position\nbelow \u201cOFF\u201d position, the rear window\nwasher fluid will be sprayed and the rear\nwiper will operate simultaneously. If\nyou release your hand from the lever, it\nwill return to \u201cOFF\u201d position.\n3-28\n55TH0-74E"},84{"page_number": 130, "page_text": "BEFORE DRIVING\nHorn\nPress the horn button of the st\nto sound the horn. The horn w\nthe ignition switch in any po\nignition mode.\n3-29 Heated Rear Window Switch\n(1)\n55T030300\n52RM20420\nWhile the engine is running or the engine\nteering wheel\nautomatically stops by the ENG A-STOP\nwill sound with system, you can use the heated rear win-\nosition or any N\ndow switch as the defogger for the rear\n\u2022\nwindow glass.\nRefer to \u201cENG A-STOP System (Engine\nAuto Stop Start System) (if equipped)\u201d in\nthe \u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d sec-\ntion.\n\u2022\n\u2022 If you push the rear defogger switch, the\nrear window glass will be heated and the\nindicator light (1) will turn on. To turn off\nthe defogger, push the switch again.\n\u2022 The defogger will automatically turn off\nafter the defogger remains on for 15 min-\nutes to prevent discharging of the lead-\nacid battery.\n\u2022 If you turn the ignition switch to \u201cACC\u201d or\n\u201cLOCK\u201d position or press the engine switch to change the ignition mode to\nACC or LOCK (OFF) with the defogger\non, the defogger will not automatically\noperate even if you start the engine\nagain.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When you wipe the interior side of the\nrear window glass, use a soft cloth\ndampened with water and wipe the glass\nalong the heat wires, not to damage the\nheat wires and the terminals.\n\u2022 The defogger will work only when the\nengine is running.\n55TH0-74E"},85{"page_number": 131, "page_text": " INSTRUMENT C\nInstrument Cluster (Ty\nInformation Display (T\nInstrument Cluster (Ty\nInformation Display (T\nWarning and Indicator\n59RN04640 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nCLUSTER\nype A) ...............................................4-1\nType A) .............................................4-4\nype B) ...............................................4-14\nType B) .............................................4-17\nr Lights ............................................4-42\n55TH0-74E"},86{"page_number": 132, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nInstrument Cluster (T\n(1)Speedometer\n(2)Tachometer\n(3)Information display\n(4)\nNOTE:\nFor vehicle fitted with CNG fue\n4-1 R\nType A)\n(4)Trip meter selector knob\n(5)Indicator selector knob\n(6)Warning and indicator lights\n(2) (6) (1\n(6) (7) (3) (8)\nel system, refer to the supplementary owner's manual. (7)Fuel gauge\n(8)Temperature gauge\n1) (5)\n(6)\n55TB403\n55TH0-74E"},87{"page_number": 133, "page_text": "Speedometer\nThe speedometer indicates v\nin km/h.\nSpeed Alert System\nThe speed alert system g\nwarning for alert of over-spe\nWhen vehicle speed exceeds\nh, primary level warning with tw\nsound every minute. When\nspeed exceeds about 120 km\nary level warning with contin\nwill sound.\nIf the vehicle speed is slow\nabout 118 km/h, primary\nresume. If the vehicle is slow\nabout 78 km/h, speed alert\nstop. This buzzer does not\nmalfunction in vehicle.\nTachometer\nThe tachometer indicates eng\nrevolutions per minute. ve\ngiv\nee\na\nw\nm\nnu\nwe\nw\nw\nw\nin\nd\ngives a rough indication of the amount of\nfuel in the fuel tank. \u201cF\u201d stands for full and T\n\u201cE\u201d stands for empty. d\ngine speed in c\nIf the fuel meter indicator shows only one\nsegment to \u201cE\u201d, refill the tank as soon as\npossible.\nNOTE:\nIf the last segment blinks, it means that the\nfuel is almost empty.\nIf the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,\nrefill the fuel tank immediately. NSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nn point of the low fuel warning\ns depending on road condi-\nample, slope or curve) and\ntions because of fuel move-\nnk.\nfuel warning light\u201d in \u201cWarn-\nator lights\u201d in this section for\ndetails.\nThe mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler\ndoor is located on the left side of the vehi-\ncle.\n4-2\n55TH0-74E"},88{"page_number": 134, "page_text": "acceptable temperature ran\n\u201cH\u201d and \u201cC\u201d. If the indicator\n\u201cH\u201d, overheating is indicated\nengine overheats, the Eng\nTemperature Light (1) will be\nthe instructions for engine ov\n\u201cEMERGENCY SERVICE\u201d sec\nO/D\nOFF\n4-3 nge between\n(1)\nr approaches\nd. When the\ngine Coolant\ne ONH. Follow\nverheating in\nction\n55TB406 ition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d\ne engine switch is pressed to\nnition mode to ON, the instru-\nghts come on.\nhas a system to automatically\ntness of the instrument panel\nhe position lights or headlights\nsition lights and/or headlights\nan adjust the meter illumina-\ns.\nthe brightness of the instru-\nghts, turn the indicator selec-\nlockwise.\ne brightness of the instrument\nturn the indicator selector\nnterclockwise.\n55TH0-74E"},89{"page_number": 135, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 If you do not turn the knob w\nseconds of activating, the\ncontrol display will be cance\nically.\n\u2022 When you reconnect the le\ntery, the brightness of the\npanel lights will be reinitializ\nthe brightness according to\nence.\nNOTE:\nIf you adjust to the maximum\nlevel when the position lights\nare on, the following functions\nceled.\n\u2022 The function which autom\nthe brightness of instrument\n\u2022 The function which opera\nbrightness control, excep\nbrightness level Information Display (Type A) T\nwithin several i\nInformation display is shown when the igni-\ne brightness\neled automat- tion switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d position or the D\nignition mode is ON. F\nead-acid bat- D\ne instrument ( T\nzed. Readjust D\no your prefer-\nD\nT\nD\nm brightness S\nor headlights s\ns will be can- m\ni\nmatically dims 55TB405 c\nt pane\nates w\npt m INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nThe information display shows the follow-\ning information.\nDisplay (A)\nFuel gauge\nDisplay (B)\nTrip meter / Odometer / Fuel consumption /\nDriving range\nDisplay (C)\nThermometer (if equipped)\nDisplay (D)\nSelector position (for automatic transmis-\nsion vehicles) / Gear position (for auto-\nmatic transmission vehicles) / Gearshift\nindicator (for manual transmission vehi-\ncles)\n(E)\nture gauge\n(F)\nsensor indication and door open\n(if equipped)\n(G)\n(H)\now (If equipped)\n4-4\n55TH0-74E"},90{"page_number": 136, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTE\nClock\nThe display (G) shows the tim\nTo change the time indication\n1) Push the trip meter sele\nand the indicator selec\ntogether.\n2) To change the hour indic\nindicator selector knob (2\nrepeatedly when the ho\nblinks. To change the h\nquickly, turn and hold\nselector knob (2). To set\ncation, push the indicator\n(2) and the minute indicati\n3) To change the minute in\nthe indicator selector kn\nright repeatedly when the\ncation blinks. To chang\nindication quickly, turn\nindicator selector knob (2\nminute indication, push t\nselector knob (2).\nTo select 12/24H format, refe\nmode\u201d in this section.\n4-5 driving at low speed, or when stopped. m\n2). To set the \u2022 If there is something wrong with the ther-\nthe indicator\nmometer, or just after the ignition switch\nis turned to \u201cON\u201d position or the engine\nswitch is pressed to change the ignition\ner to \u201cSetting mode to ON, the display may not indi-\ncate the outside temperature.\nWhen the display (B) shows the driving\nrange, you can change the unit of tem-\nperature.\nTo change the unit of temperature, while\npushing and holding the trip meter selector\nknob (1), turn the indicator selector knob\n(2). manual transmission vehicles)\n((1166)) ((1177))\n((1188))\n74TB0402\n55TH0-74E"},91{"page_number": 137, "page_text": "Selector position (for autom\nmission vehicles) /\nGear position (for automat\nsion vehicles)\nThe display (D) shows the\nselector position (16) or the g\n(17).\n\u2022 When the manual mode is n\ndisplay shows the selector p\n\u2022 When using the manual m\nplay shows the current gear\nFor details on how to use the t\nrefer to \u201cUsing transmission\u201d i\nING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section\nManual mode indicator\n(for automatic transmission\nWhen you are using the manu\ndisplay shows the manual mo\n(18).\nGearshift Indicator (for ma\nmission vehicles)\nRefer to \u201cGearshift indicator\u201d\nING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section\nTrip Meter / Odometer / Fu\nsumption / Driving Range\nThe display (B) shows one of\nindications; trip meter A, tr\nodometer, instantaneous fue\ntion, average fuel consumptio\nrange.\nTo switch the display indicati\nthe trip meter selector knob (1\ncator selector knob (2) quickly ma\ntic\ntra\nge\nnot\npo\nmod\nr p\ntra\nin\nn.\nn v\nual\nod\nan\nin\nn.\nue\ne\nth\nrip\nel\non or driving\nion (B), push\n1) or the indi-\ny. STRUMENT CLUSTER\nr A\nr B\nr\neous fuel consumption\nuel consumption\nnge\nwill change when you push\na knob.\nshows estimated values.\nmay not be the same as\ns.\n4-6\n55TH0-74E"},92{"page_number": 138, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nTrip meter\nThe trip meter can be used to\ndistance traveled on short trip\nfuel stops.\nYou can use the trip meter A o\nindependently.\nTo reset the trip meter, push\ntrip meter selector knob (1) un\nshows 0.0.\nNOTE:\nThe indicated maximum valu\nmeter is 9999.9. When you\nmaximum value, the indicate\nreturn to 0.0.\nOdometer\nThe odometer records the to\nthe vehicle has been driven.\n4-7 R\nInstantaneous fuel consumption A\nmeasure the The display shows the value of instanta- I\nps or between neous fuel consumption only when the t\nvehicle is moving. p\nor trip meter B c\nNOTE: t\n\u2022 The display does not show the value t\nand hold the\nunless the vehicle is moving. c\nntil the display\n\u2022 Depending on the vehicle\u2019s specification, y\nthe fuel consumption units of initial set- s\nting are indicated as L/100km or km/L. a\n\u2022 For \u201cL/100km\u201d setting, the indicated a\nue of the trip\nmaximum value of instantaneous fuel d\nrun past the\nconsumption is 30. No more than 30 will\ned value will T\nbe indicated on the display even if the\np\nactual instantaneous fuel consumption is\n(\nhigher.\na\notal distance \u2022 For \u201ckm/L\u201d setting, the indicated maxi-\nmum value of instantaneous fuel con-\nN\nsumption is 50. No more than 50 will be\nW\nindicated on the display even if the\nt\nactual instantaneous fuel consumption is\nb\nhigher.\ns\n\u2022 The indication on the display may be\nw\ndelayed if fuel consumption is greatly\naffected by driving conditions.\n\u2022 The display shows estimated values.\nIndications may not be the same as\nactual values.\n\u2022 For \u201cL/100km\u201d or \u201ckm/L\u201d setting, you can\nchange the units that instantaneous fuel\nconsumption is displayed in. Refer to\n\u201cAverage fuel consumption\u201d in this sec-\ntion. Average fuel consumption\nIf you selected average fuel consumption\nthe last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-\nplay shows the last value of average fuel\nconsumption from previous driving when\nthe ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d posi-\ntion or the engine switch is pressed to\nchange the ignition mode to ON. Unless\nyou reset the value of average fuel con-\nsumption, the display indicates the value of\naverage fuel consumption which includes\naverage fuel consumption during previous\ndriving.\nTo reset the average fuel consumption,\npush and hold the indicator selector knob\n(2) for a while when the display shows the\naverage fuel consumption.\nNOTE:\nWhen you reset the indication or reconnect\nthe negative (\u2013) terminal to the lead-acid\nbattery, the value of average fuel con-\nsumption will be shown after driving for a\nwhile.\n55TH0-74E"},93{"page_number": 139, "page_text": "(For \u201cL/100km\u201d or \u201ckm/L\u201d se\nTo change the unit of avera\nsumption, while pushing and\ntrip meter selector knob (1), tu\ntor selector knob (2).\nNOTE:\nWhen you change the units\nfuel consumption is displa\ninstantaneous fuel consumpt\nbe changed automatically.\nDriving range\nIf you selected driving range\nyou drove the vehicle, the disp\n\u201c---\u201d for a few seconds and th\nthe current driving range whe\nswitch is turned to \u201cON\u201d po\nengine switch is pressed to\nignition mode to ON. etting) The driving range shown in the display is F\nage fuel con- an indicative unit of the approximate dis-\nT\nd holding the tance you can drive until the fuel gauge\nurn the indica- indicates \u201cE\u201d, based on current driving con- R\nditions and current fuel level in the fuel\ntank. P\nWhen the low fuel warning light comes on, O\nthe display \u201c---\u201d will appear. T\n(Initial\nIf the low fuel warning light comes on, fill i\nsetting) the fuel tank immediately regardless of the t\nvalue of driving range shown in the display. I\nw\nWhen you refuel, the driving range is c\nupdated. However, if you only add a small R\namount of fuel, the correct value will not be\ny\ndisplayed.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If you refuel when the ignition switch is in\n55T040240\n\u201cON\u201d position or the ignition mode is ON,\nthe driving range may not indicate the\nthat average correct value.\nayed in, the \u2022 When you reconnect the negative (\u2013)\ntion units will terminal to the lead-acid battery, the\nvalue of driving range will be shown after\ndriving for a while.\n\u2022 If there are substantial changes in the\nthe last time driving pattern or vehicle usage, the dis-\nplay indicates\nplayed range may vary significantly.\nhen indicates\nen the ignition\nosition or the\no change the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nFuel Gauge\nThe display (A) shows the fuel gauge.\nRefer to \u201cFuel gauge\u201d in this section.\nParking Sensor Indication and Door\nOpen Indication (if equipped)\nThe display (F) shows the parking sensor\nindication and door open display indica-\ntion.\nIndividual door and tail gate is indicated\nwhen the respective door or tail gate is not\nclosed properly.\nRefer to \u201cParking Sensor\u201d in the \u201cOperating\nyour vehicle\u201d section.\n4-8\n55TH0-74E"},94{"page_number": 140, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nEnergy flow (if equipped)\nThe state of SHVS operation c\n\u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICL\n4-9 R\ncan be checked on the information display. For details, refer to \u201cS\nLE\u201d section. SHVS (Smart Hybrid Vehicle by Suzuki)\u201d in\n55TH0-74E"},95{"page_number": 141, "page_text": "Setting Mode\nIn the setting mode, you can s set up and customize the following functions. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-10\n55TH0-74E"},96{"page_number": 142, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-11 R 55TH0-74E"},97{"page_number": 143, "page_text": "NOTE:\nDepending on vehicle\u2019s s\nsome items may not be displa\nHow to use the setting mode\n1) When the ignition switch\nposition or the ignition mod\nthe vehicle is stationary.\n2) Push and hold the indica\nknob (2) until the dis\n\u201c \u201d.\n3) Turn and/or push the indic\nknob (2) to select a funct\nwant to set up according to\nthe previous page.\n4) Turn and/or push the indic\nknob (2) to register setting\nlowing functions. NOTE: \u2022\n\u2022 As shown in the above illustration, \u201c \u201d\nindicates on the display of currently set-\nting item. \u2022\n\u2022 To go back to the higher level display\nduring operation, turn the indicator\nselector knob (2) to display \u201c \u201d or\n\u201c \u201d and then push the indicator\nD\nselector knob (2).\n\u2022\nspecifications, Time indication of clock \u201c \u201d\nayed. \u2022 : 12-hour format (default set-\nting)\ne: \u2022 : 24-hour format\nh is in \u201cON\u201d \u2022\nde is ON, and Central door locking system \u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Unlock all doors by turning\ncator selector the key once\nsplay shows \u2022 : Unlock all doors by turning\nthe key twice (default setting)\ncator selector A\ntion that you Automatic door locking function \u201c \u201d \u201c\no the chart in \u2022\n\u2022 : Disable the automatic door\nlocking function\ncator selector \u2022 : Lock all doors when the vehi-\ngs of the fol-\ncle speed reaches 15 km/h\n\u2022\n(default setting)\n\u2022 : (For automatic transaxle vehi-\nL\ncle) Lock all doors when the\n\u201c\ngearshift lever is in other than\n\u2022\n\u201cP\u201d\n\u2022\nAutomatic door unlocking function \u201c \u201d \u2022\n\u2022 : Disable the automatic door \u2022\nunlocking function \u2022\n68PM00272 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n\u2022 : Unlock all doors when the key\nis pulled out from the ignition\nswitch (default setting)\n\u2022 : (For automatic transaxle vehi-\ncle) Unlock all doors when the\ngearshift lever is moved to the\n\u201cP\u201d from other position.\nDoor locking and unlocking siren \u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Siren sounds when the doors\n(including the tailgate) are\nlocked or unlocked by using\nthe keyless entry system\ntransmitter (default setting)\n\u2022 : Siren does not sound when\nthe doors (including the tail-\ngate) are locked or unlocked\nby using the keyless entry\nsystem transmitter\nAdditional flashes of the turn signal\n\u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Turn signal flashes three\ntimes after the turn signal\nlever is returned (default set-\nting)\n\u2022 : Disable the additional flashes\nof turn signal\nLighting time of the \u201cTo car\u201d function\n\u201c \u201d (if equipped)\n\u2022 : Disable the \u201cTo car\u201d function\n\u2022 : 10 seconds (default setting)\n\u2022 : 15 seconds\n\u2022 : 20 seconds\n\u2022 : 25 seconds\n4-12\n55TH0-74E"},98{"page_number": 144, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nLighting time of the \u201cTo hom\n\u201c \u201d (if equipped)\n\u2022 : Disable the \u201cTo\ntion\n\u2022 : 10 seconds (defa\n\u2022 : 15 seconds\n\u2022 : 20 seconds\n\u2022 : 25 seconds\n: 30 seconds\nShock sensor \u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Enable the shock\n\u2022 : Disable the shock\n(default setting)\nPre-warning sensitivity of\nthe shock sensor \u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Disable the pre-w\n\u2022 to :\nAdjust the pre-wa\ntivity of shock se\nsensitivity level\nhighest is L15,\nsetting is L14)\nFull blast warning sensitivit\nthe shock sensor \u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Disable the full bl\n\u2022 to :\nAdjust the full b\nsensitivity of sh\n(Lowest sensitivit\nand highest is\ndefault setting is L\n4-13 R\nme\u201d function Engine auto stop setting for Auto A/C D\n\u201c \u201d (if equipped) i\nhome\u201d func- \u2022 : Set engine auto stop condition (\noccurrence frequency in \u2022\nault setting) between that of \u201ceconomy\u201d\nand \u201ccomfort\u201d (default setting)\n\u2022 : When \u201ceconomy\u201d is selected, \u2022\nengine auto stop condition is\neased, compared with \u201cnor-\nmal\u201d. As engine auto stop\ncondition will occur more fre- I\nk sensor\nquently, the stop time will be\nk sensor I\nlonger, leading to reduction of\n\u2022\nfuel consumption.\n: When \u201ccomfort\u201d is selected,\nH\nengine auto stop condition becomes\nS\nsevere, compared with \u201cnormal\u201d. As engine\nwarning p\nauto stop condition will occur less fre-\nquently, the stop time will be shorter, lead-\narning sensi-\ning to more comfortable cabin condition by\nensor (Lowest\nair conditioner.\nis L01 and\nand default\nty of\nlast warning\nblast warning\nhock sensor\nty level is L01\ns L15, and\nL09) Deceleration energy regenerating\nindicator light setting \u201c \u201d\n(if equipped)\n\u2022 : Enable the deceleration\nenergy regenerating indicator\nlight\n\u2022 : Disable the deceleration\nenergy regenerating indicator\nlight\nInitialization setting \u201c \u201d\n: Initialize all settings\nInitialization setting \u201c \u201d\n\u2022 : Initialize all settings\nHow to exit the setting mode:\nSwitch the display to show \u201c \u201d and then\npush the indicator selector knob (2).\n55TH0-74E"},99{"page_number": 145, "page_text": "Instrument Cluster (T\n1.Speedometer\n2.Tachometer\n3.Fuel gauge Type B)\n5.Information display\n6.Trip meter selector knob\n7.Indicator selector knob INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-14\n55TH0-74E"},100{"page_number": 146, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nSpeedometer\nThe speedometer indicates ve\nSpeed Alert System\nThe speed alert system g\nwarning for alert of over-spe\nWhen vehicle speed exceeds\nh, primary level warning with tw\nsound every minute. When\nspeed exceeds about 120 km\nary level warning with contin\nwill sound.\nIf the vehicle speed is slow\nabout 118 km/h, primary\nresume. If the vehicle is slow\nabout 78 km/h, speed alert\nstop. This buzzer does not\nmalfunction in vehicle.\nTachometer\nThe tachometer indicates eng\nrevolutions per minute.\n4-15 R\nehicle speed\ngives audib\need to drive\nabout 80 k\nwo beeps w\nthe vehic\nm/h, secon\nnuous bee\nwed down\nwarning w\nwed down\nwarning w\nindicate a\nWhen ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to\nT\nchange the ignition mode to ON, this\nd\ngine speed in gauge gives a rough indication of the\nc\namount of fuel in the fuel tank. \u201cF\u201d stands\nfor full and \u201cE\u201d stands for empty.\nIf the indicator approaches a low level\n(near \u201cE\u201d) on fuel gauge, refill the tank as\nsoon as possible.\nNOTE:\nThe indicator moves a little depending on\nroad conditions (for example, slope or\ncurve) and driving conditions because of\nfuel movement in the tank.\nIf the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,\nrefill the fuel tank as soon as possible. details.\nThe mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler\ndoor is located on the left side of the vehi-\ncle.\n55TH0-74E"},101{"page_number": 147, "page_text": " panel lights, turn the indicator selector\n56RM02010\nknob (1) counterclockwise. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nOTE:\nIf you do not turn the knob within several\nseconds of activating, the brightness\ncontrol display will be cancelled auto-\nmatically.\nWhen you reconnect the lead-acid bat-\ntery, the brightness of the instrument\npanel lights will be reinitialized. Readjust\nthe brightness according to your prefer-\nence.\nOTE:\nyou adjust to the maximum brightness\nvel when the position lights or headlights\ne on, the following functions will be can-\nled.\nThe function which automatically dims\nthe brightness of instrument panel lights\nThe function which operates with the\nbrightness control, except maximum\nbrightness level\n4-16\n55TH0-74E"},102{"page_number": 148, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n1) Information display\n4-17 R\ntion display shows the follow- W\non. p\nc\ns\nt\ns\nr (If equipped) S\nm\nt\nindicator messages /\nc\nption / Driving range /\n(\need / Driving time /\ntop time and Total idling fuel C\nipped) / Clock and date / T\nuipped) / Torque and power /\nT\nand brake (if equipped) / Cruise\ni\nuipped)/ Energy flow (if\nntersection guidance\nSelector position / Gearshift indicator (if\nequipped) When the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to\nchange the ignition mode to ON, the mes-\nsage display shown in the above illustra-\ntion will appear on the display for several\nseconds.\nSome warning and indicator messages\nmay appear on the display when the igni-\ntion switch to \u201cACC\u201d or \u201cLOCK\u201d position or\nchange the ignition mode to ACC or LOCK\n(OFF)\nClock\nThe display (A) shows the time.\nTo set the clock, follow \u201cSetting mode\u201d\ninstructions in this section.\n55TH0-74E"},103{"page_number": 149, "page_text": "Thermometer (if equipped\nTo change the temperature u\n\u201c\u00b0C\u201d and \u201c\u00b0F\u201d, follow \u201cSe\ninstructions in this section.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The outside temperature ind\nthe actual outside tempe\ndriving at low speed, or whe\n\u2022 If there is something wrong\nmometer, or just after the ig\nis turned \u201cON\u201d or pushed to\nthe display may not indicate\ntemperature. d) Fuel Consumption / Driving Range / Ave\nIdling Stop Time and Total Idling Fuel Sa\nf equipped) / Torque and Pow\n/ Energy flow (if equipped)\nare no warning or indicator messag\nwing indications to appear on the\nl consumption, driving range, aver\ntal idling fuel saved (if equipped), c\nand brake (if equipped) or no indica\n(b) (c)\nunit between\netting mode\u201d\n(j) (i) (h)\ndication is not\nerature when\nen stopped.\nwith the ther-\ngnition switch\no \u201cON\u201d mode,\ne the outside INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nerage Speed / Driving Time / Total\naved (if equipped) / Clock and Date\nwer / Accelerator and Brake (if\nges on the display (C), you can select one\ndisplay: instantaneous fuel consumption,\nrage speed, driving time, total idling stop\nclock and date, motion, torque and power,\nation.\n(d) (e)\n(g) (f)\n55TB401\n4-18\n55TH0-74E"},104{"page_number": 150, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n(a)Instantaneous fuel con\nAverage fuel consumptio\nDriving range\n(b)Instantaneous fuel consu\nAverage fuel consumptio\n5-minute average fuel co\n(c)Average speed /\n5-minute average speed\nDriving time\n(d)Total idling stop time and\nfuel saved (if equipped)\n(e)Clock and date\n(f)Motion (if equipped)\n(g)Torque and power\n(h)Accelerator and brake (if\n(i)Energy flow (if equipped)\n(j)No indication\nTo switch the display indicati\nindicator selector knob (3) qui\nNOTE:\nThe value of instantaneous fu\ntion, average fuel consump\nrange, average speed, tota\nsaved (if equipped), motion (\ntorque and power, accelerato\nand energy flow (if equipped\nthe display are affected by\nconditions;\n\u2022 road condition\n\u2022 surrounding traffic condition\n\u2022 driving condition\n\u2022 vehicle condition\n\u2022 a malfunction which causes\ntion indicator light to come o\n4-19 R\nnsumption / Instantaneous fuel consumption \u2022\non / The display shows instantaneous fuel con-\nsumption with a bar graph only when the\numption / vehicle is moving.\non /\nonsumption (4)\n\u2022\n/\nd total idling\n\u2022\nequipped)\n) \u2022\nion, push the\nickly. 52RM21070\n(4)Instantaneous fuel consumption\nuel consump- NOTE:\nption, driving \u2022 The display does not show the bar graph\nal idling fuel unless the vehicle is moving.\n(if equipped), \u2022 Depending on the vehicle\u2019s specification,\nor and brake the fuel consumption units of initial set-\nd) shown on ting are indicated as L/100km, km/L or\nthe following MPG.\n\u2022 For \u201cL/100km\u201d setting, the indicated\nmaximum value of instantaneous fuel\nn consumption is 30. No more than 30 will\nbe indicated on the display even if the\nactual instantaneous fuel consumption is\ns the malfunc- higher.\non or blink \u2022 For \u201ckm/L\u201d setting, the indicated maxi-\nmum value of instantaneous fuel con-\nsumption is 50. No more than 50 will be\nindicated on the display even if the\nactual instantaneous fuel consumption is\nhigher.\n\u2022 For \u201cMPG(UK)\u201d setting, the indicated\nmaximum value of instantaneous fuel\nconsumption is 80. No more than 80 will\nbe indicated on the display even if the\nactual instantaneous fuel consumption is\nhigher.\n\u2022 The indication on the display may be\ndelayed if fuel consumption is greatly\naffected by driving conditions.\n\u2022 The display shows estimated values.\nIndications may not be the same as\nactual values.\n55TH0-74E"},105{"page_number": 151, "page_text": "Average fuel consumption\naverage fuel consumption\ncycle average fuel consump\nAverage fuel consumption fr\nreset and 5-minute average fu\ntion, and 1-driving cycle avera\nsumption are shown.\n(Average fuel consumption)\n(5)\n(5)\n(5)Average fuel consumptio\nIf you selected average fuel\nthe last time you drove the veh\nplay shows the last value of\nconsumption from previous d\nthe ignition switch is turned to\nor the engine switch is presse\nthe ignition mode to ON. Unle\nthe value of average fuel cons\ndisplay indicates the value of\nconsumption based on the\nconsumption during previous d n / 5-minute NOTE:\nn / 1-driving When you reconnect the ne\nption minal to the lead-acid battery\nrom previous average fuel consumption w\nuel consump- after driving for a period of tim\nage fuel con-\nYou can select the timing to r\nof average fuel consumption\n) following three methods;\n\u2022 Reset after refuel: the valu\nfuel consumption will be re\ncally by refueling.\n\u2022 Reset with trip meter A:\naverage fuel consumption\nautomatically by resetting t\n\u2022 Reset manually: the valu\nfuel consumption will be r\ning and holding the indic\nknob (3) when the display\naverage fuel consumption.\nTo change the timing to reset the value of\naverage fuel consumption, refer to \u201cSetting\n52RM21080 mode\u201d in this section.\non NOTE:\nconsumption If you add only a small amount of fuel\nhicle, the dis- when you select \u201cReset after refuel\u201d, the\naverage fuel average fuel consumption value may not\ndriving when be reset.\n\u201cON\u201d position\ned to change\ness you reset\nsumption, the\naverage fuel\naverage fuel\ndriving. sumption\n4-20\n55TH0-74E"},106{"page_number": 152, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nYou can check transition of\nconsumption every 5 minutes\nutes before up to now. Also, yo\ntransition of average fuel con\npast 3 driving cycles. Time in\ndriving cycle indication can\nFor details, refer to \u201cSetting m\nsection.\nDriving range\n(8)Driving range\nIf you selected driving range\nyou drove the vehicle, the disp\n\u201c---\u201d for a few seconds and th\nthe current driving range whe\nswitch is turned to \u201cON\u201d po\nengine switch is pressed to\nignition mode to ON.\nThe driving range shown in t\nan indicative unit of the appr\n4-21 R\naverage fuel tance you can drive until the fuel gauge A\nfrom 15 min- indicates \u201cE\u201d, based on current driving con- s\nou can check ditions and current fuel level in the fuel A\nnsumption the tank. m\nndication and\nWhen the low fuel warning light comes on, (\nbe changed.\nthe display \u201c---\u201d will appear.\nmode\u201d in this\nIf the low fuel warning light comes on, fill\nthe fuel tank immediately regardless of the\nvalue of driving range shown in the display.\nWhen you refuel, the driving range is\nupdated. However, if you only add a small\namount of fuel, the correct value will not be\ndisplayed.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If you refuel when the ignition mode is\n\u201cON\u201d, the driving range may not indicate\nthe correct value.\n\u2022 When you reconnect the negative (\u2013)\n(8) terminal to the lead-acid battery, the\nvalue of driving range will be shown after\ndriving for a period of time. I\n52RM21090 \u2022 If there are substantial changes in the y\ndriving pattern or vehicle usage, the dis- t\nplayed range may vary significantly. o\nthe last time t\nplay indicates s\nm\nhen indicates\na\nen the ignition\nv\nosition or the\na\no change the\nT\na\nthe display is\na\nroximate dis- c Average speed / 5-minute average\nspeed\nAverage speed from previous reset and 5-\nminute average speed are shown.\n(Average speed)\n(9)\n52RM21100\n(9)Average speed\nIf you selected average speed the last time\nyou drove the vehicle, the display indicates\nthe last value of average speed from previ-\nous driving when the ignition switch is\nturned to \u201cON\u201d position or the engine\nswitch is pressed to change the ignition\nmode to ON. Unless you reset the value of\naverage speed, the display indicates the\nvalue of average speed which includes\naverage speed during previous driving.\nTo reset the value of average speed, push\nand hold the indicator selector knob (3) for\nabout 2 seconds when the display indi-\ncates an average speed. The display\n55TH0-74E"},107{"page_number": 153, "page_text": "age speed every 5 minutes f\nutes before up to now. from 10 min negative (-) terminal will reset the indica-\ntion of the driving time.\n\u2022 The indicated maximum value of driving\ntime is 99:59:59. No more than this\nvalue will be indicated on the display N\nuntil you reset the driving time. \u2022 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\ng stop time and total idling\n(if equipped)\n52RM217\ndling stop time\ndling fuel saved\ny shows the total length (in\nutes and seconds) of engine\ne and the total amount (in milli-\nuel conservation by ENG A-\nem since the indication was\nhe total idling stop time and the\ng fuel saved, push and hold the\nindicator selector knob (3) for a while\nwhen the display shows the total idling\nstop time and the total idling fuel saved.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The indicated maximum value of the\ntotal idling stop time is 99:59:59 and this\nvalue is fixed until it is reset.\n4-22\n55TH0-74E"},108{"page_number": 154, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n\u2022 When you reconnect the\nterminal to the lead-acid\nvalue of the total idling stop\ntotal idling fuel saved will be\nClock and date\nG (acceleration of gravity) pos\nto the vehicle body while driv\nby a globe (14).\nWhen the vehicle is stoppe\ndata of G positions applied to\nbody during the driving is\ngraph (15).\n4-23 R\nnegative (\u2013)\nG position history graph at the vehicle\nbattery, the\nstopped can be changed to indicate or\np time and the\nhide. For details, refer to \u201cSetting mode\u201d in\ne reset.\nthis section.\nsition applied The display is selectable to indicate or not\nving is shown to indicate. For details, refer to \u201cSetting\nmode\u201d in this section.\ned, historical\no the vehicle\nshown as a 55TH0-74E"},109{"page_number": 155, "page_text": "Energy flow (if equipped)\nThe state of Smart Hybrid o\ndetails, refer to \u201cSmart Hybrid\u201d I\noperation can be checked on the information display. For W\n\u201d in \u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section. p INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nInformation shown after driving\nWhen you turn the ignition switch to \u201cLOCK\u201d\nposition or press the engine switch to\n4-24\n55TH0-74E"},110{"page_number": 156, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 A slight time lag may occur\nintersection guidance on the\ndisplay and the guidance fr\ntainment system.\n\u2022 Switch the intersection guid\nor OFF while the guidance f\ntainment system is displaye\n\u2013 A time lag may occur betw\nplay and OFF display of\ntion guidance.\n\u2013 For the functions and ope\ninfotainment system, refe\nplementary manual, pro\nwith it.\n4-25 isplay or hide the intersection\nby changing the setting (cus- S\n). For details, refer to \u201cSetting t\nhis section. t\nv\nutoTM may not be available in m\ntry or region.\nabout Android AutoTM, refer to\nport.google.com/androidauto\nrPlay may not be available in\ntry or region.\ns about Apple CarPlay, refer to\nw.apple.com/ios/carplay/\nposition display\n) S\nm\nG\ns\nT\nbetween the t\ne information \u2022\nrom the info-\n\u2022\ndance to ON\nfrom the info- F\ned. r\nween ON dis- 74TB04013 I\nthe intersec- The display indicates the position of light-\ning switch selected for exterior light. M\nerations of the The display can be set as ON/OFF by (\ner to the sup- changing the setting (customization). W\novided along For details, refer to \u201cSetting Mode\u201d in this d\nsection. ( Selector position (for automatic\ntransmission vehicles) / Gear posi-\ntion (for automatic transmission\nvehicles) / Gearshift Indicator (for\nmanual transmission vehicles)\n((1166)) ((1177))\n((1188))\n74TB04014\nSelector position (for automatic trans-\nmission vehicles) /\nGear position (for automatic transmis-\nsion vehicles)\nThe display shows the transmission selec-\ntor position (16) or the gear position (17).\n\u2022 When the manual mode is not in use, the\ndisplay shows the selector position.\n\u2022 When using the manual mode, the dis-\nplay shows the current gear position.\nFor details on how to use the transmission,\nrefer to \u201cUsing transmission\u201d in \u201cOPERAT-\nING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section.\nManual mode indicator\n(for automatic transmission vehicles)\nWhen you are using the manual mode, the\ndisplay shows the manual mode indicator\n(18).\n55TH0-74E"},111{"page_number": 157, "page_text": "NOTE:\nFor Auto Gear Shift models, th\nmode indicator will only appea\ngearshift lever is in \u201cM\u201d.\nDrive mode indicator\n(for Auto Gear Shift vehicles\nWhen the gearshift lever is in\nplay shows the drive mode ind\nFor details on how to use the t\nrefer to \u201cUsing transmission\u201d in\nATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d sect\nGearshift Indicator (for ma\nmission vehicles)\nRefer to \u201cGearshift indicator\u201d\nING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section Odometer / Trip Meter S\nhe manual\nThe display (E) shows the odometer and W\nar when the\ntrip meter. o\ni\nThe odometer records the total distance\nm\nthe vehicle has been driven.\na\ns) The trip meter can be used to measure the f\nn \u201cD\u201d, the dis- distance traveled on short trips or between\n\u2022\ndicator (16). fuel stops.\ntransmission, You can use trip meter A or trip meter B\nn the \u201cOPER- independently. \u2022\ntion.\nTo switch the display indication (E), push\n\u2022\nthe trip meter selector knob (2) quickly.\nanual trans-\nTo reset the trip meter, push and hold the\nin \u201cOPERAT- trip meter selector knob (2) for few sec-\nonds when the display shows the trip\nn.\nmeter.\nN\nT\nr INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nSetting Mode\nWhen the ignition switch is in \u201cON\u201d position\nor the ignition mode is ON and the vehicle\nis stationary, you can enter into the setting\nmode of the information display by pushing\nand holding the indicator selector knob (3)\nfor few seconds.\n\u2022 To select the setting item that you want\nto change, turn the indicator selector\nknob (3) left or right.\n\u2022 To change the setting, push the indicator\nselector knob (3).\n\u2022 To exit the setting mode, select \u201cBack\u201d\nand push the indicator selector knob (3).\n74TB04015\nNOTE:\nThe currently selected setting item is sur-\nrounded by a frame.\n4-26\n55TH0-74E"},112{"page_number": 158, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If you push and hold the ind\ntor knob (3) to enter into\nmode when the display (D)\nage fuel consumption, ave\ndriving time, total idling st\ntotal idling fuel saved (if eq\nvalue will be reset simultane\ndo not want to reset the val\nindicator selector knob quic\nthe indication of the display.\n\u2022 If you turn the ignition switc\nengine switch or start to mo\ncle when the display is in\nmode, the setting mode will\nautomatically.\nDistance unit\n(Odometer / trip meter / dri\naverage speed distance unit\nYou can change the units in w\nter / trip meter / driving rang\nspeed distance is displayed.\nFuel economy\n(Fuel consumption unit sett\nYou can change the units th\nsumption is displayed in.\nLanguage\nYou can change the language\nmation display.\nFuel reset\n(Average fuel consumption\nting)\nYou can change when the va\nage fuel consumption is reset.\n4-27 R\ndicator selec- Temperature\n(Temperature unit setting)\no the setting\nYou can change the units that temperature\n) shows aver-\nis displayed in.\nerage speed,\n\u2022 To change the temperature unit, select\ntop time and\n\u201cTemperature\u201d in \u201cSetting mode\u201d. Then, (\nquipped), the\nselect \u201c\u00b0C\u201d or \u201c\u00b0F\u201d. \u2022\neously. If you\nlue, push the\nNOTE:\nckly to switch\nWhen you change the units that tempera-\n.\nture is displayed in, the automatic heating\nch, press the (\nand air conditioning system (if equipped)\nove the vehi- \u2022\ntemperature display units will be changed\nn the setting\nautomatically.\nbe cancelled\nSet sensors \u2022\n(Parking sensor setting) (if equipped)\nThe parking sensor can be switched\niving range /\nbetween the normal mode and trailer\nt setting) D\nmode.\nwhich odome- (\nge / average Clock setting (if equipped) \u2022\n(Adjusting the clock)\n\u2022 Adjust the clock by selecting \u201cClock set-\nting\u201d in \u201cSetting mode\u201d. Then, select\nting)\n\u201cAdjust clock\u201d. \u2022\nhat fuel con-\n\u2022 To change the hour indication, turn the\nindicator selector knob (3) left or right\nrepeatedly when the hour indication\ne of the infor- blinks. To change the hour indication\nquickly, turn and hold the indicator selec- (\n\u2022\ntor knob (3). To set the hour indication,\npush the indicator selector knob (3) and\nn reset set-\nthe minute indication blinks.\n\u2022\n\u2022 To change the minute indication, turn the\nalue of aver-\nindicator selector knob (3) left or right\n. repeatedly when the minute indication\nblinks. To change the minute indication\nquickly, turn and hold the indicator selec-\ntor knob (3). To set the minute indication,\npush the indicator selector knob (3).\n(Selecting 12H / 24H format)\n\u2022 Switch the time indication between 12-\nhour and 24-hour format by selecting\n\u201cClock setting\u201d in \u201cSetting mode\u201d. Then,\nselect \u201c12H\u201d or \u201c24H\u201d.\n(Adjusting the date)\n\u2022 Adjust the date by selecting \u201cClock set-\nting\u201d in \u201cSetting mode\u201d. Then select\n\u201cAdjust date\u201d.\n\u2022 To adjust year, month and day, operate\nthe indicator selector knob (3) in the\nsame way as adjusting the clock.\nDoor lock (Door lock setting)\n(Door unlock)\n\u2022 All Doors:\nUnlock all doors by keyless push start\nsystem remote controller or request\nswitch once\n\u2022 Driver Door:\nUnlock all doors by keyless push start\nsystem remote controller or request\nswitch twice (default setting)\n(Auto lock)\n\u2022 Manual Lock:\nDisable the automatic door locking func-\ntion\n\u2022 Speed Syncro:\nLock all doors when the vehicle speed\nreaches 15 km/h (default setting)\n55TH0-74E"},113{"page_number": 159, "page_text": "\u2022 Shift Syncro: (if equipped)\nLock all doors when the gea\nin other than \u201cP\u201d position.\n(Auto unlock)\n\u2022 Syncro Off:\nDisable the automatic do\nfunction (default setting for\nwith the keyless push start s\n\u2022 IG-OFF Sync:\nUnlock all doors when the e\nis pressed to change the ig\nto LOCK (OFF) (default se\nvehicle without the keyles\nsystem)\n\u2022 Shift Syncro: (if equipped)\nUnlock all doors when the g\nis moved from other position\ntion.\n(Alarm)\n\u2022 You can turn off or on the\nwhen the door(s) is(are)\nunlocked.\n(Door mirror) (if equipped)\n\u2022 ON:\nEnable the mirror auto ret\n(default setting).\n\u2022 OFF:\nDisable the mirror auto retra\nLights\n(Foot lights setting)\n(if equipped)\nThe foot lights can be prog\ninterlocked operation with e control or door operation and for no light-\narshift lever is ing.\n(Lane change setting)\nThe turn signal and its indicator can be set\nwhether they flash three times even if you\n\u2022\noor unlocking return the turn signal control lever shortly\nr the vehicle after operating it.\nsystem) \u2022 To change the lane change setting,\nselect \u201cLane Change\u201d in \u201cSetting mode\u201d.\nengine switch Then, select \u201cON\u201d or \u201cOFF\u201d\ngnition mode \u2022 If you want to change the number of\n\u2022\netting for the flashing, consult a Maruti Suzuki autho-\nss push start rized workshop.\nGuide me light setting (if equipped)\nYou can change the lighting time of \u201cTo\ngearshift lever\ncar\u201d function or \u201cTo home\u201d function.\nn to \u201cP\u201d posi-\nAntitheft\nD\n(Shock sensor system setting)\n(\ne siren sound You can change the on/off of the shock\nY\n) locked or sensor.\nm\n(Shock sensor P setting)\n(\nYou can adjust the pre-warning sensitivity\nY\nof shock sensor.\ne\ntract function\n(Shock sensor F setting)\n(\nYou can adjust the full blast warning sensi-\nY\ntivity of shock sensor.\nact function. i\nIS A/C T\n(ENG A-STOP system setting) e\n(if equipped) t\n\u2022 When using the automatic heating and\ngrammed for\nair conditioning system (if equipped),\neither lighting INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nyou can select one of the following\nengine auto stop settings.\n\u2013 Standard\n\u2013 Economy\n\u2013 Comfort\n\u2022 When \u201cEconomy\u201d is selected, engine\nauto stop condition is eased, compared\nwith \u201cStandard\u201d. As engine auto stop\ncondition will occur more frequently, the\nstop time will be longer, leading to reduc-\ntion of fuel consumption.\n\u2022 When \u201cComfort\u201d is selected, engine auto\nstop condition becomes severe, com-\npared with \u201cStandard\u201d. As engine auto\nstop condition will occur less frequently,\nthe stop time will be shorter, leading to\nmore comfortable cabin condition by air\nconditioner.\nDisplay item\n(\u201cCar color\u201d setting)\nYou can change the car color of the infor-\nmation display.\n(\u201cCalendar dis\u201d setting)\nYou can select whether you show the cal-\nender on the information display or not.\n(\u201cCalendar form\u201d setting)\nYou can change the calendar form of the\ninformation display.\nTo change the calendar form, select \u201cCal-\nendar form\u201d in \u201cDisplay item\u201d. Then, select\nthe display order of date, month and year.\n4-28\n55TH0-74E"},114{"page_number": 160, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n(\u201cFuel eco hist\u201d setting)\nTransitional indication of avera\nsumption can be switched to\ntion and driving cycle indicatio\n(\u201cMotion hist\u201d setting) (if eq\nIndication of G position history\nvehicle stopped can be select\nor disable.\n(\u201cIdling disp\u201d setting)\nDisplay of ENG A-STOP op\nignition mode LOCK (OFF) is\nindicate or not to indicate.\n(\u201cIdling warn\u201d setting)\nYou can switch whether the\ndisplay shows the warning a\nmessages related on the E\nsystem.\n(\u201cRegen disp\u201d setting) (if eq\nYou can choose that decelera\nregenerating indicator light co\ndoes not come on.\n(\u201cParking sensors\u201d setting) (if\nDisplay of \u201cParking sensors\u201d\nto indicate or not to indicate.\n(\u201cIntersection\u201d setting) (if eq\nDisplay of \u201cIntersection\u201d is s\nindicate or not to indicate.\n(\u201cLights\u201d setting) (if equippe\nYou can change ON/OFF of\nposition display.\n4-29 R\nAnimation W\nage fuel con- (\u201cwarning\u201d setting)\no time indica- Display of \u201cAnimation (warning)\u201d is select- T\non. able to indicate or not to indicate. m\nv\nquipped) Head-up Display setting (if equipped) I\ny graph at the (Vehicle speed) b\nted to enable You can change ON/OFF of the vehicle a\nspeed. I\no\n(Gear position)\nperation with You can change ON/OFF of the gear posi- M\nselectable to tion.\n(Clock)\nYou can change ON/OFF of the clock.\ne information (Intersection guidance\nand indicator (working with the infotainment system))\nENG A-STOP You can change ON/OFF of the intersec-\ntion guidance.\nquipped) (Air conditioning system)\nW\nation energy You can change ON/OFF display of the air\nc\nomes on or conditioning system.\nc\n(High temperature warning message)\nf equipped) You can change ON/OFF of the high tem- N\nis selectable perature warning message. \u2022\nDefault\nquipped) (Initialization setting) \u2022\nselectable to If you select \u201cYES\u201d and push the indicator\nselector knob (3), all settings will be reini-\ntialized.\ned)\nLight switch\n\u2022 Warning and Indicator Messages\nThe display shows warning and indicator\nmessages to let you know about certain\nvehicle problems.\nIn some cases, the external or internal\nbuzzer may also sound at the same time to\nalert you.\nIf warning and indicator messages appear\non the display, follow the messages.\nMaster warning indicator light\n68PM00278\nWhen the display shows warning and indi-\ncator messages, the master warning indi-\ncator light may also blink.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When the problem that causes a mes-\nsage to appear is corrected, the mes-\nsage will disappear.\n\u2022 If a message is displayed, and other\nproblems requiring a message occur, the\nmessage for each of the problems will\nbe alternately displayed about every 5\nseconds.\n\u2022 When you push and hold the indicator\nselector knob (3) for about 2 seconds\nwhile a message is displayed, the mes-\nsage will disappear temporarily. If the\n55TH0-74E"},115{"page_number": 161, "page_text": "problem that caused the me\ncorrected, the message\nagain after 5 seconds. Wh\nand hold the indicator selec\nfor about 2 seconds while a\ndisplayed, the message w\ntemporarily. If the problem\nthe message is not correct\nsage will appear again after essage is not\nwill appear\nhen you push\nctor knob (3)\na message is\nwill disappear\nthat caused\nted, the mes-\nr 5 seconds. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-30\n55TH0-74E"},116{"page_number": 162, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nWarning and indicator mess\nAll models\n(#1) This message will disapp\n4-31 R\nsages\npear after a while even if the problem that caused the message to o appear is not corrected.\n55TH0-74E"},117{"page_number": 163, "page_text": "(#1) This message will disapp pear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to a INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nappear is not corrected.\n4-32\n55TH0-74E"},118{"page_number": 164, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n(#1) This message will disapp\n4-33 R\npear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to a appear is not corrected.\n55TH0-74E"},119{"page_number": 165, "page_text": "Vehicle with keyless push s\n(#1) This message will disapp start system\npear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to a INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nappear is not corrected.\n4-34\n55TH0-74E"},120{"page_number": 166, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-35 R 55TH0-74E"},121{"page_number": 167, "page_text": "  INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-36\n55TH0-74E"},122{"page_number": 168, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n(#1) This message will disapp\n4-37 R\npear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to a appear is not corrected.\n55TH0-74E"},123{"page_number": 169, "page_text": "(#1) This message will disapp pear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to a INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nappear is not corrected.\n4-38\n55TH0-74E"},124{"page_number": 170, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-39 R 55TH0-74E"},125{"page_number": 171, "page_text": "Vehicle with ESP\u00ae system  INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-40\n55TH0-74E"},126{"page_number": 172, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nVehicle with gasoline particl\n4-41 R\nle filter (GPF) (if equipped) 55TH0-74E"},127{"page_number": 173, "page_text": "Warning and Indicato\nNOTE:\nIf warning and indicator lig\ncome on, the correspondin\nmay be shown on the informa\nBrake System Warning Li\nThree different types of ope\ndepending on the vehicle\u2019s sp\n1) The light comes on brief\nignition switch is turned to \u201c\nor the engine switch is\nchange the ignition mode t\n2) The light comes on when\nbrake is engaged with the i\nON.\n3) The light comes on when\nor both of above two condi\nThe light also comes on whe\nthe brake fluid reservoir fall\nspecified level.\nThe light should go out after\nengine and fully releasing\nbrake, if the fluid level in the\nreservoir is adequate. or Lights The light also comes on together with the\nABS warning light when the rear brake\nforce control function (proportioning valve\nghts blink or function) of the ABS system fails.\nng messages\nIf the brake system warning light comes on\nation display.\nwhile you are driving the vehicle, it may\night mean that there is something wrong with\nthe vehicle\u2019s brake system. If this happens,\nyou should:\n1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.\n82K170\nerations exist\npecification.\nfly when the 2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and N\n\u201cON\u201d position stopping on the shoulder of the road. B\npressed to 3) If you determine that it is safe, drive the i\nto ON. vehicle cautiously at low speed to the p\nn the parking nearest Maruti Suzuki authorized work- b\nignition mode shop for repairs or tow the vehicle to p\nthe nearest Maruti Suzuki authorized\nN\nunder either workshop for repairs.\n(\nitions.\nA\nen the fluid in y\nls below the s\ni\nb\nr starting the\nt\nthe parking\ne brake fluid INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nNOTE:\nBecause the brake system is self-adjust-\ning, the fluid level will drop as the brake\npads become worn. Replenishing the\nbrake fluid reservoir is considered normal\nperiodic maintenance.\nNOTE:\n(Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer)\nA buzzer sounds intermittently to remind\nyou to release the parking brake if you\nstart the vehicle without releasing the park-\ning brake. Make sure that the parking\nbrake is fully released and the brake sys-\ntem warning light turns off.\n4-42\n55TH0-74E"},128{"page_number": 174, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nSeat Belt Reminder Light\nWhen the driver and/or pass\npassenger and/or rear pas\n(does) not buckle his or her s\nlight will come on and/or blink.\nFor details about the seat b\nrefer to \u201cSeat Belt Remind\nSAFE DRIVING\u201d section.\nNOTE:\nAlong with the seat belt rem\nreminder message shall also\ninformation display (if equipp\nrestrained driver and/or front p\nFor details, refer to \u201cWarning\nMessages\u201d in \u201cFOR SAFE DR\ntion.\n4-43 R\nt\nsen\nsse\nsea\n.\nbelt\nder\u201d\nis a problem in the airbag system or the \u201c\nseat belt pretensioner system.\nN\nminder light, a\n\u2022\ncome on the\nped), for un-\npassenger.\nand Indicator\n\u2022\nRIVING\u201d sec- \u201cON\u201d or pushed to \u201cON\u201d mode.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The activation point of this light varies\ndepending on road conditions (for exam-\nple, slope or curve) and driving condi-\ntions because of fuel moving in the tank.\n\u2022 When this light comes on, low fuel warn-\ning message is displayed on the infor-\nmation display.\nFor details, refer to \u201cWarning and Indica-\ntor Messages\u201d in this section.\n55TH0-74E"},129{"page_number": 175, "page_text": "Anti-lock Brake System (A\nWarning Light\nWhen the ignition switch is tu\nposition or the engine switch\nchange the ignition mode to\ncomes on briefly so you can c\nlight is working.\nIf the light stays on, or com\ndriving, there may be some\nwith the ABS.\nIf this happens:\n1) Pull off the road and stop c\n2) Turn the ignition switch to \u201c\ntion or change the igniti\nLOCK (OFF) by pressing\nswitch and then start the en\nIf the warning light comes on\nturns off, the system is norma\ning light still stays on, the sy\nsomething wrong. ABS) If the light and the brake system warning H\nlight stay on, or come on simultaneously W\nwhen driving, your ABS system is (\nequipped with the rear brake force control\nfunction (proportioning valve function) and\nthere may be something wrong with both\nthe rear brake force control function and\nanti-lock function of the ABS system.\nIf one of these happens, have the system\n80J127 inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorized\nurned to \u201cON\u201d workshop.\nis pressed to If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brake W\nON, the light system will function as an ordinary brake p\ncheck that the system that does not have this ABS sys- c\ntem. c\nmes on when For details of ABS system, refer to \u201cAnti- l\nething wrong Lock Brake System (ABS)\u201d in the \u201cOPER- d\nATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section. I\ne\no\ncarefully.\nw\n\u201cLOCK\u201d posi-\n\u201c\nion mode to\nG\ng the engine\nngine again.\nn briefly then\nal. If the warn-\nystem will be INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nHigh Engine Coolant Temperature\nWarning Light (red color)\n(if equipped)\n54G344\nWhen the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to\nchange the ignition mode to ON, this light\ncomes on briefly so you can check that the\nlight is working. If this light blinks while\ndriving, it means the engine is running hot.\nIf the light stays on after blinking, then the\nengine is overheating. To avoid actual\noverheating, if this light blinks or stays on\nwhile driving, follow the instructions in the\n\u201cIf the Engine Overheats\u201d of \u201cEMER-\nGENCY SERVICE\u201d section.\n4-44\n55TH0-74E"},130{"page_number": 176, "page_text": "position or the engine switch\nchange the ignition mode to O\nknow the light is working a\nwhen the engine is started.\nIf the malfunction indicator lig\nor blinks when the engine is ru\nis a damage in the emission\ntem.\nBring the vehicle to a Maruti S\nrized workshop to have the da\n4-45 is pressed to\ne\nON to let you\nM\nand goes out\nN\nght comes on \u2022\nunning, there\nn control sys-\nSuzuki autho-\namage fixed. erly. Have the system inspected by a\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 Following operations of the steering\nwheel while parking or driving at a very\nlow speed may have steering effort big-\nger gradually. This is not a malfunction of\nthe steering system, but the power steer-\ning control system limits the power assist\nin order to prevent them from overheat-\ning.\n\u2013 The steering wheel is operated very\noften.\n\u2013 The steering wheel is kept in a fully\nturned position for a long while.\n55TH0-74E"},131{"page_number": 177, "page_text": "When the power steering co\ncool down, the power stee\nback to the original condition\nHowever, repeating these\ncould cause the power ste\ndamaged.\n\u2022 If the power steering syste\nwork properly, you will fee\nsteer but you still will be abl\n\u2022 If the steering is operated, y\na noise. This is normal and i\nthe power steering system\nerly. ontro\nering\nn.\ne op\neering\nem d\nel he\nle to\nyou m\nindic\nwor\npressure. If the light comes on when driv- w\ning, pull off the road as soon as you can t\nand stop the engine. n\nCheck the oil level and add oil if necessary. i\nIf there is enough oil, the lubrication sys- a\ntem should be inspected by a Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop before you C\ndrive the vehicle again. (\nW\nb wrong with the battery charging system. If\nthe light comes on when the engine is run-\nning, the charging system should be\ninspected immediately by a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop.\nCruise Control Indicator Light\n(if equipped)\n64MM02015\nWhen the cruise control is on, this light will\nbe on.\n4-46\n55TH0-74E"},132{"page_number": 178, "page_text": "4-47 If this light comes on or blinks, stop the\nvehicle in a safe place and contact a\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop. If the\nlight comes on or blinks again after the\nlight goes out, have the system inspected\nby a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop. omes on, it may become fol-\nmission gear will not change\nshift the gearshift lever.\nission gear will change to \u201cN\u201d\nlly when the vehicle speed\nss than 10 km/h, also the \u201cN\u201d\nn the instrument cluster will\ne interior buzzer will sound.\nwill stall automatically when\nstops.\nwill not start.\ne occurs, have the system\na Maruti Suzuki authorized\near Shift clutch temperature\nhigh, this light will blink. Stop\na safe place and let the sys-\nn.\n55TH0-74E"},133{"page_number": 179, "page_text": "change the ignition mode to\ncomes on briefly so you can c\nlight is working.\nIf this light blinks or stays on, th\nlem with the system.\nIf this light still blinks or stay\nyou start the engine with norm\nthe vehicle battery, ask a M\nauthorized workshop to have\ninspected. Open Door Warning Light\nN\nI\no\nb\nA\ns\nM\nL\n54G391\nThis light remains on until all doors (includ-\ning the tailgate) are completely closed.\nIf any door (including the tailgate) is open\nON, the light\nwhen the vehicle is moving, a ding sounds\ncheck that the\nhere is a prob-\nT\nm\nys on even if\nI\nmal voltage of\nMaruti Suzuki\ne the system\ninstrument panel will blink along with the\nrespective turn signal lights. When you\nturn on the hazard warning switch, both T\narrows will blink along with all of the turn p\nsignal lights. l INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nNOTE:\nIf any abnormality of the turn signals is\nobserved, such as fast blinking, there may\nbe a malfunction in the turn signal system.\nAsk your Maruti Suzuki authorized work-\nshop to inspect the system.\nMain Beam (High beam) Indicator\nLight\n80J212\nThis indicator comes on when headlight\nmain beams (high beams) are turned on.\nIllumination Indicator Light\n64J045\nThis indicator light comes on while the\nposition lights, tail light and/or the head-\nlights are on.\n4-48\n55TH0-74E"},134{"page_number": 180, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nESP\u00ae OFF Indicator Light\nWhen the ignition switch is tu\nposition or the engine switch\nchange the ignition mode to O\ncomes on briefly so you can c\nlight is working.\nWhen the ESP\u00ae OFF switch\nturn off the ESP\u00ae systems\nABS), the ESP\u00ae OFF indicato\non and stays on.\nFor details of the ESP\u00ae syste\n\u201cElectronic Stability Program\nthe \u201cOPERATING YOUR VE\ntion.\n4-49 R\nt ESP\u00ae Warning Light\nL\nL\n52KM133\n57L30045 ESP\u00ae is a registered trademark of\nurned to \u201cON\u201d Mercedes-Benz Group.\nis pressed to\nON, this light This light blinks 5 times per second when\ncheck that the one of the following systems is activated.\n\u2022 Stability control system\nis pushed to \u2022 Traction control system\n(other than If this light blinks, drive carefully. W\nor light comes p\nWhen the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d c\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to c\nems, refer to change the ignition mode to ON, the light c\nm (ESP\u00ae)\u201d in comes on briefly so you can check that the u\nEHICLE\u201d sec- light is working. If the light stays on, or\nI\ncomes on when driving and remains on,\nw\nthere may be something wrong with the\nESP\u00ae systems (other than ABS). You s\nH\nshould have the system inspected by a\nS\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\nFor details of the ESP\u00ae systems, refer to\n\u201cElectronic Stability Program (ESP\u00ae)\u201d in the\n\u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section. Low Engine Coolant Temperature\nLight (blue color) (if equipped)\n54G344\nWhen the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to\nchange the ignition mode to ON, this light\ncomes on and stays on if the engine is\ncold, and goes off after the engine warms\nup.\nIf this light still stays on after the engine\nwarms up, there is a problem with the sen-\nsor.\nHave your vehicle inspected by a Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop.\n55TH0-74E"},135{"page_number": 181, "page_text": "ENG A-STOP Indicator Li\n(if equipped)\nWhen the ignition switch is tu\nposition or the engine switch\nchange the ignition mode to O\ncomes on briefly to let you kno\nworking.\nWhen the engine stops autom\nlight comes on.\nFor details, refer to \u201cENG A\ntem (Engine Auto Stop Star\nequipped)\u201d in the \u201cOPERAT\nVEHICLE\u201d section. ight ENG A-STOP OFF Indicator Light G\n(if equipped) w\n72M00032 62R0352\nurned to \u201cON\u201d When the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d T\nis pressed to position or the engine switch is pressed to l\nON, this light change the ignition mode to ON, this light t\now the light is comes on briefly if the system works prop- p\nerly. c\nc\nmatically, this When you push the ENG A-STOP OFF\nc\nswitch, this light comes on.\nc\nA-STOP Sys- If this light blinks when driving, there may v\nrt System) (if be something wrong with the ENG A- t\nTING YOUR STOP system. You should have the sys-\nT\ntem inspected by a Maruti Suzuki autho-\nu\nrized workshop.\nT\na\nFor details, refer to \u201cENG A-STOP System\nm\n(Engine Auto Stop Start System)\u201d in the\nh\n\u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section.\n2\nI\no\nc\nF\nP\nY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\nGasoline Particulate Filter (GPF)\nwarning light (if equipped)\n74TB0405\nThis Gasoline Particle Filter (GPF) warning\nlight comes on for several seconds when\nthe ignition switch is turned to the \u201cON\u201d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to\nchange the ignition mode to \u201cON\u201d so you\ncan check that light is working. If the light\ncomes on when driving, the GPF is nearly\nclogged. To go out the warning light, the\nvehicle must stay in motion until regenera-\ntion has been completed.\nThe process normally takes about 25 min-\nutes.\nThe optimum condition to end the process\nare achieved by keeping the vehicle in\nmotion at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph) or\nhigher, and an engine speed higher than\n2,000 rpm.\nIf you drive your vehicle until the light goes\nout, the regeneration of the GPF will be\ncompleted.\nFor details of the GPF, refer to \u201cGasoline\nParticulate Filter\u201d in the \u201cOPERATING\nYOUR VEHICLE\u201d section.\n4-50\n55TH0-74E"},136{"page_number": 182, "page_text": "INSTRUMENT CLUSTER\n4-51 R\nDeceleration Energy Regenerating M\nWhen the ignition switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d W\nposition or the engine switch is pressed to p\nchange the ignition mode to \u201cON\u201d, this light b\ncomes on briefly so you can check that the w\nlight is working.\nW\nWhen the deceleration energy regenerat- i\ning function is working, this light comes on. l\nFor details, refer to \u201cSHVS (Smart Hybrid F\nVehicle by Suzuki)\u201d in \u201cOPERATING t\nYOUR VEHICLE\u201d section. Master Warning Indicator Light\nWhen the ignition switch is turned \u201cON\u201d or\npushed to \u201cON\u201d mode, this light comes on\nbriefly so you can check that the light is\nworking.\nWhen the information display shows warn-\ning and indicator messages, this indicator\nlight may also blink.\nFor details, refer to \u201cInformation display\u201d in\nthis section.\n55TH0-74E"},137{"page_number": 183, "page_text": " OPERATING YO\nDaily Inspection Check\nIgnition Switch (Vehicl\nKeyless Push Start Sy\nEngine Switch (Vehicle\nKeyless Push Start Sy\nImmobilizer System ..\nPedal ...........................\nKeyless Push Start Sy\nStarting / Stopping En\nKeyless Push Start Sy\nStarting / Stopping En\nKeyless Push Start Sy\nParking Brake Lever .\nPrecaution for Parking\nUsing Transmission ..\nGearshift Indicator (if e\n59RN05760\nSHVS (Smart Hybrid V\n(for K10C engine) (if eq\nENG A-STOP System (\n(for K12N engine) (if eq\nENG A-STOP System (\n(for K10C engine) (if eq\nCruise Control (if equi\nSUZUKI SAFETY SUPP\nParking Sensors ........\nRearview Camera (if eq\nElectronic Stability Pro\nBraking ........................\nAnti-lock Brake System OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nOUR VEHICLE\nklist ..................................................5-1\nle without\nystem) (if equipped) ........................5-3\ne with\nystem) (if equipped) ........................5-5\n...........................................................5-6\n...........................................................5-8\nystem (if equipped) .........................5-9\nngine (Vehicle without\nystem) (if equipped) ........................5-12\nngine (Vehicle with\nystem) (if equipped) ........................5-13\n...........................................................5-17\ng ........................................................5-19\n...........................................................5-21\nequipped) ........................................5-36\nVehicle by Maruti Suzuki)\nquipped)...........................................5-38\n(Engine Auto Stop Start System)\nquipped) .......................................... 5-40\n(Engine Auto Stop Start System)\nquipped) .......................................... 5-52\nipped) ............................................... 5-64\nPORT (if equipped) ......................... 5-66\n........................................................... 5-99\nquipped)..........................................5-104\nogram (ESP\u00ae)..................................5-106\n..........................................................5-111\nm (ABS) ............................................5-112\n55TH0-74E"},138{"page_number": 184, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nDaily Inspection Che\nBefore Driving\n1) Check that the windows, m\nand reflectors are clean\nstructed.\n2) Visually check the tyres fo\ning points:\n\u2013 the depth of the tread gro\n\u2013 abnormal wear, cracks an\n\u2013 loose wheel nuts\n\u2013 existence of foreign mate\nnails, stones, etc.\nRefer to \u201cTyres\u201d in \u201cINSPE\nMAINTENANCE\u201d section fo\n3) Look for fluid and oil leakag\n5-1 HICLE\necklist NOTE: O\nIt is normal for water to drip from the air t\nconditioning system while and after use. h\nu\n4) Check that the hood is fully closed and\n1\nlatched.\n2\n5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,\n3\nbrake lights and horn for proper opera-\n4\ntion.\n5\n6) Adjust the seat and head restraint.\n6\n7) Check the brake pedal feeling and the\nadjustment condition for the parking\nbrake lever or pedal.\nRefer to \u201cBrake\u201d in \u201cINSPECTION AND\nMAINTENANCE\u201d section for details.\n8) Adjust the mirrors.\n9) Check that you and all the passengers\n59RN05750 have properly fastened the seat belts.\n10)Check that all the warning lights come\nmirrors, lights\nn and unob- on as the ignition switch is turned to\n\u201cON\u201d position.\nor the follow- 11)Check all the gauges.\n12)Check that the brake system warning\nlight turns off when the parking brake is\noove\nreleased.\nnd damage\nerial such as\nECTION AND\nor details.\nO\nf\nge.\nt\np Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel\ntank, or before a long distance driving (like\nhighway driving) perform the following\nunder-hood checks:\n1) Engine oil level\n2) Coolant level\n3) Brake fluid level\n4) Battery fluid (acid) level\n5) Windshield washer fluid level\n6) Hood latch operation\nPull the hood release lever inside the\nvehicle. Check that you cannot open\nthe hood further without releasing the\nsecondary latch. Close the hood\nsecurely after checking for proper latch\noperation. See the item \u201cAll latches,\nhinges and locks\u201d of \u201cChassis, body\nand others\u201d in \u201cMaintenance Schedule\u201d\nin \u201cINSPECTION AND MAINTE-\nNANCE\u201d section for lubrication sched-\nule.\nOnce a month, or each time you fill your\nfuel tank, check the tyre pressure using a\ntyre pressure gauge. Also check the tyre\npressure of the spare tyre.\n55TH0-74E"},139{"page_number": 185, "page_text": "When You Notice the Foll\nSymptoms lowing Check the Tyre Pressure\n80J009\n55T090020\n\u2022 Periodically check and adjust the tyre\npressure. The specified tyre pressure for\nthe tyres of this vehicle can be confirmed\nby checking the tyre information label (1)\naffixed to the opening of the driver\u2019s\ndoor.\n\u2022 Driving with insufficient tyre pressure\ncan cause the sides of the tyre to wear,\nin addition to decreasing fuel efficiency. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-2\n55TH0-74E"},140{"page_number": 186, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nTo adjust the tire pressure, re\nin \u201cINSPECTION AND MAIN\nsection.\n5-3 HICLE\nCheck the Exhaust Pipe I\nw\nS\nefer to \u201cTyres\u201d\nNTENANCE\u201d\n80J011\nPeriodically check the exhaust pipes for\nholes or cracks.\nT\np\nL\nT\no\nr Ignition Switch (Vehicle\nwithout Keyless Push Start\nSystem) (if equipped)\n68PH00310\nThe ignition switch has the following four\npositions:\nLOCK\nThis is the normal parking position. It is the\nonly position in which the key can be\nremoved.\n55TH0-74E"},141{"page_number": 187, "page_text": "Manual transmission\nT\nCC\nCC\nAA\nKK\nCC\nOO\nLL\n\u2022 Manual transmission vehi\nYou must push in the key\n\u201cLOCK\u201d position. It locks the\nprevents normal use of\nwheel after the key is remov\n\u2022 Auto Gear Shift vehicles:\nThe gearshift lever must be\ntral) to turn the key to \u201cLOCK\nlocks the ignition and prev\nuse of the steering wheel a\nlever.\nTo release the steering lock, i\nand turn it clockwise to one\npositions. If you have trouble\nkey to unlock the steering wh\ning the steering wheel slightly\nor left while turning the key. ACC\nAccessories such as the radio can oper-\nTurn to \u201cLOCK\u201d ate, but the engine is off.\nON\nThis is the normal operating position. All\nelectrical systems are on.\nPush\nSTART\nThis is the position for starting the engine\nusing the starter motor. The key should be\nreleased from this position as soon as the\nengine starts.\nIgnition key reminder\n55T050010 A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind\nyou to remove the ignition key if it is in the\nicles:\nto turn it to ignition switch when the driver\u2019s door is\ne ignition, and opened.\nthe steering\nved.\ne in \u201cN\u201d (Neu-\nK\u201d Position. It\nvents normal\nand gearshift\ninsert the key\nof the other\ne turning the\nheel, try turn-\ny to the right 55T050020 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-4\n55TH0-74E"},142{"page_number": 188, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nas the audio system, outside\nrors and accessory socket wit\noff. When this position is s\n5-5 HICLE\nrearview mir- \u2022 With the engine on \u2022\nth the engine All electric equipment is operational. The\nselected, the vehicle can be driven when you have elected this ignition mode by pressing\ne engine switch.\nRT\nnual transmission vehicles:\nvided you have the keyless push start\ntem remote controller with you, the\nine automatically starts when you\nss the engine switch to select this igni-\nmode after shifting to \u201cN\u201d (Neutral) and\nressing the brake and clutch pedals.\no Gear Shift vehicles:\nvided you have the keyless push start\ntem remote controller with you, the\nine automatically starts when you\nss the engine switch to select this igni-\nmode after placing the gearshift lever\nN\u201d (Neutral) position and depressing\nbrake pedal.\nTE:\n\u2022 The steering will be unlocked when you\npress the engine switch to change the\n55TH0-74E"},143{"page_number": 189, "page_text": "ignition mode from LOCK (O\nor ON.\n\u2022 You do not need to keep\nswitch pressed until the eng\n\u2022 In the presence of strong ra\nnoise, you may not be abl\nthe ignition mode to ACC\nstart the engine using the e\nIn this case, the informatio\nthe instrument cluster will s\nlowing message.\nUnreleased Steering Lock\nIf the steering lock remains en\nyou press the engine switch to\nignition mode to ON, the info\nplay in the instrument cluste\nfollowing message and you\nthe engine. If this happens\nengine switch, turning the ste\nto right or left. OFF) to ACC I\nT\np the engine\nv\ngine starts.\nadio wave or e\nle to change T\nor ON or to v\nengine switch. o\non display in t\nshow the fol- t\nr\nf\n55T050160 t\ne\ni\ns\nM\nv\nr\nm\nw\n74TB05005\nI\nk Warning\ny\nngaged when t\no change the t\normation dis- 55TB5014 s\ner shows the NOTE: l\ncannot start The steering lock may not be released and l\ns, press the the immobilizer/keyless push start system t\neering wheel warning light turns on if some load is\napplied on the steering wheel. If this hap- W\n\u201c\npens, turn the steering wheel system to the\nt\nright or left to relieve it from the load before\n(\nyou press the engine switch again to\nchange to the desired ignition mode. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nImmobilizer System\nThis system is designed to help prevent\nvehicle theft by electronically disabling the\nengine starting system.\nThe engine can be started only with your\nvehicle\u2019s original immobilizer ignition key\nor keyless push start system remote con-\ntroller, which has an electronic identifica-\ntion code programmed in it. The key or\nremote controller communicates the identi-\nfication code to the vehicle when the igni-\ntion switch is turned to \u201cON\u201d position or the\nengine switch is pressed to change the\nignition mode to ON. If you need to make\nspare keys or remote controllers, see a\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop. The\nvehicle must be programmed with the cor-\nrect identification code for the spare. A key\nmade by an ordinary locksmith will not\nwork.\nIn the case you can start the engine, when\nyou turn the ignition switch to \u201cLOCK\u201d posi-\ntion or press the engine switch to change\nthe ignition mode to ON, the immobilizer\nsystem will be released and the immobi-\nlizer/keyless push start system warning\nlight will turn on for about 2 seconds and\nthen it will turn off.\nWhen you turn the ignition switch to\n\u201cLOCK\u201d position or press the engine switch\nto change the ignition mode to LOCK\n(OFF), the immobilizer system will operate.\n5-6\n55TH0-74E"},144{"page_number": 190, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nNOTE:\nThis immobilizer system is m\nfree.\ntem warning light blinks when\nswitch is in \u201cON\u201d position or\nmode is ON, the engine will no\nNOTE:\nIf the immobilizer/keyless pu\ntem warning light blinks or c\nmessage may be shown on th\ndisplay.\n5-7 HICLE\nFor vehicles without a keyless push N\nstart system \u2022\nIf this light blinks, turn the ignition switch to\n\u201cLOCK\u201d position, and then turn it back to\n\u201cON\u201d position.\nIf the light still blinks after the ignition\nswitch is turned back to \u201cON\u201d position, \u2022\nthere may be something wrong with your\nkey or with the immobilizer system. Ask a\nmaintenance- Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop to\nhave the system inspected.\nFor vehicles with a keyless push start\nsystem \u2022\nIf this light blinks, change the ignition mode\nto LOCK (OFF), and then change it back to\nON. Also refer to \u201cIf the master warning\nindicator light blinks and the engine cannot\nbe started\u201d in \u201cStarting / stopping engine\n(vehicle with keyless push start system) (if\nequipped)\u201d in \u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHI-\nCLE\u201d section.\nIf the light still blinks after the ignition mode\nis changed back to ON, there may be\nn the ignition\nsomething wrong with your key or with the\nr the ignition\nimmobilizer system. Ask a Maruti Suzuki\not start.\nauthorized workshop to have the system\ninspected.\nush start sys- The immobilizer/keyless push start system\ncomes on, a warning light may also blink if the remote\nI\nhe information controller is not in the vehicle when you\nclose the door or attempt to start the A\nengine. y\ni\no NOTE:\n\u2022 If you lose your immobilizer ignition key\nor remote controller, ask a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop as soon as possi-\nble to deactivate the lost one, and to\nmake a new key or remote controller.\n\u2022 If you own other vehicles with immobi-\nlizer keys, keep those keys away from\nthe ignition switch or the engine switch\nwhen using your Maruti Suzuki vehicle.\nOtherwise, the engine may not be\nstarted because they may interfere with\nyour Maruti Suzuki vehicle\u2019s immobilizer\nsystem.\n\u2022 If you attach any metal objects to the\nimmobilizer key or remote controller, it\nmay not start the engine.\nIgnition Key Reminder (if equipped)\nA buzzer sounds intermittently to remind\nyou to remove the ignition key if it is in the\nignition keyhole when the driver\u2019s door is\nopened.\n55TH0-74E"},145{"page_number": 191, "page_text": "Pedal\nManual transmission\n(1) (2)\nAuto Gear Shift\n(2) Clutch Pedal (1)\nA clutch pedal is used to disengage the\ndriving force to the wheels when starting\nthe engine, stopping, or shifting the gear-\nshift lever. Depressing the pedal disen-\ngages the clutch.\n(3)\nBrake Pedal (2)\n80J2121\nYour vehicle is equipped with either front\nand rear disc brakes or front disc brakes\nand rear drum brakes. Depressing a brake A\npedal applies both sets of brakes.\nA\nYou may hear occasional brake squeal t\nwhen you apply the brakes. This is a nor- p\nmal condition caused by environmental\nfactors such as temperature, humidity, N\nsnow or dust, etc. Y\nr\nAuto Gear Shift - You may hear occasional\ne\nsound when you release brake pedal while\n(3) vehicle is in \u201cD\u201d (Drive) mode and about to s\nm\nmove. This is a normal phenomenon.\n80J2122 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nWARNING\nDo not apply brakes continuously or\nrest your foot on the brake pedal.\nThis will result in overheating of the\nbrakes which could cause unpredict-\nable braking action, longer stopping\ndistances, or permanent brake dam-\nage.\nAccelerator Pedal (3)\nAn accelerator pedal controls the speed of\nthe engine. Depressing the accelerator\npedal increases power output and speed.\nNOTE:\nYour vehicle is equipped with Brake Over-\nride System. If you depress both the accel-\nerator pedal and the brake pedal\nsimultaneously, the engine power output\nmay be suppressed.\n5-8\n55TH0-74E"},146{"page_number": 192, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nKeyless Push Start S\n(if equipped)\nProvided the keyless push\nremote controller is within the\nable area, you can use the e\nfor starting the engine and\nignition mode (ACC or ON). In\nfollowing functions can be use\n\u2022 Keyless entry function. Refe\nPush Start System Remote\n\u201cBEFORE DRIVING\u201d section\n\u2022 Locking and unlocking doo\nthe tailgate) using a req\nRefer to \u201cKeyless Push S\nRemote Controller\u201d in \u201cBEF\nING\u201d section for details.\n\u2022 Immobilizer (anti-theft) func\n\u201cImmobilizer System\u201d in thi\ndetails.\n(1)Interior workable area\n5-9 HICLE\nSystem The interior workable area is defined as all E\nthe interior spaces except for the space on\nT\nthe instrument panel or in the luggage\nf\ncompartment.\nstart system \u2022\ninterior work-\nNOTE:\nengine switch\nselecting an \u2022 Even when the remote controller is in the\nn addition, the interior workable area, if it is in any of the\n\u2022\ned: following conditions, you may not be\ner to \u201cKeyless able to start the engine or select the igni-\nController\u201d in tion modes, and the remote controller\nn for details. outside warning may be given.\nors (including \u2013The remote controller\u2019s battery is low.\nquest switch. \u2013The remote controller is affected by\nStart System strong radio wave or noise.\nFORE DRIV- \u2013The remote controller is in contact with\nor covered by a metallic object.\nction. Refer to \u2013The remote controller is in the secluded\nis section for\nstowages such as the glove box or a\ndoor pocket.\n\u2013The remote controller is in the sun visor\npocket or on the floor.\n\u2022 Even when the remote controller is out-\nside the interior workable area, if it is in\nN\nany of the following conditions, you may\nT\nbe able to start the engine or select the\nt\nignition mode. The remote controller out-\nb\nside warning may not be given at that\nt\ntime.\n\u2022\n\u2013The remote controller is outside the\nvehicle but very close to a door.\n\u2022\n\u2013The remote controller is on the instru-\nment panel.\n81M40230 Engine Switch Illumination\nThe engine switch is illuminated (lit) in the\nfollowing situations:\n\u2022 When the engine is off and the driver\u2019s\ndoor is open, or for 15 seconds after the\ndriver\u2019s door is closed. The illumination\nwill fade out after 15 seconds passed.\n\u2022 While the headlights and/or the position\nlights are on, the illumination will turn on.\nThe illumination will go out when the\nheadlights and the position lights are\nNOTE:\nTo save the lead-acid battery, the illumina-\ntion will be automatically turned off when\nboth of the following conditions are simul-\ntaneously met:\n\u2022 The headlights and the position lights\nare turned off.\n\u2022 15 minutes has elapsed since opening\nthe driver\u2019s door.\n55TH0-74E"},147{"page_number": 193, "page_text": "Selection of Ignition Mod\nPress the engine switch to se\nON mode as follows when\nelectric accessory or check t\nof instrument cluster without\nengine.\nNOTE:\nWhen selecting the ignition\ninformation display in the inst\nter show certain messages. R\nmation Display\u201d in the \u201cIN\nCLUSTER\u201d section.\n1) Bring the keyless push\nremote controller with you\n2) Manual transmission\ndepressing the clutch ped\nengine switch (1).\nAuto Gear Shift \u2013 Withou\nthe brake pedal, press\nswitch (1). des Every time you press the engine switch, I\nthe ignition mode changes as follows. b\nelect ACC or\nb\nyou use an Auto Gear Shift\nthe operation Manual transmission Y\nt running the t\ni\ne\nc\nmodes, the w\ntrument clus- s\nRefer to \u201cInfor- m\nNSTRUMENT m\n((OOFFFF)) ((AAuuddiioo eeqquuiippmmeenntt)) m\nstart system\nand sit in the\n68PH00322\nAutomatic transmission\nGGeeaarrsshhiifftt PP\nlleevveerr iinn\nLLOOCCKK AACCCC OONN\n82K254 ((OOFFFF)) ((AAuuddiioo eeqquuiippmmeenntt)) 1\n\u2013 Without\ndal, press the GGeeaarrsshhiifftt lleevveerr iinn aa PP\nppoossiittiioonn ootthheerr tthhaann\nut depressing\nthe engine\n57L31006 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nIf the master warning indicator light\nblinks and the ignition modes cannot\nbe selected\nYour keyless push start system remote con-\ntroller may not be sensed as being within the\ninterior workable area (refer to the related\nexplanation in this section). Try again after\nchecking that you have the remote controller\nwith you. If the ignition modes still cannot be\nselected, the battery of the remote controller\nmay be discharged. To select an ignition\nmode, you must then use the following\nmethod:\n((11))\n((22))\n63R40050\n1) Manual transmission \u2013 Without\ndepressing the clutch pedal, push the\nengine switch (1).\nAuto Gear Shift \u2013 Without depressing\nthe brake pedal, press the engine\nswitch (1).\n5-10\n55TH0-74E"},148{"page_number": 194, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nAutomatic Transmission\ndepressing the brake peda\nengine switch (1).\n2) Within about 10 second\nmaster warning indicator\nand the information dis\ninstrument cluster shows\nmessage, touch the engine\nthe lock switch end of the\nWhile the master warning in\nblinks, the immobilizer/keyles\ntem warning light will come o\nseconds.\nIf you still cannot select the ign\nthere may be the other prob\nthe discharged lead-acid ba\ncase, consult a Maruti Suzuk\nworkshop.\n5-11 HICLE\n- Without NOTE:\nR\nal, press the \u2022 You may customize the system to cause\nthe interior buzzer to sound once for W\nwarning that remote controller is out of m\nds while the sensing range. For this customization, t\nr light blinks consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized work- i\nsplay in the shop. t\nthe following \u2022 If the battery of the remote controller is s\ne switch with almost discharged, the information dis- w\ne remote con- play in the instrument cluster shows the m\nfollowing message when you press the s\nengine switch to change the ignition\nmode to ON. Refer to \u201cInformation Dis- \u2022\nplay\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d sec-\ntion for details. For details on replacing\nthe battery, refer to \u201cKeyless Push Start\nSystem Remote Controller\u201d in \u201cBEFORE\nDRIVING\u201d section.\n\u2022\nndicator light\nss push sys-\non for about 5\nnition modes,\nblem such as 74TB05007\nattery. In this\nki authorized Remote Controller Outside Warning\nWhen either of the following conditions is\nmet, the system causes the remote con-\ntroller outside warning by sounding the\ninterior and exterior buzzers. At the same\ntime, the immobilizer/keyless push start\nsystem warning light comes on, the master\nwarning indicator light blinks and the infor-\nmation display in the instrument cluster will\nshow the corresponding message.\n\u2022 Any door is opened and then closed\nwhile the remote controller is not inside\nthe vehicle and the engine is running or\nthe ignition mode has been changed to\nACC or ON by pressing the engine\nswitch.\n\u2022 The remote controller is not inside the\nvehicle when you attempt to start the\nengine after changing the ignition mode\nto ACC or ON by pressing the engine\nswitch.\n55TB5015\n55TH0-74E"},149{"page_number": 195, "page_text": "(1)Immobilizer/keyless pus\ntem warning light (blinks)\n(2)Master warning indicator\nIf the warning is given, place\ncontroller inside the vehicle\npossible.\n\u2022 Any attempt to start the en\nwhile the warning is active\nsage appearing in the info\nplay in the instrument clus\nindicate this condition. Refe\ntion Display\u201d in the \u201cIN\nCLUSTER\u201d section for detai\n\u2022 Normally, the immobilizer/k\nstart system warning light s\nand the master warning in\nshould stop blinking shor\nremote controller is brough\nthe vehicle. If they remain\ning, change the ignition mo\n(OFF) by pressing the engin\nthen perform the engine st\ntion. Refer to \u201cStarting / Stop\n(Vehicle with Keyless Pus\ntem) (if equipped)\u201d in this se\nNOTE:\nAlways keep the remote contr\nas the driver. sh start sys- Starting / Stopping Engine 3\n)\n(Vehicle without Keyless\nlight (blinks)\nPush Start System)\ne the remote\n(if equipped)\nas soon as\nStarting Engine\nngine will fail\ne. The mes-\normation dis-\nster will also\nMT\ner to \u201cInforma- 4\nNSTRUMENT\nils.\nkeyless push\nshould go out\nndicator light\nrtly after the AGS\nht back inside\nlit and blink-\node to LOCK\nne switch and\ntarting opera-\npping Engine\nsh Start Sys- AT\nection.\nroller with you\n74TB05030\n1) Check that the parking brake is set fully.\n2) Turn off such loads as the headlights\nand air conditioning system to facilitate\nstarting of the engine. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n3) Manual transmission vehicles:\nShift into \u201cN\u201d (Neutral). Hold the clutch\npedal and brake pedal fully depressed.\nAuto Gear Shift vehicles:\nShift into \u201cN\u201d (Neutral) and depress the\nbrake pedal. Hold the brake pedal while\nstarting the engine.\nAutomatic Transmission:\nCheck that the gearshift lever is in \u201cP\u201d\n(Park) position and keep depressing\nthe brake pedal fully.\n4) With your foot taken off the accelerator\npedal, crank the engine by turning the\nignition key to \u201cSTART\u201d. Release the\nkey immediately after the engine has\nstarted.\n5-12\n55TH0-74E"},150{"page_number": 196, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nNOTE:\nAuto Gear Shift vehicles:\nIf the engine cannot be started\nthe gearshift lever is in \u201cN\u201d be\ning the engine.\n5-13 HICLE\nStopping Engine S\n(\nS\nS\nd, make sure\nbefore restart-\n1\n2\n3 Starting / Stopping Engine\n(Vehicle with Keyless Push\nStart System) (if equipped)\nStarting Engine\nMT\nAGS\nAT\n74TB05029\n1) Check that the parking brake is set fully.\n2) Turn off such loads as the headlights\nand air conditioning system to facilitate\nstarting of the engine.\n3) Manual transmission vehicles:\nShift into \u201cN\u201d (Neutral). Hold the clutch\npedal and brake pedal fully depressed.\n55TH0-74E"},151{"page_number": 197, "page_text": "Auto Gear Shift vehicles:\nShift into \u201cN\u201d (Neutral) and\nbrake pedal. Hold the brak\nstarting the engine.\nAutomatic Transmission:\nCheck that the gearshift le\n(Park) position and keep\nthe brake pedal fully.\n4) The \u201cPUSH START SWITC\nwill appear in the informati\nthe instrument cluster.\n((11))\n5) With your foot taken off the\npedal, push the engine\nWhen the engine is starte\nmotor will automatically sto\n\u2022 Even if you fail to start\nthe starter motor will\nautomatically after appr\nseconds. In this case\nengine switch to select\nmode and restart the en \u2022 If there is a problem with the system, \u2022\nd depress the the engine will not start automatically\nke pedal while even if the switch is pressed. In case\nthe starter motor does not turn or\nstops immediately, start the engine \u2022\never is in \u201cP\u201d by the following procedure.\np depressing a. Press the engine switch to select\nthe ON mode.\nCH\u201d message b. Perform the above procedure 1) \u2022\nion display in to 3).\nc. Keep the engine switch pressed\nuntil the engine starts. Release\nyour finger from the engine switch\nafter the engine has started. \u2022\nS\n\u2022\n\u2022\n82K254\ne accelerator\nswitch (1).\ned, the starter\nop.\nt the engine,\nstop turning\nroximately 12 NOTE:\ne, press the \u2022 You do not need to keep the engine\nLOCK (OFF) switch pressed to start the engine.\nngine. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n\u2022 Manual transmission vehicles:\nThe engine of a manual transmission\nvehicle will not start unless the clutch\npedal is depressed.\n\u2022 Auto Gear Shift vehicles:\nIf the engine cannot be started, make\nsure the gearshift lever is in \u201cN\u201d before\nrestarting the engine.\n\u2022 During the engine starting procedure,\nmessages on the information display will\nhelp you. Refer to \u201cInformation display\u201d\nin \u201cINSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d section\nfor details.\n\u2022 When the engine stalls in intersection\nand railway crossing etc., restart the\nengine by usual procedure.\nStopping Engine\n\u2022 Depress the engine switch to stop the\nengine after the vehicle stopped com-\npletely.\n\u2022 If the engine remains stopped for a while\nafter it was stopped unexpectedly or was\nraced before stopping, a clicking sound\nmay be heard from around the engine\nwhen it is restarted. This is not a mal-\nfunction. Always let the engine idle\nbefore stopping it.\n5-14\n55TH0-74E"},152{"page_number": 198, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nEmergency Stop\nIn case of emergency, you c\nengine by quickly pushing\nswitch more than 3 times, or\nholding the engine switch for\nseconds while the vehicle is in\nNOTE:\nExcept in cases of emergency\nthe engine while the vehicle\nThe steering and braking o\nrequire more effort when th\nstopped. Refer to \u201cBraking\u201d in\n5-15 HICLE\nIf the Master Warning Indicator\nLight Blinks and the Engine\ncannot be Started\nYour keyless push start system remote con-\ntroller may not be sensed as being within the\ninterior workable area (refer to the related\nexplanation in this section). Try again after\nchecking that you have the remote controller\nwith you. If the engine cannot be started, the\nbattery of the remote controller may be dis-\ncharged. To start the engine, you must then\nuse the following method:\ncan stop the\nthe engine 1) Manual Transmission - Shift to \u201cN\u201d\npushing and (Neutral) and fully depress the clutch 2\nmore than 2 pedal. Hold the clutch and brake pedal\nn motion. fully depressed.\nAutomatic Transmission - Check that\nthe gearshift lever is in \u201cP\u201d (Park) posi-\ny, do not stop tion and keep depressing the brake\nis in motion. pedal fully.\noperation will Auto Gear Shift - Shift to \u201cN\u201d (Neutral)\nhe engine is and fully depress the brake pedal. Hold\nthis section. the brake pedal fully depressed.\n3 ((11))\n((22))\n63R40050\n2) If the following message is shown on\nthe information display in the instru-\nment cluster, press the engine switch\n(1).\n74TB05008\n3) Within about 10 seconds while the\nmaster warning indicator light blinks\nand the information display in the\ninstrument cluster shows the following\nmessage, touch the engine switch with\n55TH0-74E"},153{"page_number": 199, "page_text": "If you still cannot start the e\nmay be the other problem suc\ncharged lead-acid battery. I\nconsult a Maruti Suzuki auth\nshop.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 You may customize the sys\nthe interior buzzer to sou\nwarning that remote contro\nsensing range. For this cu\nconsult a Maruti Suzuki auth\nshop.\n\u2022 If the battery of the remote\nalmost discharged, the info\nplay in the instrument cluste\nfollowing message when yo\nengine switch to change ON. Refer to \u201cInformation Dis- G\nNSTRUMENT CLUSTER\u201d sec- (\ntails. For details on replacing\nT\ny, refer to \u201cKeyless Push Start\ne\nemote Controller\u201d in \u201cBEFORE\nc\nsection.\nt\ni\np\ng\nW\na\nr\nt\nl\ng\n74TB05010 c\nengine, there\nch as the dis-\nIn this case,\nhorized work-\nstem to cause\nund once for\noller is out of\nustomization,\nhorized work-\ne controller is\normation dis-\ner shows the\nou press the\nthe ignition OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nGasoline Particulate Filter (GPF)\n(For K10C Engine Model)\nThe GPF filters off the soot particles in the\nexhaust gas, so the GPF could get\nclogged depending on the driving condi-\ntion. The GPF is cleaned by the regenerat-\ning function that combusts the soot\nparticles in the GPF by raising the exhaust\ngas temperature during driving or idling.\nWhen a certain amount of soot particles is\naccumulated in the GPF, the GPF will\nregenerate automatically to avoid clogging\nthe filter. Therefore, you may hear a little\nlouder engine sounds and/or the exhaust\ngas temperature could be higher due to\ncombustion of the soot particles.\nGPF is regenerating, the exhaust gas\ntemperature could be higher.\n5-16\n55TH0-74E"},154{"page_number": 200, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nGPF warning light\nIf the GPF warning light come\ndriving, the GPF is nearly clog\nshould regenerate the GPF wh\nwarning light comes on. To\nwarning light, the vehicle m\nmotion until regeneration has\npleted.\nThe process normally takes a\nutes.\nThe optimum condition to end\nare achieved by keeping the v\nmotion at a speed of 50 km/h\nhigher, and an engine speed h\n2,000 rpm.\nHowever, you should drive car\nwithin the legal speed limit, an\ntake in to consideration the su\ntraffic condition.\nIf you drive your vehicle until t\nout, the regeneration of the GP\ncompleted.\n5-17 HICLE\nP\n74TB0405\nes on when\ngged. You\nhen the GPF\no go out the\nmust stay in\ns been com-\nabout 25 min-\nd the process\nvehicle in T\n(31 mph) or t\nhigher than d\ni\nrefully and t\nnd should a\nurrounding l\nl\nthe light goes t\nPF will be Parking Brake Lever\n((11))\n((22))\n((33))\n55T050220\n(1)To set\n(2)To release\n(3)To release\nThe parking brake lever is located between\nthe front seats. To set the parking brake,\ndepress the brake pedal and pull the park-\ning brake lever all the way up. To release\nthe parking brake, depress the brake pedal\nand pull up slightly on the parking brake\nlever, push the button on the end of the\nlever with your thumb, and lower the lever\nto its original position.\n55TH0-74E"},155{"page_number": 201, "page_text": " N\n(\nF\nl\ni\nP\nA\ny\ns\np\nb\nt OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\n(For Auto Gear Shift Model)\nFor details on how to use the gearshift\nlever to park the vehicle, refer to \u201cParking\u201d\nin \u201cAuto Gear Shift\u201d in this section.\nParking Brake Reminder Buzzer\nA buzzer sounds intermittently to remind\nyou to release the parking brake if you\nstart the vehicle without fully releasing the\nparking brake. Check that the parking\nbrake is fully released and the brake sys-\ntem warning light turns off.\n5-18\n55TH0-74E"},156{"page_number": 202, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n5-19 HICLE\nW\ni\nS\nT\nc\nr\ne With the Engine Running, the Cool-\ning Fan (Radiator Fan) may Rotate\nSuddenly\nThe cooling fan (radiator fan) in the engine\ncompartment may automatically stop and\nrotate depending on the conditions of the\nengine coolant temperature.\n55TH0-74E"},157{"page_number": 203, "page_text": "When You Park the Vehic\non a Snowy Day cle Outside Do not Park the Vehicle Near Flam- W\nmable Materials E\n69RHS174\nE\nt\ni OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nWhen Leaving the Vehicle, Stop the\nEngine and Lock Doors\n69RHS054\nEven when leaving the vehicle for a short\ntime, do not leave cash or valuables\ninside, as there is a risk of theft.\n5-20\n55TH0-74E"},158{"page_number": 204, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nDo not Leave the Comput\nMobile Phone in the Vehic\nThere is the possibility of th\nitems could become dama\nmoisture, humidity or tempera\nDo not Leave Lighters an\nglasses in the Vehicle\n5-21 HICLE\nter and the U\nicle\nheft, or these\naged due to\nature change.\nnd Eye-\nM\n69RHS175\nS\nT\nw\nA\nr\nc\nt\na Using Transmission\nManual Transmission\n56RM03002\nStarting off\nTo start off, depress the clutch pedal all the\nway to the floor and shift into 1st gear.\nAfter releasing the parking brake, gradually\nrelease the clutch. When you hear a\nchange in the engine\u2019s sound, slowly press\nthe accelerator while continuing to gradu-\nally release the clutch.\n55TH0-74E"},159{"page_number": 205, "page_text": "Shifting\nAll forward gears are synch\nprovide quiet and easy shif\ndepress the clutch pedal all th\nfloor before shifting gears\nengine speed from rising into\nof the tachometer.\nDownshifting maximum\nspeeds\nFor K12N(DOHC) engine mo\nFor K10C(DITC) engine mod\n*NOTE:\nYou may not accelerate to th\nallowable speed because of th\nuation and/or the vehicle cond hronized and\nfting. Always\nhe way to the\ns. Keep the\nthe red zone\nallowable\nodels\ndels\nN\nI\nf\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\nhe maximum\nhe driving sit-\ndition. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\nIf it is difficult to engage reverse gear [R],\nfollow below procedure.\n\u2022 Put gear lever in neutral [N] position.\n\u2022 Release clutch pedal once.\n\u2022 Again depress the clutch pedal and shift\nfrom [N] to [R].\n5-22\n55TH0-74E"},160{"page_number": 206, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n6-speed Automatic Trans\nGearshift lever\nThe gearshift lever is design\ncannot be shifted out of \u201cP\u201d po\nthe ignition mode is ON an\npedal is depressed.\nThe gearshift lever has a lock\nto help prevent accidental shif\ngearshift lever as follows:\n5-23 HICLE\nsmission Models with manual mode N\n\u2022\n\u2022\nU\n55TB502\nd\n(1)Knob button\n55TB501\nP\nU\nned so that it\nw\nosition unless\ni\nnd the brake\nt\nR\nU\nf\np\nR\nk mechanism\nfting. Shift the NOTE:\n\u2022 Always shift the gearshift lever without\npushing in the knob button (1) except\nwhen you shift from \u201cP\u201d to \u201cR\u201d, from \u201cD\u201d\nto \u201cM\u201d or \u201cL\u201d, from \u201cN\u201d to \u201cR\u201d or from \u201cR\u201d\nto \u201cP\u201d. If you always push in the knob\nbutton (1) when shifting the gearshift\nlever, you could shift into \u201cP\u201d, \u201cR\u201d, \u201cM\u201d or\n\u201cL\u201d by mistake.\n\u2022 If driver\u2019s or passenger\u2019s knee hits the\ngearshift lever while driving, the lever\ncould move and the gear could be\nchanged unexpectedly.\nUse the gearshift lever positions as\ndescribed below:\nP (Park)\nUse this position to lock the transmission\nwhen the vehicle is parked or when start-\ning the engine. Shift into Park only when\nthe vehicle is completely stationary.\nR (Reverse)\nUse this position to reverse the vehicle\nfrom stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-\npletely stationary before shifting into\nReverse.\n55TH0-74E"},161{"page_number": 207, "page_text": "N (Neutral)\nUse this position for starting\nthe engine stalls and you nee\nwhile the vehicle is moving. Y\nshift into Neutral and depres\npedal to hold the vehicle stati\nidling.\nD (Drive)\nUse this position for all norma\nWith the gearshift lever in \u201cD\ncan get an automatic downshif\nthe accelerator pedal. The hig\ncle speed is, the more you n\nthe accelerator pedal to get a d\nM (manual mode)\n(models with manual mode)\nUse this position for driving in\nmode. Refer to \u201cManual mode\nsection for details on how to u\nual mode.\nNOTE:\nIf you move the gearshift leve\ngear while driving faster than t\nallowable speed for the low\ntransmission will not actual\nuntil your speed drops below t\nspeed for the lower gear. the engine if\ned to restart it\nYou may also\nss the brake\nionary during\nal driving.\nD\u201d range you\nft by pressing\ngher the vehi-\nneed to press\ndownshift.\n)\nn the manual\ne\u201d later in this\nuse the man-\ner to a lower\nthe maximum\nwer gear, the N\nlly downshift W\nthe maximum a\np\ne\np\ns\ns\na OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\nWhen you shift the gearshift lever into \u201cP\u201d\nand stop the engine before depressing the\nparking brake pedal, if you try to restart the\nengine and shift the gearshift lever into the\nposition other than \u201cP\u201d, it may reduce gear-\nshift lever capability, or unusual sound and\nshock may occur. However, this is not\nabnormal.\n5-24\n55TH0-74E"},162{"page_number": 208, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nManual mode\n(models with manual mode)\nThe automatic transmission ca\nautomatically. When using\nmode, you can shift gears\nmanner as conventional man\nsion.\nTo use the manual mode, shift\nlever from \u201cD\u201d to \u201cM\u201d.\n((11)) ((22))\n(1)Manual mode indicator\n(2)Gear position\n5-25 HICLE\nThe information display shows the manual N\n) mode indicator and the current gear posi- W\nan shift gears tion. t\nthe manual g\nin the same NOTE: t\nnual transmis- \u2022 The indicated gear position in the infor- t\nmation display when you shift from \u201cD\u201d to\nt the gearshift \u201cM\u201d is the gear position that was U\nselected automatically when the gear-\nshift lever was in \u201cD\u201d.\n\u2022 You can change to the manual mode\ntemporarily by pulling the shift paddle on\nthe steering wheel toward you when the\ngearshift lever is in \u201cD\u201d.\nShifting in the manual mode\nYou can shift gears from 1st to 6th depend-\ning on driving speed.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When the driving speed becomes slow,\nthe gear shifts down automatically, and\nwhen the vehicle stops, the gear position\nwill be in 1st gear without shifting the T\n55TB503 gearshift lever. l\n\u2022 In Manual mode, even if the engine is t\nredlined, the gear is not shifted up auto- f\nmatically. o\nT\nl\nt\n55TB504 f\no NOTE:\nWhen you change gear, sometimes the\ntransmission may not shift to the desired\ngear but a buzzer sounds instead. This is\nto maintain good driveability and to protect\nthe transmission.\nUsing the shift paddle\n55TB505\nTo shift up, pull \u201c+\u201d side shift paddle,\nlocated on right side of the steering wheel,\ntoward you. When you release your finger\nfrom the switch, the switch will return to the\noriginal position.\nTo shift down, pull \u201c\u2013\u201d side shift paddle,\nlocated on left side of the steering wheel,\ntoward you. When you release your finger\nfrom the switch, the switch will return to the\noriginal position.\n55TH0-74E"},163{"page_number": 209, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 To shift gears continuously,\nfinger from the shift paddle,\nshift paddle again. You\ngears continuously while\nshift paddle toward you.\n\u2022 When you pull the both \u201c+\u201d\npaddle simultaneously, the g\nshift.\nCanceling the manual mode\nTo cancel the manual mode, s\nshift lever from \u201cM\u201d to \u201cD\u201d.\nTemporary manual mode\nPull the shift paddle toward yo\ning with the gearshift lever The temporary manual mode will be can- f\nrelease your celed automatically in the following situa- b\n, then pull the tions. J\ncannot shift \u2022 When you press and hold the accelera- n\nholding the tor pedal for a certain period of time with- T\nout shifting gears. t\n\u201d and \u201c\u2013\u201d shift \u2022 When driving speed becomes slow.\n1\ngear may not \u2022 In case of high accelerator pedal input\ntemporary manual mode is not canceled.\n2\n\u2022 In case of no accelerator pedal input\ne temporary manual mode cancellation\n3\nshift the gear- happens only when driving speed\nbecomes slow.\n4\nIf you cannot Shift Automatic Trans-\nou when driv- mission Gearshift Lever out of \u201cP\u201d\n(PARK) 5\nin \u201cD\u201d. The\nT\nI\ns\nd\nS\n74TB05022\nThe automatic transmission vehicles have\nan electrically operated park-lock feature.\nIf the vehicle\u2019s lead-acid battery is dis-\ncharged, or there is some other electrical OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nfailure, the automatic transmission cannot\nbe shifted out of Park in the normal way.\nJump starting may correct the condition. If\nnot, follow the procedure described below.\nThis procedure will permit shifting the\ntransmission out of Park.\n1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly\napplied.\n2) If the engine is running, stop the\nengine.\n3) Make sure the ignition mode is ON or\nACC.\n4) Remove the cover (1) by using a flat-\nbladed screwdriver covered with a soft\ncloth as shown.\n5) With the release button (2) pushed by\nthe key or the flat end rod, push the\nknob button (3) and shift the gearshift\nlever to the desired position.\nThis procedure is for emergency use only.\nIf repeated use of this procedure is neces-\nsary, or the procedure does not work as\ndescribed, take the vehicle to a Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop.\n5-26\n55TH0-74E"},164{"page_number": 210, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nAuto Gear Shift\nAuto Gear Shift is a 5-speed f\nreverse transmission.\nAuto Gear Shift has the basi\nconventional manual transm\nclutch operation and transm\nshifting are controlled electron\nNOTE:\nWhen you open the driver\u2019s d\nGear Shift systems run autom\nyou may hear an operating\nsound does not indicate malfu\n5-27 HICLE\nDepress brake pedal indicator S\nW\ng\nd\nc\nl\np\nI\n76MH0A047\nl\nThis light will come on if you do not\ni\ndepress the brake pedal in the following\np\nsituations.\nt\n55T050050 \u2022 When starting the engine. t\n\u2022 When the engine is on and the gearshift\nforward/\nlever is shifted from \u201cN\u201d position to \u201cD\u201d,\n\u201cM\u201d or \u201cR\u201d position.\nic features of \u2022 When the ignition switch is in \u201cON\u201d posi-\nmission, but tion or the ignition mode is \u201cON\u201d, and the\nmission gear engine is off, the gearshift lever is shifted\nnically. into any position.\nThis light will also come on if one of the\ngears cannot be engaged and the system\nis unable to re-try shifting when you shift\nthe gearshift lever from \u201cN\u201d position to \u201cD\u201d,\n\u201cM\u201d or \u201cR\u201d position.\ndoor, the Auto\nmatically and\ng noise. This\nunction. Starting the engine\nWhen starting the engine, always place the\ngearshift lever in the \u201cN\u201d position and\ndepress the brake pedal firmly. The engine\ncannot be started unless the gearshift\nlever is in the \u201cN\u201d position and the brake\npedal is depressed.\nIf you parked vehicle with gear engaged on\nlast time (if you can see \u201c1\u201d or \u201cR\u201d), shift\ninto \u201cN\u201d (Neutral) and depress the brake\npedal. Hold the brake pedal while starting\nthe engine. You can hear buzzer in short\ntime.\n76MH0A056\n55TH0-74E"},165{"page_number": 211, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 If you start the engine witho\nshift lever in the \u201cN\u201d positi\nposition indicator in the inst\nter will blink.\n\u2022 When the engine restarts a\nafter engine A-Stop, the g\nindicator in instrument clus\nplay \u201cN\u201d temporarily. This\nphenomenon. Clutch operation\nYou can select either the Drive (D) mode or\nthe Manual (M) mode or the Reverse (R)\nmode. Since this vehicle controls clutch\noperation electronically in either mode, you\ndo not need to operate the clutch.\nCreeping function\nThis vehicle has a creeping function that D\nhelps the vehicle to start smoothly by W\nengaging the clutch. When the gearshift m\nlever is in any of the positions \u201cD\u201d, \u201cM\u201d or c\n\u201cR\u201d, and you release your foot from the e\nbrake pedal, the vehicle starts slowly with- s\nout depressing the accelerator pedal.\nHowever, creep is not possible in manual N\n(M) mode with 2nd gear engaged. The 1\ncreeping function is disabled if you\ndepress the brake pedal or pull up the 2\nparking brake lever.\nNOTE:\nout the gear- If the driver\u2019s door is opened and/or the\nion, the gear parking brake lever is engaged with the\ntrument clus- gear in the \u201cM\u201d, \u201cD\u201d or \u201cR\u201d position, the\ncreeping function will not operate.\nautomatically\ngear position Parking and Stopping the vehicle\nster may dis- Auto Gear Shift does not have a parking\nis a normal position. Park the vehicle with a gear\nengaged. Make sure that the gearshift\nlever is \u201cD\u201d, \u201cM\u201d, or \u201cR\u201d.\nAlso, check the instrument cluster to make\nsure that the transaxle is engaged in \u201c1\u201d or\n\u201cR\u201d position. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nDrive (D) mode\nWhen the Drive (D) mode is activated, the\nmost appropriate gear position is automati-\ncally selected upon operation of the accel-\nerator pedal and variation of vehicle\nspeed.\nNormal driving:\n1) Start the engine as instructed in \u201cStart-\ning the engine\u201d in this section.\n2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift\nthe gearshift lever to the \u201cD\u201d position.\nWhen the gearshift lever is shifted to\nthe \u201cD\u201d position, the gear will be shifted\nto 1st.\nD\n55RM03009\n5-28\n55TH0-74E"},166{"page_number": 212, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If 1st gear cannot be en\nthough the gearshift leve\nshifted from the \u201cN\u201d to the\nthe system will re-try shifti\ncally. This will take some\nmay be heard from the gea\ning gear shock may occu\nthey do not indicate malfunc\n\u2013 The \u201cN\u201d indicator will\ndepress brake pedal i\ncome on and a warning\npulse sound) will sound\nfollowing cases occur;\n\u2013 If you shift the gearshi\nthe \u201cN\u201d to the \u201cD\u201d pos\ndepressing the brake ped\n\u2013 If the system is unable t\ning You should depress\npedal and shift the gear\n\u201cN\u201d position, then shift to \u201c\n3) Release the parking brak\npedal.\n4) Depress the accelerator pe\n5-29 HICLE\nngaged even\ner has been\n\u201cD\u201d position,\ning automati-\ne time, noise\nars, and shift-\nur. However,\nction.\nl flash, the\nindicator will\nbuzzer (long\nif any of the\nift lever from\nsition without\ndal\nto re-try shift-\ns the brake\nrshift lever to\n\u201cD\u201d again.\nke and brake\nedal slowly. 55TH0-74E"},167{"page_number": 213, "page_text": "Starting off on an uphill/d\nUphill\n1) Apply the parking brake f\nthe vehicle does not roll ba\n2) Shift the gearshift lever to\ntion while depressing the\nMake sure that the gear po\ntor in the instrumental clu\n1st gear.\n3) Release the brake pedal\nthe accelerator pedal gr\nwhen the vehicle starts\nrelease the parking brake\nthe accelerator pedal to sta downhill: Downhill U\n1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the\nU\ngearshift lever to the \u201cD\u201d position. Make\nsure that the gear is in 1st by checking\nthe gear position indicator.\n2) Release the brake pedal and depress\nthe accelerator pedal slowly. Even if the\naccelerator pedal is not depressed, the\nfirmly so that clutch will be engaged when the vehicle\nackwards. speed increases.\nthe \u201cD\u201d posi- Using engine braking:\nbrake pedal. When driving on a downhill slope, down-\nosition indica- shifting is recommended. So you can use\nuster displays engine braking.\nBy placing the gearshift lever in the \u201cM\u201d\nP\nand depress position, the Manual (M) mode is selected,\na\nradually, and and you can shift to a lower gear manually.\na\ns to move, For details of downshift operation, refer to\ni\nand depress \u201cUpshift and downshift\u201d in the \u201cManual (M)\n5\nart off. mode\u201d.\nManual (M) mode\nThe gears are not shifted automatically. To\nshift the transmission, the driver must\noperate the gearshift lever to the \u201c+\u201d or \u201c\u2013\u201d\ndirection.\nNOTE:When the vehicle is slowed down in\nManual mode the gears are shifted down\nautomatically only when the engine speed\nis very low.\nAs for conventional manual transmission\nvehicles, releasing the accelerator pedal a\nlittle may help the transmission to shift\nsmoothly. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nUpshift and downshift:\nUpshifting\n56RH00309\nPull the gearshift lever to the \u201c+\u201d direction\nand release it. Every time the lever is oper-\nated, the transmission is upshifting 1 step\nin the order of 1st \uf0ae\uf0202nd \uf0ae\uf0203rd \uf0ae\uf0204th \uf0ae\n5th gear.\n76MH0A059\n5-30\n55TH0-74E"},168{"page_number": 214, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nDownshifting\nand release it. Every time the\nated, the transmission is do\nthe order 5th \uf0ae\uf0204th \uf0ae\uf0203rd \uf0ae\ngear.\nThe gear position is displayed\nposition indicator. The gear po\ntor shows the transmission g\nBefore starting off, always\ntransmission is engaged in 1\ngear and gear position indicato\nthe intended gear, then depre\n5-31 HICLE\nerator pedal. It is possible to start vehicle\nin 2nd gear using manual mode, from stop\ncondition.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 Always use 1st gear while starting off an\nuphill slope otherwise you can damage\nthe clutch.\n\u2022 To downshift smoothly, the engine runs\nfast in some cases. This is done inten-\ntionally by the system and is not mal-\nfunction.\n\u2022 When driving down a hill, downshift and\nuse the engine braking appropriately. If\nnecessary, continuous downshifting is\npossible. However, if downshifting more\nlever is oper- than 3 steps, gear shifting will take more\nownshifted in time.\n\uf0ae\uf0202nd \uf0ae\uf0201st \u2022 When the gear is shifting, a noise can be\nheard in some case. This is not malfunc-\ntion.\n76MH0A061\nd on the gear\nosition indica-\ngear position.\nmake sure\n1st or reverse\nor is showing\ness the accel- 55TH0-74E"},169{"page_number": 215, "page_text": " Starting off: 3\n1) Start the engine as instructed in \u201cStart-\ning the engine\u201d in this section.\n2) With your foot on the brake pedal, shift\nthe gearshift lever to the \u201cM\u201d position.\nWhen the gearshift lever is shifted to\nthe \u201cM\u201d position, the gear will be shifted\nto 1st. Before starting off, always make\nsure that the intended gear is engaged\nby checking the gear position indicator,\nthen depress the accelerator pedal.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If 1st gear cannot be engaged even\nthough the gearshift lever has been\nshifted from the \u201cN\u201d to the \u201cM\u201d position,\nthe system will re-try shifting automati-\ncally.This will take some time, noise may\nbe heard from the gears, and shifting\ngear shock may occur. However, they do\nnot indicate malfunction.\n\u2022 The \u201cN\u201d indicator will flash, the depress\nbrake pedal indicator will come on and a\nwarning buzzer (long pulse sound) will\nsound if any of the following cases\noccur;\n\u2013 If you shift the gearshift lever from the\n\u201cN\u201d to the \u201cM\u201d position without\ndepressing the brake pedal.\n\u2013 If the system is unable to re-try shift-\ning.\nYou should depress the brake pedal and\nshift the gearshift lever to \u201cN\u201d position, then\nshift to \u201cM\u201d position again a few seconds\nlater. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n3) Release the parking brake and brake\npedal. Depress the accelerator pedal\nslowly for smooth starting.\n5-32\n55TH0-74E"},170{"page_number": 216, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nStarting off on an uphill/d\nslope:\nUphill\n1) Apply the parking brake f\nthe vehicle does not roll ba\n2) Shift the gearshift lever to\ntion while depressing the\nMake sure that the gear po\ntor in the instrumental clu\n1st gear.\n3) Release the brake pedal\nthe accelerator pedal gr\nwhen the vehicle starts\nrelease the parking brake\nthe accelerator pedal to sta\n5-33 HICLE\ndownhill Downhill N\n1) Depress the brake pedal and shift the \u2022\ngearshift lever to the \u201cM\u201d position.\nMake sure the gear position indicator to\nfirmly so that\nmake sure that the gear is in 1st.\nackwards.\n2) Release the brake pedal and depress\nthe \u201cM\u201d posi-\nthe accelerator pedal slowly. Even\nbrake pedal.\nthough the accelerator pedal is not\nosition indica-\ndepressed, the clutch will be engaged\nuster displays\nwhen the vehicle speed increases. \u2022\nand depress\nBacking up\nradually, and\nAfter the vehicle has stopped completely,\ns to move, depress the brake pedal and shift the gear-\nand depress\nshift lever to the \u201cR\u201d position. Depress the\nart off.\naccelerator pedal slowly as when starting\noff in 1st gear. Before backing up, make\nsure that reverse gear is selected by\nchecking the gear position indicator.\n\u2022\n76MH0A062 NOTE:\n\u2022 If reverse gear cannot be engaged even\nthough the gearshift lever has been\nshifted from the \u201cN\u201d to the \u201cR\u201d position,\nthe system will re-try shifting automati-\ncally.This will take some time, noise may\nbe heard from the gears, and shifting\ngear shock may occur. However, they do\nnot indicate malfunction.\n\u2022 The \u201cN\u201d indicator will flash, the depress\nbrake pedal indicator will come on and a\nwarning buzzer (long pulse sound) will\nsound if any of the following cases\noccur;\n\u2013 If you shift the gearshift lever from the\n\u201cN\u201d to the \u201cR\u201d position without depress-\ning the brake pedal.\n\u2013 If the system is unable to re-try shift-\ning.\nYou should depress the brake pedal and\nshift the gearshift lever to \u201cN\u201d position,\nthen shift to \u201cR\u201d position again a few sec-\nonds later.\n\u2022 The system will not allow shifting to the\n\u201cR\u201d position if the vehicle speed is over\nabout 3 km/h. If the gearshift lever is\noperated under this condition, the \u201cN\u201d\nindicator in the instrument cluster will\nblink. However, when the vehicle speed\ndrops below about 3 km/h, the gear will\nbe shifted to reverse. Make sure that the\nvehicle has stopped completely before\nshifting to the \u201cR\u201d position.\n55TH0-74E"},171{"page_number": 217, "page_text": "Stopping\nThe vehicle can be stopped b\nthe brake pedal regardless\nposition. This is because the c\nmatically disengaged to preve\nfrom stopping.\n\u2022 If the gearshift lever is in the\nthe gear will be downshifted\nthe vehicle stops.\n\u2022 If the gearshift lever is in t\ntion, the gear will be automa\nshifted to 1st when the\nstopped. by depressing\nof the gear\nclutch is auto-\nent the engine\ne \u201cD\u201d position,\nd to 1st when\nthe \u201cM\u201d posi-\natically down-\ne vehicle is OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-34\n55TH0-74E"},172{"page_number": 218, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nParking\nUnlike an automatic transm\nGear Shift does not have a p\ntion. The vehicle can be par\ngearshift lever at \u201cD\u201d or \u201c\nRemember, even though the\nis in gear, you must set the p\nfirmly. Park the vehicle w\nengaged.\n1) Apply the parking brake firm\n2) While depressing the brak\nthe gearshift lever to the \u201cR\na downhill slope, and to the\nin the drive (D) mode or the\nin the manual (M) mode\nslope and confirm the gea\nchecking the gear position\n3) Stop the engine.\n4) In the case of uphill/dow\nrelease the parking brake\npedal slowly in order to ch\nis engaged.\n5) After check the vehicle sto\ngear engaged, Apply the p\nand the brake pedal firmly\n6) Get out of the vehicle and\nunder the wheels.\nWhen you return to your vehic\nremember to remove the whee\nNOTE:\n\u2022 After Ignition is OFF , the\ntransmission does not cha\nyou shift the gearshift lever\ntion with or without b\n5-35 HICLE\npressed.Always shift the gearshift lever P\nmission, Auto before stopping the engine. D\nparking posi- \u2022 Check the transmission gear position by s\nrked with the looking at the gear position indicator, e\n\u201cR\u201d position. then turn the ignition switch to \u201cLOCK\u201d t\ntransmission position or press the engine switch to \u201c\nparking brake change the ignition mode to \u201cLOCK\u201d\nwith a gear (OFF), to stop the engine. Release the W\nbrake pedal after a few seconds. A\nmly. t\nke pedal, shift\nR\u201d position on W\ne 1st position \u2022\ne \u201cM\u201d position\non an uphill \u2022\nar position by\nindicator.\nwnhill slope,\ne and brake\nheck the gear\nopped by the\nparking brake\nagain.\nd put chocks\n\u2022\ncle, you must\nel chocks.\ne gear in the\nange even if\nr in any posi-\nbrake pedal Parking cancel\nDepress the brake pedal, turn the ignition\nswitch to the \u201cON\u201d position or press the\nengine switch to change the ignition mode\nto \u201cON\u201d, and shift the gearshift lever to the\n\u201cN\u201d position. The gear will be disengaged.\nWarning functions\nA warning buzzer will sound or the indica-\ntor will blink under the following conditions.\nWarning buzzer\n\u2022 The clutch is heated due to excessive\nload.\n\u2022 The creeping function is being activated\nfor a long period of time.\n\u2022 The ignition switch is turned to \u201cLOCK\u201d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed\nto change the ignition mode to \u201cLOCK\u201d\n(OFF) with the gear in 2nd, 3rd, 4th or\n5th. In this case, turn the ignition switch\nto \u201cON\u201d position or press the engine\nswitch to change the ignition mode to\n\u201cON\u201d, and shift the gearshift lever in the\n\u201cN\u201d position, shift it to the \u201cD\u201d or \u201cM\u201d or\n\u201cR\u201d position, then turn the ignition switch\n55TH0-74E"},173{"page_number": 219, "page_text": "to \u201cLOCK\u201d position or pres\nswitch to change the ig\n\u201cLOCK\u201d (OFF).\n\u2022 During a stop, if the driv\nopened with the gearshift\n\u201cR\u201d, \u201cD\u201d or \u201cM\u201d position whil\nis running and brake peda\nfor some time, gear is disen\nmatically for safety.\n\u201cN\u201d indicator blinking\nWhen the gear indicator lam\nyou should depress the brak\nshift the gearshift lever to \u201cN\u201d\n\u201c1\u201d indicator blinking\nWhen the gear indicator lam\nyou should depress the brak\nshift the gearshift lever to \u201cN\u201d p\nshift to \u201cD\u201d or \u201cM\u201d position aga\nonds later.\n\u201cR\u201d indicator blinking\nWhen the gear indicator lam\nyou should depress the brak\nshift the gearshift lever to \u201cN\u201d p\nshift to \u201cR\u201d position again a\nlater. ss th\ngnitio\nver\u2019s\nlev\nle th\nal is\nnga\nmp b\nke p\npos\nmp blinks \u201c1\u201d,\nke pedal and \u2022 When the gearshift lever is in a position\nposition, then other than \u201cN\u201d (Neutral).\nain a few sec- The electronic control system monitors\ndriving condition (such as vehicle speed\nand/or engine revolution), and it recom-\nmends gearshift for your driving with indi-\nmp blinks \u201cR\u201d, cations on display.\nke pedal and\nIf UP/DOWN arrow and the gear position\nposition, then\nother than currently selected are indicated\nfew seconds\non the display while driving, we recom-\nmend you to shift up or down the gear to\nindicated position. It is the optimal gear\nposition for a driving condition that reduces\nthe over revolution and stress to the\nengine, and improves fuel consumption. To drive safe, do not gaze the gear-\nshift indicator, pay attention to your\ndriving situation and shift up or down\nif necessary.\n5-36\n55TH0-74E"},174{"page_number": 220, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The gearshift indicator is no\n\u2022 If you depress the clutch pe\n\u2022 In ordinary driving, UP arrow\n\u2022 The indication of gearshift in\ncle speed and engine revolu\n\u2022 If ESP\u00ae system is working, t\nExample of the gearshift ind\n5-37 HICLE\not indicated when the gear position is in \u201cN\u201d (Neutral).\nedal while UP/DOWN arrow is indicated, the indication will disapp\nw will disappear when you release your foot from the accelerator\nndicator timing may differ depending on the vehicle condition and\nution.\nthe gear shift indicator will disappear temporarily.\ndicator pear.\nr pedal.\nd/or driving situation even in the same vehi-\n55TH0-74E"},175{"page_number": 221, "page_text": "SHVS (Smart Hybrid\nby Suzuki) (for K10C\n(If Equipped)\nSHVS has an Integrated Start\n(ISG) instead of conventional\nget a better fuel consumption.\nIntegrated Starter Generator (I\nerator which incorporates a mo\nThe ISG has the following 3 fu\n\u2022 Deceleration energy regen\ntion\n\u2022 Engine power assist functio\n\u2022 Starter motor function Vehicle Deceleration Energy Regenerating E\nFunction\nengine)\nter Generator\nl generator to\n.\nISG) is a gen-\notor function.\nunctions.\nnerating func- 55TB507\nWhile decelerating your vehicle, the ISG\non generates electricity without engine power.\nThis reduces engine loads and improves W\nfuel consumption. e\nWhile decelerating your vehicle, decelera- l\nl\ntion energy regenerating function will be\nactivated when the following conditions are\nW\nsatisfied.\ne\n\u2022 Gearshift lever is not in \u201cN\u201d (Neutral).\no\n\u2022 Clutch pedal is not depressed.\nb\n\u2022 Inside temperature of lead-acid battery\nd\nis in normal condition.\n\u2022 Lithium-ion battery is not fully charged and\n\u2022\ninside temperature is in normal condition.\netc.\n\u2022\nNOTE:\n\u2022\nThe deceleration energy regenerating\nfunction may not work depending on vehi- \u2022\ncle conditions. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nEngine Power Assist Function\n55TB508\nWhile the vehicle is running, ISG assists\nengine power as a motor in the following\nlimited condition. This reduces engine\nloads and improves fuel consumption.\nWhile the vehicle is running with the\nengine speed at approximately 3900 rpm\nor less, engine power assist function will\nbe activated when all of the following con-\nditions are satisfied.\n\u2022 SHVS system and ENG A-STOP system\nare working properly. (ENG A-STOP\nOFF indicator light is not blinking.)\n\u2022 Clutch pedal is not depressed.\n\u2022 ESP\u00ae is not activated.\n\u2022 Accelerator pedal is excessively\ndepressed.\n5-38\n55TH0-74E"},176{"page_number": 222, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n\u2022 Lead-acid battery and lith\ntery are fully charged and\ntemperature is in normal con\n\u2022 Engine coolant temperature\ncondition.\n\u2022 ISG inside temperature is in\ndition.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The engine power assist f\nnot work depending on ve\ntions.\n\u2022 The engine power assist f\nnot work while the battery\nbeing checked right after\nstart, and so on.\n\u2022 The subjective feeling of the\nhead lamp illumination and\nspeed is likely to be differen\ncle take off, deceleration e\neration function and engine\nfunction operation.\n5-39 HICLE\nhium-ion bat-\nd each inside\nndition.\ne is in normal\nn normal con-\nfunction may\nehicle condi-\nfunction may\ny capacity is\nr the engine\ne horn sound,\nAfter the engine auto stop by the ENG N\nd nt dA u/C rin gb l vo ew he ir - A-STOP system, the engine will be T\nenergy regen- restarted using a cranking power of the t\nISG. f\npower assist\nb\nThe starting with the ISG is quiet com- p\npared with starting by the conventional A\nstarter motor. t\ns\nNOTE: b\nWhen you restart the engine by pushing\nthe engine switch, the conventional starter\nmotor is used and you will hear a gear\nengagement sound. NOTE:\nThe indicator gives an approximate indica-\ntion. The indication may be delayed or dif-\nfer from the actual charge of the lithium-ion\nbattery under certain conditions, for exam-\nple, when the outside temperature is low.\nAlso, the minimum segment is 1 bar and\nthe bar will never be 0. Even when 1 bar is\nshown, the battery level may be close to\nbe flat.\n55TH0-74E"},177{"page_number": 223, "page_text": "Deceleration Energy Reg\nIndicator Light\nWhen the deceleration energ\ning function is working, the\nenergy regenerating indicat\ncomes on.\nNOTE:\nIf the gearshift lever is in the\nposition, this light does not co generating ENG A-STOP System (Engine Auto\nStop Start System) (for K12N\nngine) (if equipped)\nhe ENG A-STOP system (engine auto\ntop start system) automatically stops the\nngine while waiting briefly at a traffic light,\ntc., and automatically restarts the engine\nfterward. This system helps reduce emis-\nions, improve fuel consumption and lower\nngine noise.\nhis system stops the engine temporarily\nnder specific conditions. Before parking\nhe vehicle for an extended period of time\nr leaving the vehicle, properly apply the\narking brake and stop the engine with the\nngine switch.\n74TB05001\ngy regenerat- Once the specific conditions are met, the\nengine will stop automatically after the\ndeceleration\nvehicle has stopped. However, the engine\ntor light (1)\nwill not be stopped automatically until con-\nfirmation of the system function is finished.\nNOTE:\n\u201cN\u201d (Neutral)\nIf your vehicle is equipped with automatic\nome on.\nheating and air conditioning system, you\ncan change the automatic engine stop\ncondition via the information display. Refer\nto \u201cInformation display\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT\nCLUSTER\u201d section. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-40\n55TH0-74E"},178{"page_number": 224, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n5-41 HICLE\nAutomatic Stopping / Restarting of\nthe Engine\nManual transmission vehicle F\nt\n1) With the brake pedal depressed, decel-\nerate the vehicle.\nN\nD\ne\n55TB5016\nt\n2) After the vehicle has stopped with the\n\u2022\nclutch pedal depressed and the gear-\nshift lever shifted to \u201cN\u201d, and then\nrelease the clutch pedal, the engine will\nstop automatically.\n\u2022\nThe ENG A-STOP indicator light (green)\n(1) will come on.\n\u2022 The ENG A-STOP system will not stop\nthe engine automatically if all the auto-\nmatic engine stop conditions are not\nmet. For details, refer to \u201cAutomatic N\nengine stop conditions\u201d in this section. F\n\u2022 During the automatic engine stop, the e\nengine may shut down, accompanied by t an interior buzzer or restarted, to ensure\nsafety.\nFor details, refer to \u201cPoints to note during\nthe automatic engine stop\u201d in this section.\nNOTE:\nDuring the automatic engine stop, electric\nequipment will be in the following condi-\ntions:\n\u2022 The audio and other electrical compo-\nnent can be used during the automatic\nengine stop, but the air conditioner will\nswitch to the fan mode.\n\u2022 If the vehicle is equipped with automatic\nheating and air conditioning system, the\nfan speed will be limited during the auto-\nmatic engine stop (only in the auto con-\ntrol mode) to keep the cabin air-\nconditioned for a longer time.\nNOTE:\nFor manual transmission vehicles, if the\nengine stalled by a rapid clutch operation,\nthe engine will restart with the gear posi-\n55TH0-74E"},179{"page_number": 225, "page_text": "tioned \u201cN\u201d (neutral) and the\ndepressed.\n3) Depressing the clutch ped\nthe engine and ENG A-ST\nlight (green) (1) will go off.\nWhile the engine is stopped a\ndepressing the clutch pedal w\nengine consuming fuel. There\neconomy, it is recommended\nthe clutch pedal just before\nstart.\n\u2022 Without depressing the clut\nengine may restart automa\nautomatic engine restart co\nmet. For details, refer to\nengine restart conditions\u201d in clutch pedal Auto Gear Shift vehicle F\nt\n1) With the brake pedal depressed, stop\nthe vehicle.\nN\nD\ne\nt\n\u2022\n\u2022\n55TB5017\ndal will restart\n55TB5018\nTOP indicator\n2) While depressing the brake pedal,\nplace the gearshift lever in \u201cD\u201d or \u201cN\u201d\nautomatically,\nposition. \u201cENG A-STOP\u201d indicator light\nwill restart the\n(green) (1) in the instrument cluster will\nefore, for fuel\nilluminate and the engine will stop auto-\nd to depress\nmatically.\ne the vehicle\n\u2022 The ENG A-STOP system will not stop\ntch pedal, the the engine automatically if all the auto-\natically if the matic engine stop conditions are not\nonditions are met. For details, refer to \u201cAutomatic\no \u201cAutomatic engine stop conditions\u201d in this section.\nn this section. \u2022 During the automatic engine stop, the\nengine may shut down, accompanied by\nan interior buzzer or restarted, to ensure 3\nsafety. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nFor details, refer to \u201cPoints to note during\nthe automatic engine stop\u201d in this section.\nNOTE:\nDuring the automatic engine stop, electric\nequipment will be in the following condi-\ntions:\n\u2022 The audio and other electrical compo-\nnent can be used during the automatic\nengine stop, but the air conditioner will\nswitch to the fan mode.\n\u2022 If the vehicle is equipped with automatic\nheating and air conditioning system, the\nfan speed will be limited during the auto-\nmatic engine stop (only in the auto con-\ntrol mode) to keep the cabin air-\nconditioned for a longer time.\n55TB5019\n3) Remove your foot from the brake pedal.\n\u201cENG A-STOP\u201d indicator light (green)\n(1) in the instrument cluster will be\n5-42\n55TH0-74E"},180{"page_number": 226, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nturned off and the engine\nautomatically.\nWhen restarting the engine, y\nvent the vehicle from creepin\nrolling downward on an uph\nkeeping force on the brake p\nrarily.\nNOTE:\nWhen the engine is restarte\ncally, the following conditio\nfound as the hill hold contro\nequipped) is activated, but t\nmalfunction.\n\u2022 You may hear a sound from\nroom.\n\u2022 As brake pedal becomes h\nbe difficult for you to depres\nNOTE:\nWhen the engine does not res\nically when the brake pedal is\ninterior buzzer will sound and\nwill come out of the automatic\nmode and shut down. The E\nindicator light (green) will go o\nThe engine is not stopped aut\nyou stop without depressing th\npedal, for example, by using e\nbraking.\n5-43 HICLE\ne will restart\nyou can pre-\nng ahead and\nhill slope, by\npedal tempo-\ned automati-\nons may be\nol system (if\nthis is not a\nm the engine\nheavy, it may\nss it.\nstart automat-\ns released, an\nd the engine\nc engine stop\nENG A-STOP\noff.\ntomatically if\nhe brake\nengine 55TH0-74E"},181{"page_number": 227, "page_text": "Precautions of When the\nNOTE:\nThe following indicator lights in\nMalfunction indicator light, ele Engine is Stopped Automatically\nn the instrument cluster do not come on when the engine is stop\nectric power steering light, oil pressure light, charging light OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\npped automatically.\n5-44\n55TH0-74E"},182{"page_number": 228, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nOperating Conditions of E\nStandby conditions\nIf all of the following conditions\nWhen the engine is started*\n*:If the engine is started acc\nstandby conditions are not m\nWhen driving\n#1: If the vehicle has not been\nperiod of time while the en\nis achieved.\n#2: If any of the warning and\n5-45 HICLE\nENG A-STOP System\ns are met while driving, the automatic engine stop will be permitt\n*\ncording to the procedures for the Jump-starting Instructions i\nmet.\nn in use for an extended period of time or the audio or other elect\nngine was stopped, the battery may have discharged and it may\nindicator lights affecting the ENG A-STOP system come on, the ted.\nin \u201cEMERGENCY SERVICE\u201d section, the\ntrical component was used for an extended\ny take some time before the standby mode\nengine will not be stopped automatically.\n55TH0-74E"},183{"page_number": 229, "page_text": "Conditions to stop the engin\nIf all of the following conditio\nstopped and the engine will st\n#: The engine may not be st\nThe engine may not stop\nIn this case, when the bra\nThe driver can operate wh ne automatically\nons, the ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) in the instrument\ntop automatically.\ntopped automatically if the brake pedal was depressed lightly or\nautomatically when the brake pedal is depressed lightly.\nake pedal is depressed additionally, the engine may stop automa\nhether the engine stops automatically or not depending on how h OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\ncluster will illuminate when the vehicle is\nstrongly.\natically.\nhard the brake pedal is pressed.\n5-46\n55TH0-74E"},184{"page_number": 230, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nConditions to restart the eng\nIf any of the following vehicle\nrestarted automatically and th\n#: The ENG A-STOP indicator\n5-47 HICLE\ngine automatically\ne conditions occur or operations are performed while the engin\nhe ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) goes off.\nr light (green) will blink and then go off ne is stopped automatically, the engine is\n55TH0-74E"},185{"page_number": 231, "page_text": "ENG A-STOP OFF Switch\nThe ENG A-STOP system ca\nvated.\n\u2022 To deactivate the system, pr\nA-STOP OFF switch (1) to\nA-STOP OFF light (2).\n\u2022 To activate the system once\nthe switch (1) again to turn o\ntor.\n\u2022 Every time the engine is sto\nally, the system is enabled a\nENG A-STOP OFF light (2)\nNOTE:\nPressing the ENG A-STOP OF\nduring the automatic engin\nrestart the engine automatic\nENG A-STOP OFF light (2) wi h ENG A-STOP OFF Indicator Light N\nI\nan be deacti- \u2022 When you push the ENG A-STOP OFF\nh\nswitch, this light comes on.\nA\ns\n56RM03012\n\u2022 The ENG A-STOP OFF indicator light\n(orange) in the speedometer comes on\nor blinks in the following cases as well,\nand not only to warn you that the ENG\nA-STOP system is deactivated. If it\nblinks, have the vehicle serviced by an\nauthorized SUZUKI dealer or a qualified\n0 workshop.\nress the ENG \u2013 If the system is operating normally\nturn on ENG when the engine switch is pressed to\nchange the ignition mode to ON, the\ne again, press indicator light comes on for approxi-\noff the indica- mately 2 seconds, then goes off.\n\u2013 If there is something wrong with the\nopped manu- system, or if it is time to replace the\nagain and the engine component (starter motor) or\ngoes off. the lead-acid battery, the indicator light\nwill blink when the engine switch is\nFF switch (1) pressed to change the ignition mode\nne stop will to ON. (The ENG A-STOP system will\ncally and the not work properly.)\nill come on. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\nIf the indicator light blinks when the engine\nhas stopped automatically by the ENG\nASTOP system, the engine may restart or\nstall.\n5-48\n55TH0-74E"},186{"page_number": 232, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nInformation Message (if e\nThe information display shows\n5-49 HICLE\nequipped)\ns the messages to let you know certain problems of the ENG A-S STOP system.\n55TH0-74E"},187{"page_number": 233, "page_text": "  OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-50\n55TH0-74E"},188{"page_number": 234, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n5-51 HICLE 55TH0-74E"},189{"page_number": 235, "page_text": "ENG A-STOP System\nAuto Stop Start Syste\nK10C engine) (if equi\nThe ENG A-STOP system (\nstop start system) automatica\nengine while waiting briefly at\netc., and automatically restart\nafterward. This system helps\nsions, improve fuel consumpti\nengine noise.\nThis system stops the engine\nunder specific conditions. Be\nthe vehicle for an extended p\nor leaving the vehicle, prope\nparking brake and stop the en\nengine switch.\nOnce the specific conditions\nengine will stop automatica\nvehicle has stopped. Howeve\nwill not be stopped automatica\nfirmation of the system functio\nNOTE:\nIf your vehicle is equipped with\nconditioning system, you can\nautomatic engine stop cond\ninformation display. Refer to\ndisplay\u201d in \u201cBEFORE DRIVING m (Engine\nem) (for\nipped)\n(engine auto\nally stops the\na traffic light,\nts the engine\nreduce emis-\nion and lower\ne temporarily\nefore parking\nperiod of time\nerly apply the\nngine with the\nare met, the\nally after the\ner, the engine\nally until con-\non is finished.\nh the auto air\nn change the\ndition via the\n\u201cInformation\nG\u201d section. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-52\n55TH0-74E"},190{"page_number": 236, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nLithium-ion Battery\n((11))\n((22))\n(1)Battery (lead-acid battery\n(2)Lithium-ion battery\nThis lithium-ion battery is use\nfor the vehicle equipped with\nlocated below the front left sid\n\u2022 Just like a battery (lead-acid\nlithium-ion battery also disc\nually.\nTo prevent the lithium-ion\ndying, you must charge th\nbattery by driving continu\nleast 30 minutes once a mo\n\u2022 The lithium-ion battery is m\nfree.\n\u2022 To replace or dispose of th\nbattery, consult a Maruti S\nrized workshop.\n5-53 HICLE\nA\nt\nM\n1\n68PM00368\ny)\ned exclusively\nh SHVS, and 2\nde seat.\nd battery), the\ncharges grad-\nbattery from\nhe lithium-ion\nuously for at\nonth.\nmaintenance-\nhe lithium-ion\nSuzuki autho- Automatic Stopping/Restarting of\nthe Engine\nManual transmission vehicles\n1) With the brake pedal depressed, decel-\nerate the vehicle.\n(1)\n55TB5016\n2) After the vehicle has stopped with the\nclutch pedal depressed and the gear-\nshift lever shifted to \u201cN\u201d, and then\nrelease the clutch pedal, the engine will\nstop automatically.\nThe ENG A-STOP indicator light\n(green) (1) will come on.\n\u2022 The ENG A-STOP system will not\nstop the engine automatically if all the\nautomatic engine stop conditions are\nnot met.\nFor details, refer to the section, \u201cOper-\nating Conditions of ENG A-STOP Sys-\ntem\u201d.\n55TH0-74E"},191{"page_number": 237, "page_text": "\u2022 During the automatic eng\nengine may shut down, a\nby an interior buzzer or\nensure safety.\nFor details, refer to the sec\ntions of When the Engin\nAutomatically\u201d.\nNOTE:\nDuring the automatic engine\nequipment will be in the follo\ntions:\n\u2022 The audio and other elect\nnent can be used during th\nengine stop, but the air co\nswitch to the fan mode.\n\u2022 If the vehicle is equipped wi\nconditioner, the fan speed w\nduring the automatic engine\nthe auto control mode) to ke\nair-conditioned for a longer t gine stop, the W\naccompanied d\nrestarted, to e\ne\nction, \u201cPrecau- t\nne is Stopped s\n\u2022\n55TB5017\n3) Regardless of whether the vehicle has N\nstopped or not, depressing the clutch W\npedal will restart the engine and ENG c\nA-STOP indicator light (green) (1) will f\nos wto ip n, g e cle oc nt dri ic - go off. v \u2022\ntrical compo- \u2022\nhe automatic\nonditioner will\nith an auto air\nwill be limited\ne stop (only in\neep the cabin\ntime. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nWhile the engine is stopped automatically,\ndepressing the clutch pedal will restart the\nengine consuming fuel. Therefore, for fuel\neconomy, it is recommended to depress\nthe clutch pedal just before the vehicle\nstart.\n\u2022 Without depressing the clutch pedal, the\nengine may restart automatically if the\nautomatic engine restart conditions are\nmet.\nFor details, refer to the section, \u201cAuto-\nmatic engine restart conditions\u201d.\nFor details, refer to the section \u201cHill Hold\nControl System\u201d.\nNOTE:\nWhen the engine is restarted automati-\ncally, the following conditions may be\nfound as the hill hold control system is acti-\nvated, but this is not a malfunction.\n\u2022 You may hear a sound from the engine\nroom.\n\u2022 As brake pedal becomes heavy, it may\nbe difficult for you to depress it.\n5-54\n55TH0-74E"},192{"page_number": 238, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nAutomatic transmission veh\n1) Depress the brake pedal t\nwhile the gearshift lever i\nposition will automaticall\nengine before the vehicle\n(approximately 9 km/h or\nsame time, the ENG A-ST\nlight (green) will remain on.\n\u2022 The engine is not stopp\ncally if all of the condition\nengine automatically a\neven if the brake peda\ndown to decelerate.\nFor details on the conditi\nmatically stopping the en\n\u201cConditions to Stop the\nmatically\u201d in this section.\n\u2022 To ensure safety when t\nstopped automatically,\nbuzzer may sound and\nwill stall, or the engi\nrestarted.\n5-55 HICLE\nhicles NOTE: 2\nto decelerate \u2022 The engine is not stopped automatically\nis in the \u201cD\u201d when decelerating without depressing\nly stop the the brake pedal, for example, by using\ne is stopped engine braking.\nless). At the \u2022 The engine may be stopped automati-\nTOP indicator cally when the vehicle is stopped, even if\n. the engine is not stopped automatically\nped automati- before stopping the vehicle (approxi-\nns to stop the mately 9 km/h or less).\nare not met, \u2022 Electrical components, such as the navi-\nal is pressed\ngation system or audio system, can be\nused while the engine has been stopped\nions for auto- automatically, however, the air condi-\nngine, refer to tioner switches to the ventilation posi-\nEngine Auto-\ntion.\n.\nFor the automatic heating and air condi-\nthe engine is\ntioning system, airflow is limited (only\nthe interior\nd the engine under automatic operation) when the\nine may be engine is stopped automatically, in order to\nimprove the cooling and heating perfor-\nmance.\nN\nT\nw\n74TB05035 2) When you remove your foot from the\nbrake pedal, regardless of whether it is\nbefore or after stopping the vehicle, the\nengine is restarted and the ENG A-STOP\nindicator light (green) goes off.\n\u2022 The engine is restarted automatically\nif the conditions to restart the engine\nautomatically are met, even if the\nbrake pedal is depressed.\nFor details on the conditions for auto-\nmatically restarting the engine, refer\nto \u201cConditions to Restart the Engine\nAutomatically\u201d in this section.\n74TB05036\nNOTE:\nThe hill hold control system is activated\nwhen the engine is restarted automatically.\n55TH0-74E"},193{"page_number": 239, "page_text": "Precautions of When the Engine is Stopped Automatically OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-56\n55TH0-74E"},194{"page_number": 240, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nNOTE:\nThe following indicator lights in\n\u2022 Malfunction indicator light, e\n5-57 HICLE\nn the instrument cluster do not come on when the engine is stop\nelectric power steering light, oil pressure light, charging light pped automatically.\n55TH0-74E"},195{"page_number": 241, "page_text": "Operating Conditions of E\nStandby conditions\nIf all of the following conditions\n#1: If the battery is discharged\ngation system or audio sy\ncan be in standby.\n#2: If any of the warning and\n#3: The system will be in stan\nwhen the vehicle is stoppe ENG A-STOP System\ns are met while driving, the automatic engine stop will be permitt\nd, for example, if the vehicle has not been used for a long time o\nystem, have been used for a long time while the engine was stopp\nindicator lights affecting the ENG A-STOP system come on, the\nndby even though the gearshift lever is in \u201cN\u201d position, however\ned, instead of when it is decelerating (approximately 9km/h or le OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nted.\nor electrical components, such as the navi-\nped, it may take some time until the system\nengine will not be stopped automatically.\nr, the engine will be stopped automatically\ness) before stopping.\n5-58\n55TH0-74E"},196{"page_number": 242, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nConditions to stop the engin\nIf all of the following condition\ndecelerating before stopping o\n#: The engine may not be stop\n5-59 HICLE\nne automatically\nns are met while the standby conditions are met, the engine is\nor when the vehicle is stopped.\nopped automatically if the brake pedal was depressed lightly or st stopped automatically when the vehicle is\ntrongly.\n55TH0-74E"},197{"page_number": 243, "page_text": "Conditions to restart the eng\nIf any of the following vehicle\nrestarted automatically and th\n#1: After the ENG A-STOP ind\n#2: Depending on the situation\n#3: The engine may be rest\ndepressed again, the eng gine automatically\ne conditions occur or operations are performed while the engin\nhe ENG A-STOP indicator light (green) goes off.\ndicator light (green) blinks, it goes off. Also, the interior buzzer m\nns of malfunction, it is a normal restart or the restart as #1.\ntarted automatically when the brake pedal is depressed lightly\ngine is stopped automatically and the ENG A-STOP indicator ligh OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nne is stopped automatically, the engine is\nmay sound at the same time.\ny. In this case, when the brake pedal is\nht (green) comes on again.\n5-60\n55TH0-74E"},198{"page_number": 244, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nENG A-STOP OFF Switch\nEquipped)\n(2)\nThe ENG A-STOP system ca\nvated.\n\u2022 To deactivate the system, pr\nA-STOP OFF switch (1) to\nA-STOP OFF light (2).\n\u2022 To activate the system once\nthe switch (1) again to turn o\ntor.\n\u2022 Every time the engine is sto\nally, the system is enabled a\nENG A-STOP OFF light (2)\nNOTE:\nPressing the ENG A-STOP OF\nduring the automatic engin\nrestart the engine automatic\nENG A-STOP OFF light (2) wi\n5-61 HICLE\nh (If ENG A-STOP OFF Light (If\nEquipped)\n(1)\n56RM03012\nThis indicator comes on in the information\ndisplay.\n\u2022 This indicator comes on when the ENG\nA-STOP system is deactivated.\n\u2022 The indicator blinks when the engine\n55TB5020\nswitch is pressed to change the ignition\nan be deacti- mode to ON, if one of the conditions\nlisted below is met.\nress the ENG The ENG A-STOP system or the SHVS\nturn on ENG system does not actuate correctly while\nthe indicator is blinking. Have the system\ne again, press inspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorized\noff the indica- workshop.\n\u2013 There may be something wrong with\nopped manu- the ENG A-STOP system or the SHVS\nagain and the system.\ngoes off. \u2013 An engine component (ISG) or the\nlead-acid battery is due for replace-\nment.\nFF switch (1)\nne stop will NOTE:\ncally and the If the indicator blinks during the automatic\nill come on. engine stop, the engine may shut down 55TH0-74E"},199{"page_number": 245, "page_text": "Information Message\nThe information display shows s the messages to let you know certain problems of the ENG A-S OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nSTOP system.\n5-62\n55TH0-74E"},200{"page_number": 246, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n5-63 HICLE 55TH0-74E"},201{"page_number": 247, "page_text": "Cruise Control (if equ\nThe cruise control system a\nmaintain a steady speed with\nyour foot on the accelerator\ncontrols for operating the c\nsystem are on the steering wh\nYou can use the cruise co\nunder the following conditions\n\u2022 For manual transmission\ngear position is in 3rd, 4th o\n\u2022 For Auto Gear Shift vehicle\nTransmission vehicle, the g\nis in \u201cD\u201d position or the gear\n3rd, 4th or 5th, in the manua\n\u2022 The vehicle speed is abou\nhigher. uipped) Setting Cruising Speed I\nCruise control switch\nallows you to\nhout keeping\nr pedal. The\ncruise control\nheel.\nontrol system\ns:\nvehicle, the\nor 5th.\ne / Automatic\ngearshift lever\nr position is in\nal mode.\nut 40 km/h or\n56RM03017\n(1)Cruise switch\n(2)\u201cCANCEL\u201d switch\n(3)\u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d switch\nInstrument cluster Type A\n52RS30170\n(4)Cruise indicator light\n(5)\u201cSET\u201d indicator light OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nInstrument cluster Type B\n(6)Cruise indicator\n(7)\u201cSET\u201d indicator\n(8)Set speed indication\n5-64\n55TH0-74E"},202{"page_number": 248, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n1) Turn on the cruise contro\npushing cruise switch (1)\ncruise indicator light (4) (fo\ncluster type A), cruise indi\ninstrument cluster type B\nyou can set cruising speed\n2) Accelerate or decelerate to\nspeed.\n3) Push down the \u201cRES +/S\n(3), \u201cSET\u201d indicator light (5\nment cluster type A), \u201cSET\u201d\n(for instrument cluster typ\non. Also, set speed indica\ninstrument cluster type B)\nthe same time. Take your\naccelerator pedal and the s\nbe maintained.\nNOTE:\nEstablished cruising speed ma\ntle from the speed mete\ndepending on the road conditi\n5-65 HICLE\nol system by Changing Speed Temporarily C\n). When the\nWhen the cruising speed is maintained, you U\nor instrument\ncan temporarily accelerate or decelerate. T\nicator (6) (for\na\nB) comes on, To accelerate, depress the accelerator\nt\nd. pedal. When you take your foot off the pedal,\ns\no the desired your vehicle will return to the set speed.\nt\nTo decelerate, depress the brake pedal.\nSET \u2013\u201d switch\n5) (for instru- The set speed will be canceled and \u201cSET\u201d U\nindicator light (5), \u201cSET\u201d indicator (7) will T\n\u201d indicator (7)\ngo off. e\npe B) comes\nTo resume the previously set speed, push p\nation (8) (for\nup the \u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d switch (3) and turn s\ncomes on at\non \u201cSET\u201d indicator light (5), \u201cSET\u201d indicator t\nr foot off the\n(7) again when vehicle speed is above 40\nset speed will\nkm/h. The vehicle will accelerate to the N\npreviously set speed and maintain its W\nspeed. i\ng\nNOTE:\nFor Automatic Transmission vehicle / Auto U\nGear Shift vehicle, when the cruising T\nspeed is maintained, you cannot deceler- r\nate by using the engine brake even if you S\ndownshift from higher gear to 3rd in the s\nmanual mode. s\nTo decelerate while the cruise control is\nT\non, depress the brake pedal or push down\nr\nthe \u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d switch (3).\nS\ns\nay differ a lit-\nr\ner indication\nm\nions. Changing Cruising Speed\nUsing the accelerator pedal\nTo reset at a faster cruising speed, acceler-\nate to the desired speed using the accelera-\ntor pedal and push down the \u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d\nswitch (3). The new speed will be main-\ntained.\nUsing the brake pedal\nTo reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-\nerate to the desired speed using the brake\npedal and push down the \u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d\nswitch (3). The new speed will be main-\ntained.\nNOTE:\nWhen the brake pedal is depressed, \u201cSET\u201d\nindicator light (5), \u201cSET\u201d indicator (7) will\ngo off until you reset the cruising speed.\nUsing \u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d switch\nTo reset at a faster cruising speed, press\nrepeatedly or hold push up the \u201cRES +/\nSET \u2013\u201d switch (3). Vehicle speed will\nsteadily increase. When you release the\nswitch, the new speed will be maintained.\nTo reset at a slower cruising speed, press\nrepeatedly or hold push down the \u201cRES +/\nSET \u2013\u201d switch (3) until the vehicle has\nslowed to the desired speed, and then\nrelease the switch. The new speed will be\nmaintained.\n55TH0-74E"},203{"page_number": 249, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 You can adjust the set spee\nmately 1 km/h by pushing \u201cR\n\u201d switch quickly.\n\u2022 When the current vehicle sp\n10 km/h or more faster tha\nously set speed, the cruising\nnot be decreased even if\nSET\u2013\u201d switch (3) is pushed\n\u2022 When the current vehicle sp\n10 km/h or more slower th\nously set speed, the cruising\nnot be increased even if\nSET\u2013\u201d switch (3) is pushed\nCanceling Cruise Control\n\u201cSET\u201d indicator light (5), \u201cSET\u201d\nwill go off and the cruise co\ncanceled temporarily with t\nconditions:\n\u2022 Push \u201cCANCEL\u201d switch (2).\n\u2022 Depress the brake pedal.\n\u2022 For manual transmission, depr\npedal.\n\u2022 For Auto Gear Shift model, dow\nto 2nd gear in the manual mode.\n\u2022 The vehicle speed falls mor\n20 percent from the set spe\n\u2022 Any time the vehicle speed\n40 km/h.\n\u2022 When the vehicle skids a\nactivated. To resume the previously set speed, push S\ned by approxi- up the \u201cRES +/SET \u2013\u201d switch (3) and turn\n(\nRES+/SET\u2013 on \u201cSET\u201d indicator light (5), \u201cSET\u201d indicator\n(7). The vehicle speed must be above 40\nH\npeed is about km/h when the vehicle is not under the\nan the previ- above conditions. H\ng speed can- m\nthe \u201cRES+/ To turn off the cruise control system, push a\nd down. cruise switch (1) and check that the cruise v\npeed is about indicator light (4), cruise indicator (6) is off.\nhan the previ-\ng speed can- Also, if the malfunction indicator light in the\nthe \u201cRES+/ instrument cluster comes on or blinks, the\nd up. cruise control system will be turned off.\nl NOTE:\n\u201d indicator (7) If you turn off the cruise control system, the\nontrol will be previously set speed in the memory is\nthe following cleared. Reset your cruising speed again.\nress the clutch\nwn-shift from 3rd\n.\nre than about\need.\nd falls below\nand ESP\u00ae is OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nSUZUKI SAFETY SUPPORT\n(if equipped)\nHead-up Display\nHead-up display (HUD) will show the infor-\nmation such us the current vehicle speed\nv\n(1)Display\n(2)Cover\n(3)Light-received surface\n(4)Mirror\n(5)Down switch\n(6)Up switch\n(7)Brightness control switch\n(8)HUD (Head-up display) switch\n5-66\n55TH0-74E"},204{"page_number": 250, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n5-67 HICLE\nN\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022 NOTE:\n\u2022 If you wear your sunglasses, you may\nhave trouble seeing the displayed infor-\nmation. In this case, adjust the bright-\nness or take your sunglasses off.\n\u2022 You may have trouble seeing the dis-\nplayed information in the following\ncases.\n\u2013 On a rainy day or a day with strong\nsunlight\n\u2013 When driving on snowy roads or when\na wet road is shining after the rain\n\u2013 When the headlights from your vehicle\nis reflected to the vehicle in front of\nyou at night\n\u2013 When the position of the vehicle in\nfront of you and the displayed informa-\ntion get overlapped\n\u2013 Depending on the driving posture\n\u2022 Under the very cold condition, the vehi-\ncle speed on the speedometer and the\none on the head-up display may differ a\nlittle.\n\u2022 When the head-up display gets hot, such\nas after parking the vehicle under the\nblazing sun, the displayed information\nmay temporarily become dark for its pro-\ntection. When the head-up display gets\nhotter, the displayed information will\ntemporarily disappear and the message\nwill be shown on the information display\nof the instrument cluster.\n\u2013 When the temperature becomes low,\nthe above condition will be canceled.\nHowever, if the above condition is\n55TH0-74E"},205{"page_number": 251, "page_text": "kept, ask a Maruti Suzuk\nworkshop.\n\u2013 You can turn off the mes\ninformation display in hi\nture by changing the sett\nzation). For details, refe\nMode\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT\nsection.\nActivation of the head-up di\nWhen you press the engine s\nmode and the engine starts,\ndisplay will automatically app\nfollowing information will be\nnecessary.\n(1)Vehicle speed\n(2)Standard display\n(3)Gear position indicator (f\nShift vehicles) (if equippe\n(4)Clock\n(5)Cruise indicator (if equipp ki authorized (6)\u201cSET\u201d indicator (if equipped)\nWhen you press the engine switch to ACC\nssage on the or LOCK (OFF) mode, the head-up display\nigh tempera- will be automatically stored.\nting (customi-\ner to \u201cSetting NOTE: O\nT CLUSTER\u201d \u2022 Even if you stop the engine, the display\nI\nsetting will be stored.\nd\n\u2022 The vehicle speed on the head-up dis-\nc\nisplay play and the one on the speedometer\ns\nmay differ a little.\nswitch to ON\n\u2022 You can turn off a part of the information\nthe head-up N\nby changing the setting (customization).\npear and the I\ndisplayed as o\nOperation of the head-up display\ns\nOperate the head-up display while the d\nvehicle is stopped. You cannot adjust the n\nbrightness and the displayed position while\ndriving. O\ng\nHead-up display operation switch\n55T050750\n(1) (2) (3) (4)\nfor Auto Gear\nHUD\ned)\nped)\n55TB5021 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n(1)Down switch\n(2)Up switch\n(3)Brightness control switch\n(4)HUD (Head-up display) switch\nON / OFF operation of the head-up display\nIf you press and hold the HUD (Head-up\ndisplay) switch (4) with the engine on, you\ncan make the head-up display appear or\nstore.\nNOTE:\nIf you store the head-up display inside by\noperating the HUD (Head-up display)\nswitch and stop the engine, the head-up\ndisplay will not appear automatically on the\nnext engine start.\nON / OFF operation of the intersection\nguidance display (When using Android\nTM 1 2 -\n(5)The intersection guidance display\n(The above image is an example of\nApple CarPlay.)\n5-68\n55TH0-74E"},206{"page_number": 252, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nNOTE:\n\u2022 For ON / OFF operation of\ntion guidance display, yo\nchange the setting on the\ndisplay. For details, refer\nMode\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT\nsection.\n\u2022 The intersection guidance d\nhead-up display and the one\nigation system may differ a\n*1: Android AutoTM may not be\nyour country or region.\nFor details about Android Au\nhttp://support.google.com/a\n*2: Apple CarPlay may not be\nyour country or region.\nFor details about Apple Car\nhttps://www.apple.com/ios/c\nBrightness control\nBrightness of the display will\ncally adjusted depending on t\ning conditions. You can\nbrightness to your preference\nlowing steps.\n1) Press the brightness contro\n2) To make the display bri\n\u201c \u201d of the up switch (2).\ndisplay darker, press \u201c\nswitch (1).\n5-69 HICLE\nthe intersec-\nou need to\ne information\nr to \u201cSetting\nCLUSTER\u201d\ndisplay on the\ne on the nav-\nlittle.\ne available in \u2022 You can adjust brightness of the display \u2022\nfrom \u221210 to +10 (21 levels) by the bright-\nutoTM, refer to ness control switch.\nandroidauto \u2022 Depending on brightness which was\ne available in automatically adjusted, you may not be D\nable to make the display brighter or d\nrPlay, refer to darker. A\ncarplay/ \u2022 Regardless of the driver's seat condi-\ntions, brightness may be automatically W\nchanged in the following conditions. t\n\u2013 When driving in a tunnel or around its m\nbe automati- gateway\nthe surround- \u2013 When driving on a road where there is\nadjust the a structural object over your head\ne by the fol-\nAdjustment of the displayed position\nol switch (3). Press the down switch (1) or up switch (2)\nighter, press to adjust the displayed position of the\n. To make the head-up display.\n\u201d of the down \u2022 You can adjust the displayed position of\nthe head-up display from \u221212 to +12 (25\nlevels) by the up/down switch.\nDisplayed information of the head-up\ndisplay\nActivation / ending of the head-up display\nWhen turn the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d posi-\ntion or you press the engine switch to ON\nmode, the head-up display will automati-\n55TH0-74E"},207{"page_number": 253, "page_text": "Standard display of the head-\nEvery time you press the HU\ndisplay) switch, the displayed\nwill be changed as follows.\n\u2022 The following images are t\nples; they depends on the v\n(1)Vehicle speed\n(2)Instantaneous fuel consu\n(3)Tachometer\nNOTE:\n\u2022 Even if you stop the engine\nsetting will be stored.\n\u2022 The vehicle speed on the\nplay and the one on the s\nmay differ a little. -up display When operating the air conditioner\nUD (Head-up If you operate the air conditioner with\nd information instantaneous fuel consumption, tachome-\ntypical exam-\nvehicle type.\nW\nt\nc\nN\n\u2022\nand the set temperature will be displayed\n\u2022\n55T050800\numption\ne, the display tor, the set temperature will be displayed\nfor a certain time.\nhead-up dis-\nspeedometer OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nWhen you operate the blower speed selec-\ntor, the blower speed will be displayed for a\ncertain time.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When the vehicle speed is displayed in\nstandard display of the head-up display,\nthe air conditioner setting will not be dis-\nplayed.\n\u2022 You can hide the information of air con-\nditioner by the setting mode on the infor-\nmation display. For details, refer to\n\u201cSetting Mode\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT CLUS-\nTER\u201d section.\n5-70\n55TH0-74E"},208{"page_number": 254, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nInterrupt display\nWhen there is the informatio\nDepending on the type of the\n\u2022 The following images are ty\n5-71 HICLE\non to tell you and you press the engine switch to ON mode, t\ndisplay, a buzzer may sound at the same time.\nypical examples; they depends on the vehicle type. the following interrupt display will appear.\n55TH0-74E"},209{"page_number": 255, "page_text": "NOTE:\nTo turn off the intersection gu\nsetting on the information disp uidance display (When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay on i\nplay. For details, refer to \u201cSetting Mode\u201d in \u201cINSTRUMENT CLUS OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\ninfotainment system), you can change the\nSTER\u201d section.\n5-72\n55TH0-74E"},210{"page_number": 256, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n360 View Camera (if equi\nThe 360 view camera is the fu\nusing the front camera, the sid\nto park your vehicle, go by an\ncle.\n\u2022 Use the infotainment system\nCamera positions\n(2)Front camera\n(3)Side camera (under left a\n\u2022 Each camera in the above f\n5-73 HICLE\nipped)\nunction which shows visual image for the surrounding of your v\nde camera (left and right) and the back camera. This helps the dr\noncoming vehicle in a narrow road or start the vehicle with poor\nm which corresponds with the 360 view camera.\nand right outside rearview mirrors)\nfigure is a typical example; the actual equipment depends on the vehicle on the infotainment system screen,\nriver improve visibility when the driver tries\nr visibility for left and right sides of the vehi-\ne vehicle type.\n55TH0-74E"},211{"page_number": 257, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 Rough indication lines of veh\nchecking the safety of the sur hicle width will be displayed more widely, compared with an actual\nrrounding conditions. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nvehicle width. Drive your vehicle by directly\n5-74\n55TH0-74E"},212{"page_number": 258, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nHow to use the 360 view cam\n3D view mode function\nThe 360 view camera will disp\n1) Press the engine switch to\n2) After the opening image wa\n3) For switching the current im\nstopping the rotation of 3D\ntouch the button (2) again.\n5-75 HICLE\nmera\nplay the image of the surroundings with a view from the outside o\nchange the ignition mode to ON.\nas displayed, 3D view mode will be automatically displayed on th\nmage to the image with a different view, touch the image switchin\nD view mode, touch the temporary stop or replay button (2). Fo or the inside of the vehicle.\nhe screen.\n74TB05012\nng button (1) on the screen. For temporarily\nor restarting the rotation of 3D view mode,\n55TH0-74E"},213{"page_number": 259, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 For manual transmission ve\napplied, and the vehicle is s\n\u2022 For Auto Gear Shift vehicle,\nand the vehicle is stopped, y\n\u2022 You can change the display\n\u2022 When you press the camera\nthe procedure below.\n3D view mode \u2192 Press the\n\u2022 When the engine switch is in ehicle, if you press the camera switch (3) when the gearshift le\nstopped, you can display 3D view mode.\n, if you press the camera switch (3) when the gearshift lever is in\nyou can display 3D view mode.\ny screen of 3D view mode by changing the setting.\na switch while the opening image is displayed, 3D view mode wi\ncamera switch \u2192 Change the mode of display \u2192 Press the cam\nn ACC mode, 3D view mode will not be displayed on the screen. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\never is in other than \u201cR\u201d, parking brake is\nn \u201cN\u201d position, the parking brake is applied\nill end. If you display 3D view mode, follow\nmera switch \u2192 End of 3D view mode\n.\n5-76\n55TH0-74E"},214{"page_number": 260, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nchanged as follows:\n5-77 HICLE\nThe 360 view camera will display the image un\nward image. nder the front passenger's seat and the for-\n55TH0-74E"},215{"page_number": 261, "page_text": "\u2022 When you press the camera\n\u2022 Even when you do not press\n\u2013 When 3 minutes passed a\n\u2013 When you operate the info\n\u2013 When the vehicle speed b\n\u2022 When the vehicle speed bec\nWhen the vehicle speed bec\nNOTE:\n\u2022 For manual transmission ve\nother than \u201cR\u201d, parking brak\n\u2022 For Auto Gear Shift vehicle,\ntion, the parking brake is ap\n\u2022 When the engine switch is in a switch, the current image will be changed to the previous imag\ns the camera switch, the current image will be changed to the pr\nafter you press the camera switch\notainment system\nbecomes over about 10 km/h\ncomes over about 10 km/h and you press the camera switch, you\ncomes about 10 km/h or less, the forward image will be displaye\nehicle, you can adjust the image quality and set up the initial di\nke is applied and the vehicle is stopped.\n, you can adjust the image quality and set up the initial display im\npplied and the vehicle is stopped.\nn ACC mode, the camera image will not be displayed. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nge.\nrevious image by the following methods:\nu can display the side image on the screen.\ned on the screen.\nisplay image when the gearshift lever is in\nmage when the gearshift lever is in \u201cN\u201d posi-\n5-78\n55TH0-74E"},216{"page_number": 262, "page_text": "Displaying the backward of\n1) Press the engine switch to\n2) Shift the gearshift lever int\nsetting) will be automatica\n3) Every time you touch the im\nlows: the vehicle (\nchange the ignition mode to ON.\nto \u201cR\u201d (Reverse). \u201cTop image and backward image\u201d (default T\nally displayed. r\nmage switching button (1), the image will be changed as fol-\n(\n55T050370 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n(a)Top image and backward image\n(Default setting)\nThe 360 view camera will display the sur-\nrounding image and the backward image.\n(b)Backward wide image\n0 view camera will display the back-\nmage widely.\ne image and backward image\n60 view camera will display the\nunder the front passenger's seat\ne backward image.\nyou shift the gearshift lever other\nR\u201d, the camera image will return to\nvious one.\n5-79\n55TH0-74E"},217{"page_number": 263, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 The backward image of the\ntem itself is being activated,\n\u2022 For manual transmission ve\nother than \u201cR\u201d, parking brak\n\u2022 For Auto Gear Shift vehicle,\ntion, the parking brake is ap\n\u2022 When the engine switch is in 360 view camera is displayed as the top priority out of all the ima\n, the backward image will not displayed.\nehicle, you can adjust the image quality and set up the initial di\nke is applied and the vehicle is stopped.\n, you can adjust the image quality and set up the initial display im\npplied and the vehicle is stopped.\nn ACC mode, the camera image will not be displayed. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nages. However, when the infotainment sys-\nisplay image when the gearshift lever is in\nmage when the gearshift lever is in \u201cN\u201d posi-\n5-80\n55TH0-74E"},218{"page_number": 264, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nError display on the screen\nWhen there is an abnormality\non the screen.\nConsult a Maruti Suzuki autho\n(1)Error mark of camera sys\n5-81 HICLE\ny in the camera system, the following mark will be displayed\norized workshop to have the camera system inspected.\n74TB05013\nstem 55TH0-74E"},219{"page_number": 265, "page_text": "Front and rear traffic alert\n(1) Detected vehicle\nWhile you park the vehicle in a\nson or a vehicle moves from th\ncamera, the buzzer of detectio\nsound and the support indicato\nfunction informs the driver of\ndepressing the brake pedal.\nWhen you reverse the vehicle\nsensors will be displayed as w\nport indicator (2) for checking (2)\n(1) N\nY\nr\n(3)\n(3)\n55T050390\na parking lot or drive the vehicle at a very low speed, if a per-\nhe outside to the center in the detection area of the 360 view\non (the default setting is in OFF state) from the speaker will\nor (2) for checking left and right directions will come on. This\nf necessity to confirm safety and evasive action such as\ne, the information (3) which is detected by the rear parking\nwell as the interior buzzer of detection sounds and the sup-\nleft and right directions comes on. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\nYou can change the setting of the front and\nrear traffic alert.\n5-82\n55TH0-74E"},220{"page_number": 266, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nExamples which the front an\n**\n**33\n**55\n5-83 HICLE\nnd rear traffic alert does not activate S\nf\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n**22\n**11\n**33 \u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n**44\n59RN05470 Situations where the front and rear traf-\nfic alert does not activate\n\u2022 When a person or a vehicle approaches\nfrom front or straight behind of your vehi-\ncle *1\n\u2022 When a person or a vehicle does not\nmove *2\n\u2022 When a person or a vehicle move from\nthe center to the outside on the screen *3\n\u2022 When you do not park the vehicle in a\nparking lot or you do not drive the vehi-\ncle at a very low speed\n\u2022 When there is a long distance between a\nperson or a vehicle to your vehicle\n\u2022 When a moving object is not displayed\non the screen\n\u2022 When the detected target object overlap\nwith strong light of sunshine and head-\nlights\n\u2022 When there is a big difference of camera\nimage between a bright place and a dark\nplace on the screen\n55TH0-74E"},221{"page_number": 267, "page_text": "\u2022 When a moving object such\ngets across at a high speed\n\u2022 When a camera lens is dirt\n\u2022 When a camera lens is dire\nto light from the sun or head S\nf\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\nsimilar to the background\n\u2022\nh as a bicycle\nd \u2022\nty by spider's\n\u2022\n\u2022\n55T050430 \u2022\nWhen a person or a vehicle moves at a\nhigher place than the space which you\ntry to park your vehicle\nWhen a tailgate is opened\nWhen a strong impact is applied to a\ncamera and its peripheral part and the\ninstalled position of the camera is mis-\nectly exposed\naligned\ndlights\n\u2022 When the detection area is misaligned\nby inclination on the road OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nSituations where the front and rear traf-\nfic alert may activate by chance\n\u2022 When a person or a vehicle steps away\nparallel from your vehicle *5\n\u2022 When a labarum outside of a conve-\nnience store or a street tree swings in\nthe wind\n\u2022 When there is a wall or a shutter which\nhas running wavy pattern, fences, white\nlines, a metal lid such as a grating cover\n\u2022 When the lights from signs, the turn sig-\nnal lights or the reversing lights of a vehi-\ncle or your vehicle are flashing nearby\n\u2022 When waterdrop or white smoke runs on\na camera lens\n\u2022 When the road is wet and shiny or there\nare puddles after the rain\n\u2022 When the brightness is changed by\nshadow of trees or buildings\n\u2022 When your vehicle is severely inclined\n\u2022 When a strong impact is applied to a\ncamera and its peripheral part and the\ninstalled position of the camera is mis-\naligned\n\u2022 When the detection area is misaligned\nby inclination on the road\n5-84\n55TH0-74E"},222{"page_number": 268, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nHow to understand the disp\nThe following guide lines and\nThe guide lines would provide\nT\n\u2022 Each displayed item in the a\n5-85 HICLE\nplayed items on the screen\nbuttons will be displayed on the screen.\ne a rough indication for your driving operations.\nTop image Forward or backward image\nabove figure is a typical example; it depends on the vehicle type. Side image\n55T050510\n.\n55TH0-74E"},223{"page_number": 269, "page_text": "  OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-86\n55TH0-74E"},224{"page_number": 270, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n5-87 HICLE 55TH0-74E"},225{"page_number": 271, "page_text": "  OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n5-88\n55TH0-74E"},226{"page_number": 272, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n*: When the steering wheel is\nnot be displayed.\n\u2022 As each guide line is displa\nyour vehicle is not accuratel\nposition of an obstacle (such\n\u2022 Trapezoidal guide lines for\ndepend on the actual distan\n\u2022 If you modify suspensions o\nplayed.\n\u2022 The buttons on the screen a\n5-89 HICLE\ns in straight position, the top image and the guide line for the cou\nayed towards road surface, the distance from your vehicle to an\nly displayed. Also, as the top image is displayed by processing th\nh as the bumper of the other vehicle) where is higher than the ro\nthe distance and the vehicle width which are displayed on th\nnce and vehicle width.\nor replace a tyre by the undesignated tyre, the guide lines and\nare displayed by pressing. urse of forward/backward movement will\nn obstacle such as the parked vehicle near\nhe image based on a flat road surface, the\noad surface is not accurately displayed.\nhe screen are rough indications and they\nd the top image will not be accurately dis-\n55TH0-74E"},227{"page_number": 273, "page_text": "NOTE:\nWhen you activate the infotain\nfor a while. Or, press a camer\nwhile the screen is displayed.\nIf you cannot operate the butto nment system or there is abnormality on the touch panel, you can\nra switch to go back to the original displayed screen, press a cam\nons by performing the above procedure, Consult a Maruti Suzuk OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nnnot operate the buttons. In this case, wait\nmera switch again and operate the buttons\nki authorized workshop.\n5-90\n55TH0-74E"},228{"page_number": 274, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nDifference between the ca\nand the actual road surface\nThe position and distance wh\nlines on the screen shows var\non the number of passenge\ncapacity, the inclination and\nthe road surface. Directly che\nthe surroundings with your eye\nWhen there is an uphill slo\nmovement direction\nYou will see the guide line for\nin front of the actual distance.\nBackward image (Example):\n(1) (2) (3\nAbout 0.5\nAbout 1.0\nAbout 2.0\n(1)Red, the point which the\nthe distance (about 0.5\nshows\n(2)Yellow, the point which th\nfor the distance (about 1\nshows\n5-91 HICLE\namera image (3)Light blue, the point which the guide W\nline for the distance (about 2.0 m [6.6 v\nhich the guide ft]) shows I\nry depending t\ners, the load When there is an downhill slope on t\nsituation on your movement direction\neck safety of You will see the guide line for the distance E\nes. in the back of the actual distance.\nBackward image (Example):\nope on your\nr the distance\n3)\n5 m (1.6 ft)\n55T050930\n0 m (3.3 ft) (1)Red, the point which the guide line for\nthe distance (about 0.5 m [1.6 ft])\n0 m (6.6 ft)\nshows\n(2)Yellow, the point which the guide line\n74TB05023\nfor the distance (about 1.0 m [3.3 ft])\nguide line for shows\n5 m [1.6 ft]) (3)Light blue, the point which the guide\nI\nline for the distance (about 2.0 m [6.6\nc\nhe guide line ft]) shows\nd\n1.0 m [3.3 ft])\nt\nw\no When there is an steric object near your\nvehicle\nIn this case, the distance from your vehicle\nto the steric object may be different from\nthe actual distance.\nExample 1:\n(1)\n81M50590\nIn the illustration, the guide line for the\ncourse (1) does not touch the body of the\ndisplayed truck. However, if the body of\nthis truck protrudes on the actual course\nwhich your vehicle will go, a collision may\noccur.\n55TH0-74E"},229{"page_number": 275, "page_text": "Example 2:\nIn the illustration, the top imag\nthat there is a little distance b\nvehicle and the body of th\ntruck. However, the actual\nshorter than the displayed dis\ncollision may occur. Displayed areas on the screen T\n\u2022 The areas of next image will be dis- c\nplayed on the screen. However, the\nareas around and under the front\nbumper and the rear bumper will not be\ndisplayed.\n\u2022 The areas above a camera will not be\ndisplayed. If an obstacle is high or the\nupper part of an obstacle protrudes,\nsuch as a sign, the upper part will not be\ndisplayed on the screen.\n\u2022 A feeling of distance on the image of the\n360 view camera is different from the\nactual distance.\n\u2022 If there is an obstacle such as an parked\nvehicle on the areas which are displayed\non the screen, it may be displayed differ-\nent from the actual distance.\n\u2022 The backward image may be inverted on\nthe screen, which is the same as you\nlook the image on the inside rearview\nmirror or the outside rearview mirrors.\n\u2022\n\u2022 As the front camera and the back cam-\nera are installed on the places which are\n55T050550 a little misaligned from the center of your\nge (2) shows vehicle, the forward image and the back-\nbetween your ward image will be displayed with a little\nhe displayed misaligned positions.\ndistance is\nstance and a OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nThe image of view area by the 360 view\ncamera\n55T050940\n\u2022 The areas under the front bumper and\nthe rear bumper or the ground surface\nwhich is indicated in the below illustra-\ntion may not be displayed on the screen.\n5-92\n55TH0-74E"},230{"page_number": 276, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n\u2022 On the top image, an obj\nedge of areas which a cam\nand an object which is hig\nroad surface may not be d\nthe screen.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The image of the 360 view\nbe a little different from the a\n\u2022 If a moving object is displ\nscreen, its accidental image\nplayed as well.\n\u2022 Under the following situation\ndifficult for the driver to see\nthe 360 view camera. Howe\nmalfunction.\n\u2013 At night, on a rainy day\nplace\n\u2013 When the area around a c\nor cold under the blazing\ncold condition, or when\n5-93 HICLE\nhigh on a rainy day (A camera lens\nmay be fogged)\n\u2013 When strong light directly streams to a\ncamera (White vertical lines may be\ndisplayed on the image)\n\u2013 Under the lights such as the fluores-\ncent light (The image on the screen\nmay flicker)\n\u2013 When the outside air temperature is A\nlow (The screen may get dark)\n\u2013 When you park your vehicle for a long W\ntime with the engine on (Noise may be f\n1\n55TB5023\nject near the\nmera displays\ngher than the\ndisplayed on\ncamera may\nactual color.\nlayed on the\ne may be dis-\nns, it may be\nthe image of\never, it is not\nor at a dark\ncamera is hot\ng sun or the\nn humidity is Adjusting the image quality\nWhen you adjust the image quality, per-\nform the following procedure:\n1) Set the parking brake firmly.\npress a camera switch (2)\n55TH0-74E"},231{"page_number": 277, "page_text": "4) 3D view mode image will b\nPress the button (2) for a\nimage quality.\n5) Adjust brightness and co\nimage to your preference.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The figure of the set brigh\ndepending on ON/OFF con\nlight.\n\u2022 Refer to the owner\u2019s manua\nment system for details.\nSetting of the 360 view cam\nfront and rear traffic alert\nWhen you change the setting\nfollowing procedure:\n1) Set the parking brake firmly\n2) Press the engine switch to\nignition mode to ON. be displaye\nadjusting th\nontrast of the\npress a camera switch (1).\nhtness varies\nndition of the\nal of infotain-\nmera and the\n5\ng, perform the\ny.\n74TB05034\no change the\n4) 3D view mode image will be displayed.\nPress the button (3) for the setting. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n(4)\n74TB05014\n5) Touch the indication (4) to perform the\nsetting of the 360 view camera. Change\nthe setting to your preference. To\nswitch to the different page, press or\n.\n5-94\n55TH0-74E"},232{"page_number": 278, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n\u2022 The image in the above figu\n5-95 HICLE\nure is a typical example; it depends on the vehicle type. 55TH0-74E"},233{"page_number": 279, "page_text": "6) Touch the indication (5) to\n\u2022 The image in the above figu (5)\nperform the setting of the front and rear traffic alert. Change the\nure is a typical example; it depends on the vehicle type. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\n74TB05017\nsetting to your preference.\n5-96\n55TH0-74E"},234{"page_number": 280, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nHandling a camera\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When you replace a came\none, adjustment is neces\nMaruti Suzuki authorized w\nadjustment.\n\u2022 Do not attach any object wh\nthe camera's activation to\nand its periphery. You cann\nbacklit license plate.\n5-97 HICLE\nWhen you doubt malfunction of camera W\nm\nWhen the error mark of camera system I\nis displayed on the screen g\nWhen the error mark is displayed on t\nthe screen, there is abnormality in the \u2022\ncamera system.\n\u2022 If the error mark does not disappear, ask\na Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop to\nhave the camera system inspected.\nera with new\nWhen the image quality on the 360 view\nssary. Ask a\ncamera is poor\nworkshop for \u2022 When a camera lens is dirty, you may\nhave difficulty to see the image. If water-\nhich prevents drop, snow or dirt is attached to the cam-\nthe camera era lens, wash it with water and wipe it\nnot attach the off with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is\nheavily dirty or wax is attached to the\ncamera lens, use a mild detergent.\n\u2022 When reflected light from strong sun or\nstrong headlights from the vehicle\nbehind your vehicle streams directly to a\ncamera, white lines may be displayed on\nthe image and you may have difficulty to\nsee the image. However, this is not mal-\nfunction. When the image and the guide lines are\nmisaligned\nIn the following case, the image and the\nguide lines will be misaligned. However,\nthis is not malfunction.\n\u2022 Your vehicle is tilted due to the number\nof passengers and baggage.\n55TH0-74E"},235{"page_number": 281, "page_text": "License Information\nThe software in the 360 view c camera includes open software. The license information is as fol OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nllows:\n79R40530\n5-98\n55TH0-74E"},236{"page_number": 282, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nParking Sensors\nInstrument cluster (Type A)\nInstrument cluster (Type B)\n((11))\n(1)Symbol representing a\ndetected by parking sens\n* This symbol shows that an\nlocated on the right rear of veh\n5-99 HICLE\n\u2022 The parking sensor system uses ultra-\nsonic sensors to detect obstacles near\nthe rear bumper. If obstacles are sensed\nwhile you are parking or moving the\nvehicle slowly, the system warns you by\nsounding a buzzer and displaying sym-\nbols representing the obstacles on the\ninformation display in the instrument\ncluster.\n\u2022 The system emits an ultrasonic wave\nand the relevant sensor detects the\nreturn of the wave reflected by an obsta-\ncle. The system measures the time\ntaken by the ultrasonic wave to reach the\nobstacle and return from it, from which it\n55T050090\ndetermines the obstacle\u2019s position.\n\u2022 The parking sensor function can be used\nwhen you turn the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d\nposition or the engine switch is pressed\nto change the ignition mode to \u201cON\u201d, the\ngearshift lever is in the \u201cR\u201d position. This\nfunction is helpful in the following cases:\npulling over to the curb; parallel-parking\nthe vehicle; steering the vehicle into a\ngarage; driving along an alley; and mov-\ning slowly in a place with obstacles.\nN\nW\n\u201c\n55T050860\nan obstacle\nsor*\nn obstacle is\nhicle. NOTE:\nWhen the gearshift lever is shifted to the\n\u201cR\u201d position, a buzzer will sound once.\n55TH0-74E"},237{"page_number": 283, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nSensor Locations\n(1)Rear center sensors (2 p\n(2)Rear corner sensors (2 p\n5-100 HICLE\nWorking sensors\nThe sensors work depending on the gearshift le\n55TB5024\nplaces)\nplaces) ever position as follows:\n55TH0-74E"},238{"page_number": 284, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nApproximate areas where ob\nbe detected\n\u2022 An obstacle within about 2\nfrom a sensor or just below\nnot detectable.\n\u2022 The sensors can detect ob\nas a wall up to about 1.5 m (\nrear of vehicle.\n5-101 HICLE\nbstacles can\n55T050580\n20 cm (8 in)\nw a sensor is\nbstacles such\n(5 ft) from the\nN\n\u2022 NOTE:\n\u2022 Thin poles or obstacles lower than the\nsensors may become undetectable as\nthe vehicle moves closer to them even if\nthey have been detected from longer\ndistances.\n55TH0-74E"},239{"page_number": 285, "page_text": "\u2022 The system may calculate\nto a road sign or similar ob\nshorter than the actual dista\nObstacle Indication by Pa\nsor\nInstrument cluster (Type B)\n((22)) ((11)) ((22)) the distance (1)Obstacle detected by rear center sensors\nbstacle to be (2)Obstacle detected by rear corner sensors\nance. Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor\nsymbol representing the obstacle appears on\narking Sen- cluster.\n\u2022 A different symbol is displayed depending on\n\u2022 A buzzer located behind the rear seat soun\nobstacle.\n\u2022 Warnings when obstacles are detected by rea\n55T050100 NOTE:\n\u2022 Symbols are displayed with a short delay afte\n\u2022 If the system detects multiple obstacles sim\npositions using the corresponding symbols.\nthe nearest obstacles.\n55T050870 OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nr causes an interior buzzer to sound and a\nthe information display in the instrument\nn the direction and distance of the obstacle.\nnds when a sensor at the rear detects an\nar sensors\ner the detection of obstacles.\nmultaneously, the display shows all of their\nHowever, the buzzers will sound only for\n5-102\n55TH0-74E"},240{"page_number": 286, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nWarning and Indicator Me\nVehicle with Instrument Cl\nA)\nIf there is a problem or warni\nthe parking sensor system, a\nthe status of the indicator on\nsensor inform it. Follow its ins\n\u2022 The buzzer sounds interm\nindicated sensor is contam\nit clean with a soft cloth. I\ndoes not stop after wiping, t\nproblem with the parking se\nHave your vehicle inspected\nSuzuki authorized workshop\n5-103 HICLE\nessages Vehicle with Instrument Cluster (Type B)\nIf there is a problem or warning regarding the\nluster (Type\nplayed on the information display in the instrum\nbuzzer sounds. If a message is displayed, follow\ning regarding\na buzzer and\nn the parking\nstruction.\nmittently. The\nminated. Wipe\nIf the buzzer\nthere may be\nensor system.\nd by a Maruti\np. parking sensor system, a message is dis-\nment cluster, and a symbol blinks and the\nw its instruction.\n55TH0-74E"},241{"page_number": 287, "page_text": "Rearview Camera\n(if equipped)\nWhen the gearshift lever is s\nposition while the ignition swit\nposition or the ignition mode\nrearview camera system a\nshows the view behind the ve\ndisplay. shifted to \u201cR\u201d\ntch is in \u201cON\u201d\nis \u201cON\u201d, the\nautomatically\nehicle on the\nRearview Camera Location\n((11))\n55TB5025\n(1)Rearview camera\nThe rearview camera is installed on the N\ntailgate. I\no\nw\nt OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\nIf body wax gets on the camera lens, wipe\noff the wax with a clean cloth dampened\nwith mild detergent diluted with water, and\nthen wipe the lens with a dry cloth.\n5-104\n55TH0-74E"},242{"page_number": 288, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nHow to use rearview cam\n1) Turn the ignition switch to \u201c\nor press the engine switc\nthe ignition mode to \u201cON\u201d.\n2) Shift the gearshift lever in \u201c\n\u2022 The display automatical\nview behind the vehicle.\n\u2022 When the gearshift lev\nfrom \u201cR\u201d to another ge\nposition, the display re\nprevious display.\nNOTE:\nThe rearview camera display\nority in any display mode. H\nrearview camera display doe\nthe rear view while the syste\ning.\nDisplay Range of Rearvie\nThe rearview camera display\narea behind the rear end of\nThe display cannot show obje\nclose to the bumper or under t\nThe rearview camera display\nobstacles which are higher th\nera. Upper parts of tall obje\nroad signs cannot be viewed\nplay.\n5-105 HICLE\nmera Display range of rearview camera N\n\u2022\n\u201cON\u201d position\nch to change\n\u2022\n\u201cR\u201d position. ((11))\nlly shows the\n.\n\u2022\nver is shifted\nearshift lever\neturns to the\nhas first pri-\nHowever, the 74TB05026\nes not show\nem is initi\new Cam\ny shows\nthe bum\nects which\nthe bump\ncannot s\nhan the c\nects such\nd on the\n55T050620 R\n(1)Display range T\ne\na\nt NOTE:\n\u2022 Images shown on the display from the\nrearview camera are reversed images\n(mirror images).\n\u2022 The colors of objects on the rearview\ncamera may differ from the actual object\ncolors.\n\u2022 The rearview camera display may be dif-\nficult to see under the following condi-\ntions, but this is not a system\nmalfunction.\n\u2013 In dark areas, on a rainy day or at\nnight.\n\u2013 When the temperature around the lens\nis too high/low, or the camera is wet\nsuch as on a rainy day or during peri-\nods of high humidity (dew condensa-\ntion may occur on the camera lens).\n\u2013 When a foreign object such as mud or\na drop of water is stuck around the\ncamera lens.\n\u2013 When strong light directly enters the\ncamera (vertical lines may be seen on\nthe display).\n\u2013 Under fluorescent light (The display\nmay flicker).\n\u2013 When the outside temperature is low\n(the image on the display may be\ndarkened).\nRearview camera screen indication\nThe distance viewed in the rearview cam-\nera may differ from the actual distance\naccording to the condition of the road or\nthe load the vehicle is carrying.\n55TH0-74E"},243{"page_number": 289, "page_text": "(1)Object\n(2)Actual distance\n(3)Distance on the display\nWhen there is an uphill inclin\nvehicle, the object shown on\nappears farther away than th\n(1)Object\n(2)Actual distance\n(3)Distance on the display When there is a downhill incline behind the E\nvehicle, the object shown on the display\n(\nappears closer than the actual distance.\nE\nIf the rear view from the rearview cam- M\nera is not shown or there is a poor\nimage T\n\u2022 If the rear view from the rearview camera h\nis not shown. i\n\u2013 Check that the ignition switch is in a\n\u201cON\u201d position or the ignition mode is w\n\u201cON\u201d. r\n\u2013 Check that the gearshift lever is t\nshifted to \u201cR\u201d position. a\nh\n\u2022 If the image from the rearview camera is i\nne behind the\npoor.\nn the display\n\u2013 Check that the camera lens is not dirty.\nhe actual dis-\n\u2013 Check that light from the sun or the\nbeam of the headlights from the vehi-\ncle behind is not shining directly into\nthe lens.\nIf the rearview camera system is still not\nworking properly after checking the above,\nhave the system inspected by a Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop as soon as\npossible. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nElectronic Stability Program\n\u00ae\n(ESP )\nESP\u00ae is a registered trademark of\nMercedes-Benz Group.\nThe Electronic Stability Program (ESP\u00ae)\nhelps to control the vehicle during corner-\ning if front wheels or rear wheels skid. It\nalso assists you in maintaining traction\nwhile accelerating on loose or slippery\nroad surfaces. It does this by regulating\nthe engine\u2019s output, and by selectively\napplying the brakes. In addition, ESP\u00ae\nhelps to avoid skidding by controlling brak-\ning pressure.\n5-106\n55TH0-74E"},244{"page_number": 290, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nThe ESP\u00ae has the following sy\nAnti-lock Brake System (A\nRefer to \u201cAnti-lock Brake Syst\nthis section.\nBrake Assist System\nRefer to \u201cBrake Assist System\ntion.\nTraction Control System\nThe traction control system a\nhelps prevent the spinning of\nthe vehicle is started or ac\nslippery road surfaces. The s\nates only if it senses that s\nwheels are spinning or begin\ntraction. When this happens,\noperates the front or rear\nreduces engine power to limit\nStability Control System\nThe vehicle stability control s\nprovide integrated control of s\nas anti-lock brakes, traction co\ncontrol, etc. This system a\ncontrols the brakes and engine\nvent the vehicle from skiddin\nnering on a slippery road surf\nturning the steering wheel abr\n5-107 HICLE\nystems:\nN\nABS) \u2022\ntem (ABS)\u201d in\nm\u201d in this sec-\nautomatically\nwheels when\nccelerated on\nsystem oper-\nsome of the\nnning to lose\n, the system\nbrakes and\nwheel spin.\nsystem helps\nsystems such\nontrol, engine\nautomatically\ne to help pre-\nng when cor-\nface or when\nruptly. NOTE:\n\u2022 If you perform the following operations,\nyou may hear an operation sound or a\nclicking sound. This means that the\nESP\u00ae system is in the self-check mode\nand this does not indicate a malfunction.\n\u2013 When ignition switch is turned to the\n\u201cON\u201d position or pressing the engine\nswitch to change the ignition mode to\n\u201cON\u201d\n\u2013 When releasing your foot from the\nbrake pedal, after the ignition switch is\nin \u201cON\u201d position or the ignition mode is\n\u201cON\u201d with the brake pedal depressed\n\u2013 When starting the engine\n\u2013 When starting the vehicle after starting\nthe engine\n\u2013 When engine revolutions is high and\nESP\u00ae operates, you may feel the\nchange of engine revolutions or vibra-\ntion of vehicle body. However, this is\nnormal.\n55TH0-74E"},245{"page_number": 291, "page_text": "ESP\u00ae Warning Light\n\u2022 If there is a problem in the E\nwith the ignition switch in \u201c\nor the engine switch in ON\nlight will come on. While this\non, the following situations\nthis case, ask a Maruti S\nrized workshop for inspectio\n\u2013 The following functions wi\n- Traction control system\n- Stability control system\n- ENG A-STOP system (i\n\u2013 Hill hold control system m\n\u2013 ABS will work.\n\u2013 Depending on the malfun\ntion, brake assist syste\nwork. \u2022 If any of the following situations occurs, E\nthis light will blink at very short intervals\nof 0.2 seconds.\n\u2013 Traction control system is activated\nwhen starting or accelerating the vehi-\ncle\n\u2013 Stability control system is activated\nwhen making a sharp turn or whirling\nround\n\u2022 If the system is in normal condition,\nwhen you turn the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d\nposition or press the engine switch to\nchange the ignition mode to ON, this\nlight will come on for about 2 seconds\n55TB5026 and then come off.\nESP\u00ae system \u2022\n\u201cON\u201d position\nN mode, this\ns light comes\nwill occur. In\nSuzuki autho-\non.\nill not work:\nm\nNOTE:\nWhile this light comes on, traction control\nif equipped)\nsystem and stability control system will not\nmay not work. be activated. However, you can use ABS.\nnction condi- \u2022\nem may not OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nESP\u00ae OFF Switch\n55TB5027\n\u2022 In the following situation, keep pressing\nthe ESP\u00ae OFF switch until the ESP\u00ae\nOFF indicator light in the instrument\ncluster comes on. Traction control sys-\ntem and stability control system will not\nwork.\n\u2013 When placing the vehicle on the tester\nfor automobile inspection, traction\ncontrol system and stability control\nsystem needs to be deactivated.\n\u2013 If your vehicle is stuck and you try to\nget out of the stuck condition, traction\ncontrol system may not be suitable.\n\u2022 If you perform the following operations,\nthe ESP\u00ae OFF indicator light will come\noff. Also, traction control system and sta-\nbility control system will return to be in\nthe activated condition.\n\u2013 Pressing the ESP\u00ae OFF switch again\n5-108\n55TH0-74E"},246{"page_number": 292, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\n\u2013 Stopping the engine and\ning the engine\n\u2022 If you would like to perform\ning after escaping from the\ntion, press the ESP\u00ae OFF s\nThis will allow the ESP\u00ae O\nlight to come off and the\nreturn to the original condit\ncontrol system and stability\ntem will not be activated a\n(except when stopping the\nthen restarting the engine)\nNOTE:\nFor safety reasons, even if y\nESP\u00ae OFF switch, ABS and\nsystem will not be deactivated\n5-109 HICLE\nthen restart- ESP\u00ae OFF Indicator Light H\nT\nm normal driv- a\ne stuck condi- W\nswitch again. t\nOFF indicator i\ne vehicle will s\ntion. Traction t\ny control sys- \u2022\nautomatically.\ne engine and\nyou press the 55TB5028\nbrake assist \u2022 If you press and hold the ESP\u00ae OFF\nd. switch with the ignition switch is in \u201cON\u201d\nposition or the ignition mode is \u201cON\u201d, this\nlight will come on.\n\u2013 While this light comes on, traction con-\ntrol system and stability control system\nwill not work.\n\u2022 If the system is in normal condition,\nwhen you turn the ignition switch to \u201cON\u201d\nposition or press the engine switch to\nchange the ignition mode to ON, this\nlight will come on for about 2 seconds\nand then come off. Hill Hold Control System\nThe hill hold control system is designed to\nassist you in starting to move up hills.\nWhen you start to move up a hill, the sys-\ntem helps to prevent the vehicle from roll-\ning downward (for approximately 2\nseconds) while you move your foot from\nthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.\n\u2022 The hill hold control system is not\ndesigned to stop the vehicle on a hill.\n55TB5026\n55TH0-74E"},247{"page_number": 293, "page_text": " NOTE: A\n\u2022 If there is a problem with the hill hold c\ncontrol system, the ESP\u00ae warning light T\nin the instrument cluster may come on p\nand the hill hold control system may not f\nwork. Also, ENG A-STOP system (if f\nequipped) may not work. In this case, c\nconsult a Maruti Suzuki authorized work-\n\u2022\nshop.\n\u2022 If you move up an excessively sharp\n\u2022\nslope, a frozen road or a mud track, or\n\u2022\ndepending on laden weight, the vehicle\n\u2022\nmay roll downward when you start the\nF\nvehicle.\n(\n\u2022 If you move up an excessively sharp\na\nslope, a frozen road or a mud track and\na\nthe hill hold control system activates, the\nt\ntyres may be locked and the vehicle may\nnot be controlled properly.\nN\nW\nv\nt\nt\nn OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nActivation conditions for the hill hold\ncontrol system\nThe hill hold control system activates to\nprevent the vehicle from rolling downward\nfor about 2 seconds if your foot is moved\nfrom the brake pedal when the following\nconditions are all met.\n\u2022 The gearshift lever is in the forward gear\nor reverse position.\n\u2022 The parking brake is released.\n\u2022 The vehicle is on an upward slope.\n\u2022 The brake pedal is depressed firmly.\nFor the vehicles with ENG A-STOP system\n(if equipped), the hill hold control system is\nactivated when the engine is restarted\nafter being stopped automatically, even if\nthe previous conditions are not met.\nNOTE:\nWhen the hill hold control system is acti-\nvated, you may hear a sound coming from\nthe engine, or you may feel hardness of\nthe brake pedal. These are normal and do\nnot indicate a malfunction.\n5-110\n55TH0-74E"},248{"page_number": 294, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nBraking\nThe distance needed to bring\nto a halt increases with the s\nvehicle. The braking distance\nexample, at 60 km/h will be a\n4 times greater than the brak\nneeded at 30 km/h. Start to\nbrake pedal when there is p\ntance between your vehicle a\nping point, and slow down gra\n5-111 HICLE\nB\nW\na\ng\nb\n59RN05770 NOTE: t\ng any vehicle While braking you may hear operational\nN\nspeed of the noise due to friction between brake disc/\nI\ne needed, for drum and brake lining. This is a normal\nb\napproximately phenomenon and does not indicate any\nt\nking distance abnormality or affect normal functioning of\nn\ndepress the the vehicle.\nplenty of dis- s\nPower-assisted Brakes\nand the stop-\nadually. Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. If\npower assistance is lost due to a stalled\nengine or other failures, the system is still\nfully operational on reserve power and you\ncan bring the vehicle to a complete stop by\npressing the brake pedal once and holding\nit down. The reserve power is partly used\nup when you depress the brake pedal and\nreduces each time the pedal is pressed.\nApply smooth and even pressure to the\npedal. Do not pump the pedal. Brake Assist System\nWhen you slam the brakes on, the brake\nassist system determines it to be an emer-\ngency stop and provides more powerful\nbraking for a driver who cannot hold down\nthe brake pedal firmly.\nNOTE:\nIf you quickly and forcefully depress the\nbrakes, you may hear clicking sound by\nthe brake assist system operation. This is\nnormal and indicates that the brake assist\nsystem is activated properly.\n55TH0-74E"},249{"page_number": 295, "page_text": "Anti-lock Brake Syste\nABS will help you avoid skidd\ntronically controlling braking\nwill also help you maintain ste\nwhen braking on slippery surfa\nbraking hard.\nThe ABS works automatically\nnot need any special brakin\nJust push the brake pedal d\npumping. The ABS will opera\nit senses that the wheels are\nYou may feel the brake pedal\nwhile the ABS is operating.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If the ABS system is activat\nhear a clunking noise and/o\ning in the brake pedal. Th\nand indicates that the brak\nsure is being controlled prop\n\u2022 You may hear an operation\nyou start the engine or afte em (ABS) begins to move. This means that the N\nabove systems are in the self-check \u2022\nding by elec- mode. This sound does not indicate a\npressure. It malfunction.\neering control\nBraking Distance\naces or when\nABS is not designed to shorten the stop- \u2022\ny, so you do ping distance.\nng technique.\ndown without\nate whenever \u2022\ne locking up.\nl move a little\nV\nO\nW\np\np\nb\nd\ns\nt\nN\nI\nb\nh\nted, you may s\nor feel pulsat- s\nhis is normal\nke fluid pres-\nperly.\nn sound when\ner the vehicle OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When applying sudden brake or apply-\ning brake on slippery roads, the braking\ndistance required for a vehicle with ABS\nis almost the same as the one required\nfor a vehicle without ABS.\n\u2022 If you would like to suddenly apply\nbrake, just push the brake pedal down\nfirmly without pumping. Otherwise, the\nlonger braking distance will be required.\n\u2022 The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is\nunder about 9 km/h. This depends on\nthe road conditions.\nVibration and Sound during ABS\nOperation\nWhen strongly depressing the brake\npedal, you might feel vibration of the brake\npedal, the steering wheel, and the vehicle\nbody. This is due to ABS operation, and\ndoes not indicate a malfunction; continue\nstrongly depressing the brake pedal at this\ntime.\nNOTE:\nImmediately after starting the engine and\nbeginning to drive, you might temporarily\nhear a motor sound. This means that the\nsystems are in self-check mode. This\nsound does not indicate a malfunction.\n5-112\n55TH0-74E"},250{"page_number": 296, "page_text": "OPERATING YOUR VEH\nTyres\n5-113 HICLE\nSituations where ABS may Activate\nby Chance when Applying Brake\n\u2022 When driving on slippery roads\n\u2022\n69RHS150\n\u2013 Manholes\n69RHS151\n\u2013 Metal plates in construction zones 69RHS152\n\u2013 Gravel roads\n\u2022 When driving over joints in roads and\nother height differences\n69RHS153\n\u2013 Joints in roads\n55TH0-74E"},251{"page_number": 297, "page_text": "\u2013 Height differences in road\n\u2022\n\u2013 Bumpy roads B\nT\nf\ns\nt\n\u2022\n\u2022\n69RHS154 7\nds \u2013 Cobblestone\nABS Warning Light\n69RHS155\n74TB05002\nIf there is a problem in the ABS system\nwith the ignition switch in \u201cON\u201d position or\nthe engine switch in ON mode, this light\nwill come on. OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\nBraking Assist\nThis function assists you in applying more\nforce when operating the brake. When\nsudden braking is applied, the time until\nthe ABS comes into full effect is shortened.\n\u2022 If you do not depress the brake pedal\nfirmly, braking assist will not operate.\n\u2022 Brake assist is not a device that provides\ncontrol beyond the original braking per-\nformance.\n5-114\n55TH0-74E"},252{"page_number": 298, "page_text": " ADVICE FOR Y\nWhen Driving .............\nOff-road Driving .........\nImproving Fuel Econo\nStuck Vehicle .............\nPrecaution for Handlin\nRunning-in .................\nCatalytic Converter ...\n60G409 ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\nYOUR DRIVING\n...........................................................6-1\n...........................................................6-8\nomy ...................................................6-9\n...........................................................6-10\nng Vehicle ........................................6-11\n...........................................................6-15\n...........................................................6-15\n6\n55TH0-74E"},253{"page_number": 299, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\nWhen Driving\n6-1 IVING\nStart Driving after Carefully Check- D\ning the Surrounding Circumstances A\ne\nBe sure to always fully check the safety of\nthe surrounding circumstances before R\nbeginning to drive. e\nR\nE\n59RN02300\n69RHS176 Do not Race the Engine, and Do not\nAvoid Fast Starts and Rapid Accel-\neration Just after Engine Start\nRefer to \u201cAvoid Fast Starts, Rapid Accel-\neration and Hard Braking\u201d and \u201cDo not\nRace the Engine\u201d in the \u201cImproving Fuel\nEconomy\u201d section.\n55TH0-74E"},254{"page_number": 300, "page_text": "Do not Concentrate on a\nPhone or Navigation Syst Do not Reach Through the Steering D\nMobile\nWheel B\ntem\nW\nP\nn\nN\nI\na\nd\ns ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\nDo not Drive with Your Foot on the\nBrake Pedal\nWhen Depressing the Accelerator\nPedal and the Brake Pedal Simulta-\nneously\nNOTE:\nIf you depress both the accelerator pedal\nand the brake pedal simultaneously while\ndriving, the engine power output may be\nsuppressed.\n6-2\n55TH0-74E"},255{"page_number": 301, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\nDo not Shift the Gearshift\n\u201cN\u201d (Neutral) while Drivin\nNOTE:\nNon-usage of vehicle for long\ncause gradual rusting on bra\nface as it is made of cast iro\nresult in noise/vibration. The s\nbearing on functioning of the v\nular driving of vehicle may pre\nrust, thus reducing the noise a\n6-3 IVING\nt Lever into \u2022\nWhat Should You Do in Case of Mal-\nng\nfunction or Emergency?\n\u2022 Warning light turns on\nStop immediately in a safe place and\ntake corrective action.\nFor details, refer to \u201cWarning Lights and\nIndicators\u201d in the \u201cQUICK GUIDE\u201d sec-\ntion or \u201cWarning and indicator mes-\nsages\u201d in the \u201cINSTRUMENT\nCLUSTER\u201d.\n\u2022 You feel strong shock from under the \u2022\nfloor\nImmediately stop in a safe place and\n69RHS180 check whether there is brake fluid leak-\nage or fuel leakage, and also check\nwhether there is any abnormality in the\nexhaust pipe, etc. If any abnormality is\nfound, consult with a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop.\n\u2022 Sudden tyre puncture\nGrasp the steering wheel firmly, carefully\napply the brake, slowly reduce speed,\nand stop in a safe place.\nduration may\nake disc sur-\non. This may\nsame has no\nvehicle. Reg-\nevent/remove\nand vibration. \u2022 You feel that the brake pedal is heavy\nto use\nVia engine vacuum pressure, the vehi-\ncle utilizes a brake booster to reduce\nthe force necessary for depressing the\nbrake pedal. If this engine vacuum\npressure decreases, you may feel as if\nthe brakes require more force than\nusual to depress, but this is not abnor-\nmal. Depress the brake pedal as\nstrongly as you need to.\n\u2022 Metallic screeching sound is heard\nfrom the brakes\nPromptly consult with a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop. The disk brake\npads (Maruti Suzuki genuine parts) are\ndesigned to emit a creaking/screeching\nsound as a function to warn the wear, as\nthey have almost reached usage limit\nand replacement timing.\n55TH0-74E"},256{"page_number": 302, "page_text": "Use Engine Brake on a Lo\ndown to a lower gear one by o ong Down- 6-Speed Automatic transmission vehi- A\ncles\none. ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\nAuto Gear Shift vehicles\nengine braking becomes.\n6-4\n55TH0-74E"},257{"page_number": 303, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\nWhen Side Wind Is Stron\nAt a tunnel exit, on a bridge\nlarge truck passes you, your v\nbe blown slightly sideways b\nDo not panic. Firmly grasp\nwheel, gradually reduce speed\nyour intended course.\n6-5 IVING\nng Drive Slowly on a Slippery Road D\nSurface S\n72J20330\ne, or when a\nvehicle might\nby side wind.\n59RN06030\nthe steering\nd, and regain Do not Drive on Puddles at High\nSpeed\n69RHS182\n55TH0-74E"},258{"page_number": 304, "page_text": "Check Brake Effectivenes\nDriving on Puddles or Wa\nVehicle\n\u2022 After verifying the safety of t\nings, depress the brake p\ntimes at low speed and che\neffectiveness.\n\u2022 If the brake effectiveness\ndepress the brake pedal a\ngently and repeatedly unt\neffectiveness is fully recov\nthe brake equipment. ss afte\nashing\n7\nthe surr\npedal se\neck the brake unavoidable, go slowly in the lowest gear.\nIn case that you have driven in a flooded\nis still poor, area, stop the vehicle in a safe and non\nat low speed flooded place while checking the brake\ntil the brake effectiveness. Then, ask Maruti Suzuki\nvered, to dry authorized workshop to check the follow-\ning inspection items.\n\u2022 Function of brake\n\u2022 Function of electrical components\n\u2022 Changes of oil level and quality for\nengine, transmission and differential. In\ncase that the oil is turbid whitely, water\nhas been mixed in the oil and an oil\nchange is required.\n\u2022 Lubricant condition of the bearings, sus-\npension joints, etc. ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\n6-6\n55TH0-74E"},259{"page_number": 305, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\nHighway Driving\nWhen driving at highway s\nattention to the following:\n\u2022 Stopping distance\nincreases with vehicle spee\nbrakes far enough ahead of\npoint to allow for the extra\ntance.\n\u2022 On rainy days, hydroplanin\nHydroplaning is the loss of\nbetween the road surface a\ncle\u2019s tyres due to a water\nbetween them. Steering or\nvehicle during hydroplaning\ndifficult, and loss of contro\nKeep speed down when t\nface is wet.\n\u2022 At high speeds, the veh\naffected by side winds\nreduce speed and be prepa\npected buffeting, which can\nexits of tunnels, when pass\nof a hill, or when being o\nlarge vehicles, etc.\n6-7 IVING\nDriving on Hills 6\nManual transmission vehicles c\nspeeds, pay\nared for unex-\nn occur at the\nsing by a cut\novertaken by 6-Speed Automatic transmission vehi-\ncles\n55TH0-74E"},260{"page_number": 306, "page_text": "Auto Gear Shift vehicles  6-8\n55TH0-74E"},261{"page_number": 307, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\nImproving Fuel Econ\nNOTE:\nFuel economy (mileage) of the\nvary due to several factors i.e\nits-gear change pattern, usag\npressure in the tyres, wind s\nconditions, fuel quality-non\nstandard fuel, maintenance\nroad conditions, braking etc.\nThe following instructions w\nimprove fuel economy.\nKeep Tyre Pressures Cor\nUnder-inflation of the tyres ca\ndue to increased running resis\ntyres. Keep your tyres inflate\nrect pressure shown on the\ndriver\u2019s side door or the drive\npillar.\nKeep Weight to a Minimu\nThe heavier the load is, the m\nvehicle consumes. Unload a\nsary luggage or cargo.\nAvoid Excessive idling\nIf you park your vehicle for m\nminute, stop the engine and\nlater. When warming up a col\nnot allow the engine to idle\nthrottle until the engine has re\nating temperature. Allow the\nwarm up by driving.\n6-9 IVING\nnomy Avoid Fast Starts, Rapid Accelera- D\ntion and Hard Braking\ne vehicle may Avoid fast starts\ne. driving hab- Fast starts away from lights or stop signs\nge of A.C, Air will consume fuel unnecessarily and\nspeed, traffic shorten engine life. Start off slowly.\nadulterated\nAvoid unnecessary stops\ne of vehicle,\nAvoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-\nping. Try to maintain a moderate, steady\nwill help you speed whenever possible. Slowing down\nand then accelerating again uses more\nfuel.\nrrect\nan waste fuel Keep a steady cruising speed\nstance of the Drive at a constant speed that road and R\ned to the cor- traffic conditions will permit. f\nlabel on the\ner\u2019s door lock\num\nmore fuel the\nany unneces-\nD\nmore than one\nV\nstart it again\nR\nld engine, do\nt\nor apply full\neached oper- r\nr\ne engine to Do not Race the Engine\n69RHS060\nRevving the engine only consumes extra\nfuel and has no benefit.\nDrive with an Appropriate Gear for\nVehicle Speed\nRunning the vehicle at a high engine rota-\ntion speed by using a low-speed gear will\nresult in poor fuel economy. Use the cor-\nrect gear according to the vehicle speed.\n55TH0-74E"},262{"page_number": 308, "page_text": "Keep the Air Cleaner Clea\nIf the air cleaner is clogged wi\nwill be greater intake resistan\nin decreased power output an\nfuel consumption. an Stuck Vehicle\nIf your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or\nsand, follow the directions below:\n1) Shift the transmission back and forth\nbetween a forward range (or first gear\nfor manual transmission) and reverse.\nThis will create a rocking motion which\nmay give you enough momentum to\nfree the vehicle. Press gently on the\naccelerator to keep wheel spinning to a\nminimum wheel rpm. Remove your foot\nfrom the accelerator while shifting. Do\nnot race the engine. Excessive wheel\nspin will cause the tyres to dig deeper,\nmaking it more difficult to free the vehi-\n59RN06050 cle.\nith dust, there\nnce, resulting NOTE:\nnd increased You may have to turn the ESP\u00ae system off\nin order to allow spinning the wheels.\n2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few\nminutes of rocking, we recommend you\nto consult a Maruti Suzuki authorized\nworkshop or a roadside assistance ser-\nvice. If a towing service is not available\nin an emergency, your vehicle may be\ntemporarily towed by a towing cable or\nchain secured to the towing eye either\non the front or rear of the vehicle. Refer\nto \u201cTowing by Using Towing Eye\u201d in the\n\u201cEMERGENCY SERVICE\u201d section. ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\n6-10\n55TH0-74E"},263{"page_number": 309, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\n6-11 IVING\nPrecaution for Handling D\nVehicle\nDo not Apply Strong Force to Exte-\nrior Parts\nBe Careful of Uneven Road Surface Do not Modify Your Vehicle Illegally\n69RHS184\n55TH0-74E"},264{"page_number": 310, "page_text": " W\nR ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\nWhen Installing, Removing and\nRepairing Parts\n6-12\n55TH0-74E"},265{"page_number": 311, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\n6-13 IVING 55TH0-74E"},266{"page_number": 312, "page_text": "Specification and viscosity o\nAs performance factors such\nsumption depend on the eng\nuse oil that satisfies the spe\nthe following Table 1 and Ta\nMaruti Suzuki genuine oil\nmended.\nTable 1 Table 2\nFor K12N(DOHC) Engine\nFor India\n*\nExcept For India\nof engine oil\nh as fuel con-\ngine oil used,\necifications in For K10C(DITC) Engine\nable 2. Using For India\nl is recom-\nExcept For India\n*1: The API standard is determined by the\nAmerican Petroleum Institute and rep-\nresents the quality grade of engine oil.\n*2: The ILSAC standard is an engine oil\nstandard for automobiles, established\nby the International Lubricant Specifica-\ntion Advisory Committee, and is based\non the API standard while indicating ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\neven higher performance specifica-\ntions such as for fuel conservation and\ndurability.\n*3: SAE viscosity is a standard that deter-\nmines the viscosity of lubricating oil.\nThe number on the left side (the num-\nber with a \u201cW\u201d) means the viscosity at\nlow temperature. The smaller this figure\nis, the stronger the oil resistance to\ncoldness is and the better the engine\nstart capability is. The number on the\nright side means the viscosity at high\ntemperature. The larger this figure is,\nthe stronger the oil resistance to heat is\nand the better the engine protection\nperformance is.\n6-14\n55TH0-74E"},267{"page_number": 313, "page_text": "ADVICE FOR YOUR DRI\nRunning-in\n6-15 IVING\nCatalytic Converter\n80G106\nThe purpose of the catalytic converter is to\nminimize the amount of harmful pollutants\nin your vehicle\u2019s exhaust. Use of leaded\nfuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic\nconverters is prohibited, because lead\ndeactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-\nnents of the catalyst system.\nThe converter is designed to last the life of\nthe vehicle under normal usage and when\nunleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-\nnance is required on the converter. How-\never, it is very important to keep the engine\nproperly tuned. Engine misfiring, which can\nresult from an improperly tuned engine,\nmay cause overheating of the catalytic\nconverter. This may result in permanent\nheat damage to the catalytic converter and\nother vehicle components. 55TH0-74E"},268{"page_number": 314, "page_text": " When Driving Hybrid Vehicle W\nFor economical and ecological driving, pay S\nattention to the following points: c\nu\nShift lever operation\nf\nShift the shift lever to D when stopped at a\nc\ntraffic light, or driving in heavy traffic etc.\nw\nShift the shift lever to P when parking.\nt\nWhen using the N, there is no positive\neffect on fuel consumption.\nIn the N, the gasoline engine operates but\nelectricity cannot be generated.\nAlso, when using the air conditioning sys-\ntem, etc., the hybrid battery (traction bat-\n59RN06060 tery) power is consumed.\nAccelerator pedal/brake pedal oper-\nation\n\u2022 Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid\nabrupt acceleration and deceleration.\nGradual acceleration and deceleration\nwill make more effective use of the elec-\ntric motor (traction motor) without having\nto use gasoline engine power.\n\u2022 Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated\nacceleration consumes hybrid battery\n(traction battery) power, resulting in poor\nfuel consumption. Battery power can be\nrestored by driving with the accelerator\npedal slightly released. ADVICE FOR YOUR DRIVING\nWarming up before driving\nSince the gasoline engine starts up and\ncuts out automatically when cold, warming\nup the engine is unnecessary. Moreover,\nfrequently driving short distances will\ncause the engine to repeatedly warm up,\nwhich can lead to excess fuel consump-\ntion.\n6-16\n55TH0-74E"},269{"page_number": 315, "page_text": " OTH\nOTHER CONTR\nFuel Filler Opening ....\nRefueling ....................\nHood ...........................\nSun Visor ...................\nInterior Light ..............\nAccessory Socket .....\nDrink Holder ...............\nStorage Area ..............\nAssist Grips ...............\nFootrest ......................\nDoor Pocket ...............\nUSB Socket (if equippe\nUSB Charging Socket\nFront Seatback Pocket\nLuggage Compartmen\nLuggage Compartmen\n60G407\nHeating and Air Condi\nAutomatic Heating and\n(Climate Control) .......\nRadio Antenna ...........\nInstallation of Radio fr\nAudio Function ..........\nRemote Audio Control\nSuzuki Connect (if equ\nRoof Rail.....................\nWireless Charger (if eq HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n...........................................................7-1\n...........................................................7-2\n...........................................................7-4\n...........................................................7-6\n...........................................................7-7\n...........................................................7-10\n...........................................................7-11\n...........................................................7-12\n...........................................................7-14\n...........................................................7-15\n...........................................................7-15\ned) ...................................................7-16\n(if equipped) ..................................7-16\nt (if equipped) .................................7-17\nnt Hook .............................................7-17\nnt Cover (if equipped) .....................7-17\nitioning System ...............................7-18\nd Air Conditioning System\n...........................................................7-20\n...........................................................7-27\nrequency Transmitters ...................7-27\n...........................................................7-27\nls (if equipped) ...............................7-28\nuipped) .............................................7-29\n...........................................................7-30\nquipped) ..........................................7-30\n55TH0-74E"},270{"page_number": 316, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nFuel Filler Opening\nMake sure to read \u201cRefue\nsection.\nFuel Filler Door\n7-1 D EQUIPMENT\nA fuel filler door is located on the left rear F\nside of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can\neling\u201d in this be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever\n(1) located on the outboard Position of\ninstrument Panel and locked by simply\nclosing the door.\n\u2022\n\u2022\n55TB07002 Fuel Filler Cap\nOpen Close\n57L51093\n\u2022 To open the fuel filler cap, turn it counter-\nclockwise.\n\u2022 To close the fuel filler cap, turn it clock-\nwise until you hear more than 2 clicks.\n(3)\n(2)\n74TB07005\n55TH0-74E"},271{"page_number": 317, "page_text": "NOTE:\nThe cap holder (1) holds the\n(2) by hooking the groove (3)\ning. OTH\nRefueling W\nfuel filler cap G\nWatch Out for Fire\nwhen refuel-\n69RHS186 HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nWhen Refueling at a Self-service\nGas Station\n7-2\n55TH0-74E"},272{"page_number": 318, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\n7-3 D EQUIPMENT\nU Use Unleaded Gasoline Only\n55TH0-74E"},273{"page_number": 319, "page_text": "Hood OTH\nOpening the Hood 2\n(1)\n55TB07005\n1) Pull up the hood release lever (1)\nlocated under the driver\u2019s side instru-\nment panel in the outboard position\n(Left of the fuel lever). This will disen-\ngage the hood lock halfway.\n(2)\n55TB07006 HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n2) Push the under-hood release lever (2)\nsideways with your finger, as shown in\nthe illustration. While pushing the lever,\nlift up the hood.\n7-4\n55TH0-74E"},274{"page_number": 320, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\n(3)\n3) While holding the hood, p\nrod (3) out from the holding\nthen insert the end of the\ndesignated hole (5).\n7-5 D EQUIPMENT\nC\n\u203b\n(4)\n(5)\n55TB07007\npull the prop\ng clip (4), and\n1\ne rod into the\nNOTE: 2\nWhen you pull out the prop rod from the\nholding clip, hold the part. Closing the Hood\n55TB07008\n1) Lift up the hood slightly and remove the\nprop rod from the hole. Put the prop rod\nback into the holding clip.\n2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm above\nthe hood latch, and then let it drop\ndown. Check that the hood is securely\nlatched after closing.\n55TH0-74E"},275{"page_number": 321, "page_text": " OTH\n79J161\nThe sun visors can be pulled down to block\nglare coming through the windshield, or\nthey can be unhooked and turned to the\nside to block glare coming through the side\nY\nwindow.\nt HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n72M2058\n(1)Hook\n(2)Mirror cover\n(3)Card holder\nYou can put a card in the card holder (3) on\nthe back of the sun visor.\n7-6\n55TH0-74E"},276{"page_number": 322, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nVanity Mirror (if equipped\n((44))\n(4)Vanity mirror\nTo use the vanity mirror (4) on\nthe sun visor, pull up the mirro\n7-7 D EQUIPMENT\nd) Interior Light \u2022\n\u2022\nNOTICE\nIf you turn on the interior light for a C\nlong time with the engine stopped,\nthe lead-acid battery may discharge.\nDo not turn on the interior light for a\nlong time with the engine stopped.\nFront (if equipped)\n70K178\nn the back of\nor cover (2).\nT\nf\nO\nPush the switch to turn on the light and T\npush it again to turn off the light. l\nNOTE: N\nIf your vehicle is equipped with the keyless I\npush start system or the keyless entry sys- p\ntem, the light will automatically be turned t\noff to prevent the lead-acid battery from o\ndischarging when the following conditions d\nare simultaneously met: a\n\u2022 The ignition switch is in the \u201cLOCK\u201d posi- \u2022\ntion, or the ignition mode is \u201cLOCK\u201d (OFF). \u2022 The hazard warning lights, the position\nlights and the headlights are off.\n\u2022 After 15 minutes of the light on.\nCenter\n((cc)) ((bb)) ((aa))\n55T070020\nThis light switch has three positions which\nfunction as described below:\nON (a)\nThe light comes on and stays on regard-\nless of whether the door is open or closed.\nNOTE:\nIf your vehicle is equipped with the keyless\npush start system or the keyless entry sys-\ntem, the light will automatically be turned\noff to prevent the lead-acid battery from\ndischarging when the following conditions\nare simultaneously met:\n\u2022 The ignition switch is in the \u201cLOCK\u201d posi-\ntion, or the ignition mode is \u201cLOCK\u201d (OFF).\n55TH0-74E"},277{"page_number": 323, "page_text": "\u2022 The hazard warning lights,\nlights and the headlights are\n\u2022 After 15 minutes of the light\nDOOR (b)\n\u2022 The light comes on when\nopened. After closing all do\nwill remain on for 15 secon\nfade out. If you insert the k\nthe engine switch to change\nmode to \u201cACC\u201d or \u201cON\u201d dur\nthe light will start to fade\nately. After removing the k\nignition switch or press the e\nto change the ignition mod\n(OFF), the light will turn on\nonds and then fade out.\n\u2022 When the ignition switch\nposition, or the ignition mod\n(OFF), to prevent the lead\nfrom discharging, the light w\ncally be turned off when a\nminutes has elapsed after\ndoors (including the tailgate\nand other operations are no\nOFF (c)\nThe light remains off even whe\nopened. OTH\n, the position Luggage Compartment Light\ne off. (if equipped)\nt on.\n(1) (2)\nn the door is\noors, the light\nnds and then\nkey, or press\ne the ignition\nring this time,\nout immedi-\nkey from the\nengine switch\nde to \u201cLOCK\u201d 68PM00510\nn for 15 sec- When you open the tailgate with the lug- N\ngage compartment light switch in the \u201cON\u201d T\nis in LOCK\nposition (1), the light comes on for about i\nde is \u201cLOCK\u201d\n15 minutes. o\nd-acid battery\nWhen the luggage compartment light s\nwill automati-\nswitch is in the \u201cOFF\u201d position (2), the light o\nperiod of 15 remains off regardless of whether the tail- t\nr any of the\ngate is open or close. i\ne) is opened\nr\not done.\nen the door is HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n68PM00511\nNOTE:\nThe number of doors involved in the light-\ning operation of the interior light depends\non the vehicle specification. If there is a\nswitch (rubber protrusion) at the door\nopening as shown, the door is involved in\nthe lighting operation. The tailgate is also\ninvolved in this operation even without the\nrubber protrusion.\n7-8\n55TH0-74E"},278{"page_number": 324, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nVanity Mirror Light (If equ\n((11))\nThe vanity mirror light (1) com\nthe mirror cover is opened.\nCourtesy Lights (If equipp\nEach front door has a courtes\ninside bottom. It lights autom\nthe door is opened.\n7-9 D EQUIPMENT\nuipped)\nNOTE: N\nIf you leave any door open, the light will \u2022\nautomatically be turned off after about 15\nminutes to prevent the battery from dis-\ncharging.\n\u2022\nFront Footwell Lights (If equipped)\n55T070030\nmes on when\nped)\nG\nR\n55TB07009\nA footwell light is provided in the leg space\nin front of each front seat. The light comes\non when the door is opened. After closing\nall doors, the light will remain on for about\n15 seconds and then fade out. If you turn\nthe ignition switch to \u201cACC\u201d or \u201cON\u201d posi-\ntion or press the engine switch to change\nthe ignition mode to ACC or ON during this\ntime, the light will start to fade out immedi-\nately.\n55T070490\nsy light on its\nmatically when NOTE:\n\u2022 You can change the footwell lights oper-\nation via the information display. Refer to\n\u201cInformation Display\u201d in the \u201cINSTRU-\nMENT CLUSTER\u201d section.\n\u2022 The light will automatically be turned off\nto prevent the lead-acid battery from dis-\ncharging when all of the following condi-\ntions are simultaneously met for 15\nminutes or more:\n\u2013 The ignition switch is in the \u201cLOCK\u201d\nposition, or the ignition mode is LOCK\n(OFF).\n\u2013 If footwell lights setting mode is in\nlighting control mode and headlamp or\nposition lamp is off.\n\u2013 If any door is open.\nGlove Box Light (If equipped)\nRefer to \u201cGlove Box\u201d in this section.\n55TH0-74E"},279{"page_number": 325, "page_text": "Accessory Socket\nCenter Console\n(1)\nFloor Console (if equippe\nThe accessory socket will wo\nignition switch is in \u201cACC\u201d or \u201c OTH\nor the engine switch is in ACC or ON\nmode.\nThis socket can be used to provide 12 volt/\n120 watt/10 ampere power for electrical\naccessories. Check that the rubber cap\nremains on the socket when the socket is\nnot in use.\nWhen using the accessory socket, open\nthe rubber cap (1).\n55TB07010\ned)\n(1)\n55TB07011\nork when the\n\u201cON\u201d position HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n7-10\n55TH0-74E"},280{"page_number": 326, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nDrink Holder\nFloor Console\n(1)Floor console drink holde\nDoor\nFront\n(2)\n7-11 D EQUIPMENT\nRear\n(2)\n(1)\n55T070090\n(2)Bottle holder\n55T070070\nNOTE:\ner\nMaruti Suzuki recommends to use maxi-\nmum 1 liter capacity of bottle.\n55T070080 55TH0-74E"},281{"page_number": 327, "page_text": "NOTE:\n\u2022 If you place the keyless rem\nler in a drink holder or a bo\nmay not be detected.\n\u2022 If you spill or drop liquid\nhave your vehicle inspected\nSuzuki authorized workshop OTH\nStorage Area\nmote control-\nottle holder, it\naccidentally,\nd by a Maruti\np.\n(1)\n(4)\n(1)Glove box\n(2)Floor console tray\n(3)Driver\u2019s side pocket\n(4)Front armrest with console box (if equippe\nEach item in the figure is a typical example; the\ntype. HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n(2)\n(3)\n74TB07001\ned)\ne actual equipment depends on the vehicle\n7-12\n55TH0-74E"},282{"page_number": 328, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nNOTE:\nIf you place the keyless remo\nin any of storage areas, it\ndetected.\n7-13 D EQUIPMENT\nUsing Storage Area with a Lid\nGlove box\n((11))\nT\nw\n74TB07002\n\u2022 To open the glove box, pull the latch\nlever (1).\n\u2022 To close it, push the lid until it is latched\nsecurely.\note controller\nmay not be 55T070050\nThe glove box light (If equipped) stays on\nwhile the lid is open.\n55TH0-74E"},283{"page_number": 329, "page_text": "Front armrest with console\n(if equipped)\nUse this stowage for keeping\nOpen the compartment by ra\nlid while keeping the lever (1)\nNOTE:\nAlways close the lid after yo\nthing into or take something o OTH\nbox Assist Grips C\n((11))\n((11))\nY\nT\n80J1233 h\na\nAssist grips are provided for convenience.\n55T070650\nPull the assist grip (1) towards you.\nsmall items.\naising the top\nup.\nou put some-\nout of the box. HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nCoat Hooks\nYou can hang clothing on the coat hooks.\nThese hooks are not designed for large or\nheavy items and are located with rear right\nassist grip.\n7-14\n55TH0-74E"},284{"page_number": 330, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nFootrest\nfoot only.\n7-15 D EQUIPMENT\nDoor Pocket E\na\np\n74TB07011 N\nI\nRear\ni\n74TB07012 Each pocket is provided for holding light\nand soft things such as gloves, newspa-\npers or magazines.\nNOTE:\nIf you place the keyless remote controller\nin a door pocket, it may not be detected.\n55TH0-74E"},285{"page_number": 331, "page_text": "USB Socket (if equip\n(1)\nOpen the cover (1), and then\nportable digital music player,\nsocket to enjoy music through\naudio system. Refer to the su\nmanual for details. OTH\npped) USB Charging Socket\n(if equipped)\nWhen the ignition switch is in \u201cACC\u201d or\n\u201cON\u201d position, or the ignition mode is ACC\nor ON, you can charge your mobile device\nsuch as your smart phone by using the\nconnecting cable (commercial item).\nLeft side socket (1)\nThe standard capacity is 5 V / 2.4 A (12 W)\nfor one socket and USB Type-A can be\nused.\nRight side socket (2)\nThe standard capacity is 5 V / 3.0 A (15 W)\n74TB07003 for one socket and USB Type-C can be\nconnect your used. N\nr, etc. to this \u2022\nh the vehicle\u2019s\nupplementary \u2022\n(2)\n\u2022\n(1)\n55T070390\nOpen the cover to use the USB charging\nsocket. HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The USB charging socket should be\nused only for charging.\n\u2022 For some models, charging may pause.\nHowever, this is not a malfunction.\n\u2022 Depending on the vehicle conditions\nsuch as the following examples,\ncharging may temporarily pause.\n\u2013 When the inside temperature of the\nvehicle is high after parking the vehicle\nunder the blazing sun\n\u2013 When the engine is started\n7-16\n55TH0-74E"},286{"page_number": 332, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nFront Seatback Pock\n(if equipped)\nThis pocket is provided for\nand soft things such as glov\npers or magazines.\n7-17 D EQUIPMENT\nket Luggage Compartment Hook L\n(\n55T070210\nholding light L\nves, newspa- g\n55T070630 a\nYou can hang the shopping bag or other\nsuitable objects on the hook.\nThis hook is not designed for large or\nheavy items. Luggage Compartment Cover\n(if equipped)\n55TB07013\nLuggage or other cargo placed in the lug-\ngage compartment is hidden from view by\na luggage compartment cover.\n55TH0-74E"},287{"page_number": 333, "page_text": "Heating and Air Cond\nAir Outlet\n2\n3\n1.Windshield defroster outl\n2.Side defroster outlet\n3.Side outlet\n4.Center outlet\n5.Floor outlet\n6.Rear outlet (if equipped) OTH\nditioning System C\n1 1\n2\n4 4 3\nM\n5 5 t\n6 6\n55TB07001\nlet HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nCenter outlet\nMove the knob (1) vertically or horizontally\nto adjust the direction of airflow as desired.\n7-18\n55TH0-74E"},288{"page_number": 334, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nSide outlet and rear outlet (i\nWhen open, air comes out r\nthe air flow selector position\nknob (2) vertically or horizonta\nthe direction of airflow as desi\noutlet opens when you turn\nupward and closes when you\nward.\n7-19 D EQUIPMENT\nif equipped)\n74TB07004\nNOTE:\n\u2022 For side outlet, if the front door windows\nare fogged, adjust to direct wind from the\nside outlets towards the front door win-\ndows. This will allow you to remove fog\nmore quickly.\n\u2022 The airflow from the rear outlet can be\nincreased by fully moving the center out-\nlet knob (1) to the inner side.\n55T070120\nregardless of\nn. Move the\nally, to adjust\nired. The side\nn the dial (3)\nturn it down- 55TH0-74E"},289{"page_number": 335, "page_text": "Automatic Heating an\nControl)\nDescription of Controls\n((22))\n((33))\n(1)Temperature selector\n(2)Blower speed selector\n(3)Air intake selector\n(4)Air flow selector\n(5)Defrost switch\n(6)Air conditioning switch\n(7)\u201cOFF\u201d switch\n(8)\u201cAUTO\u201d switch\n(9)Display OTH\nnd Air Conditioning System (Climate T\n((99)) ((11))\nP\np\nt\n((66)) ((77)) ((88)) ((55)) ((44)) t\nN\n55T070130 I\nu\nt\nm\nt\ns\nb HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nTemperature selector (1)\n((11))\n55T070140\nPush upper part or lower part of the tem-\nperature selector (1) to adjust the tempera-\nture. The display (9) shows the selected\ntemperature.\nNOTE:\nIf you push the temperature selector (1)\nuntil \u201cHI\u201d or \u201cLO\u201d appears on the display,\nthe climate control system will operate at\nmaximum heating or cooling. The tempera-\nture of the air from the outlets may change\nsuddenly while \u201cLO\u201d or \u201cHI\u201d is displayed,\nbut this is normal.\n7-20\n55TH0-74E"},290{"page_number": 336, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nBlower speed selector (2)\n((22))\nThe blower speed selector (2\nturn on the blower and to s\nspeed.\nIf the \u201cAUTO\u201d switch (8) is\nblower speed will vary automa\nclimate control system m\nselected temperature.\n7-21 D EQUIPMENT\nAir intake selector (3) R\nW\nr\nt\na\np\na\no\nt\nF\nW\ni\n55T070150 l\n2) is used to\n55T070160\nselect blower T\nPush the air intake selector (3) to change a\nbetween the following modes. e\npushed, the\nIf the \u201cAUTO\u201d switch (8) is pushed, the air\natically as the intake will vary automatically as the climate N\nmaintains the control system maintains the selected tem- I\nperature. f\nt\nNOTE: T\nWhen you select the recirculated air mode, t\nthe automatic operation system is deacti-\nvated if you push the \u201cAUTO\u201d switch (8). RECIRCULATED AIR (a)\nWhen this mode is selected, inside air is\nrecirculated. At the same time, the indica-\ntor light (10) will turn on. This mode is suit-\nable when driving through an area with\npolluted air such as a tunnel, or when\nattempting to quickly cool down the vehicle\nor to reduce unwanted odor from entering\nthe vehicle.\nFRESH AIR (b)\nWhen this mode is selected, outside air is\nintroduced. At the same time, the indicator\nlight (10) will turn off.\nThe fresh air position (b) and recirculated\nair position (a) are selected alternately\neach time the air intake selector is pushed.\nNOTE:\nIf you select the recirculated air position (a)\nfor an extended period of time, the air in\nthe vehicle may become contaminated.\nTherefore, you should occasionally select\nthe fresh air position (b).\n55TH0-74E"},291{"page_number": 337, "page_text": "Air flow selector (4)\n((ff))\nPush the air flow selector (4\namong the following functions\ntion of the selected mode ap\ndisplay.\nIf the \u201cAUTO\u201d switch (8) is pu\nflow will vary automatically as\ncontrol system maintains the s\nperature. OTH\nVentilation (c) B\n((44))\n74TB07006\n55T070170\nTemperature-controlled air comes out of T\n4) to change\ns. The indica- the center, side and rear (if equipped) out- t\nlets. o\nppears on the\no\ni\nushed, the air p\ns the climate o\nselected tem- a\ns HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nBi-level (d)\n74TB07007\nTemperature-controlled air comes out of\nthe floor outlets and cooler air comes out\nof the center, side and rear (if equipped)\noutlets. When the temperature selector (1)\nis in the fully COLD position or fully HOT\nposition, however, the air from the floor\noutlets and the air from the center, side\nand rear (if equipped) outlets will be the\nsame temperature.\n7-22\n55TH0-74E"},292{"page_number": 338, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nHeat (e)\nTemperature-controlled air co\nthe floor outlets and the side\ncomes out of the windshield d\nlets and also comes slightly o\ndefroster outlets.\n7-23 D EQUIPMENT\nHeat and defrost (f) D\nP\nd\nl\nD\n74TB07008 74TB07009\nomes out of Temperature-controlled air comes out of\noutlets, also the floor outlets, the windshield defroster\ndefroster out- outlets, the side defroster outlets and the\nout of the side side outlets.\nT\nt\nd Defrost switch (5)\n((1111))\n((55))\n59RN07170\nPush the defrost switch (5) to turn on the\ndefroster. At the same time, the indicator\nlight (11) will turn on.\nDefrost\n74TB07010\nTemperature-controlled air comes out of\nthe windshield defroster outlets, the side\ndefroster outlets and the side outlets.\n55TH0-74E"},293{"page_number": 339, "page_text": "NOTE:\nWhen the defrost switch (5)\nturn on the defroster, the air\nsystem will come on and the f\ntion (b) will be selected auto\nvery cold weather, however, t\ntioning system will not turn on\nAir conditioning switch (6)\nThe air conditioning switch (6\nturn on and off the air conditio\nonly when the blower is on.\nswitch to turn on the air cond\ntem. At the same time, \u201cA/C\u201d w\nthe display and the indicator\nturn on.\nPush in the switch again to tu\nconditioning system. At the sa\nC\u201d will go off and the indicator\nturn off. OTH\nModels with idling stop system S\nis pushed to When the engine is stopped automatically,\nr conditioning the air conditioner switches to the ventila- A\nfresh air posi- tion position (a).\nomatically. In\nthe air condi- NOTE:\nn. \u2022 If the cooling and heating performanc\ninsufficient when the engine is stop\nautomatically, push the idling stop s\ntem OFF switch to deactivate the idling\nstop system. (The engine is restarted\nautomatically, and the cooling and heat-\ning performance is restored.)\n\u2022 If the windshield and/or front door win-\ndows are fogged, push the defrost\nY\nswitch. (When the defrost switch is\nw\npushed, the engine is restarted automat-\n59RN07190 f\nically and the defroster is turned on.)\nd\n6) is used to\noning system 1\nPush in the 2\nditioning sys- 3\nwill appear on\nlight (12) will\nT\na\nurn off the air\ns\name time, \u201cA/\nn\nr light (12) will\nm HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nSystem Operating Instructions\nAutomatic operation\n((11))\n((66)) ((77)) ((88))\n55T070180\nYou can let the climate control system\nwork automatically. To set the system for\nfully-automatic operation, follow the proce-\ndure below.\n1) Start the engine.\n2) Push the \u201cAUTO\u201d switch (8).\n3) Set the desired temperature by pushing\nthe temperature selector (1).\nThe blower speed, air intake and air flow\nare controlled automatically to maintain the\nset temperature. However, the air flow is\nnot changed to the defrost position auto-\nmatically.\n7-24\n55TH0-74E"},294{"page_number": 340, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nNOTE:\nWhen you select the recirculat\nthe automatic operation syste\nvated if you push the \u201cAUTO\u201d\nYou can use the air conditioni\nto manually turn the air conditio\naccording to your preference\nturn the air conditioning switc\nmate control system canno\ninside temperature below outs\nture.\nTo turn the climate control sys\nthe \u201cOFF\u201d switch (7).\nNOTE:\nIf the \u201cAUTO\u201d on the display b\na problem in the heating syste\nconditioning system. You sho\nsystem inspected by Maruti S\nrized workshop.\n7-25 D EQUIPMENT\nNOTE:\nted air mode, \u2022 To find the temperature at which you are\nem is deacti- most comfortable, start with the 25\u00b0C\nswitch (8). (75\u00b0F) setting.\n\u2022 If you push the temperature selector (1)\ning switch (6) until \u201cHI\u201d or \u201cLO\u201d appears on the display,\nioner on or off the climate control system will operate at\ne. When you maximum heating or cooling and the\nch off, the cli- blower will run at full speed.\not lower the \u2022 To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather\nside tempera- or hot air in hot weather, the system will\ndelay turning on the blower until warmed\nor chilled air is available.\nstem off, push\n\u2022 If your vehicle has been left in the sun\nwith the windows closed, it will cool\nfaster if you open the windows briefly.\n\u2022 Even under the automatic operation, you\nblinks, there is\ncan set individual selectors to the man-\nem and/or air\nual mode. The manually selected func-\nould have the\ntions are maintained, and the other\nSuzuki autho-\nfunctions remain under automatic opera-\ntion.\n\u2022 If the windshield and/or the front door\nwindows are fogged, push the defrost\nswitch (5) to turn on the defroster, or\npush the air flow selector (4) to change\nthe air flow to the heat and defrost posi-\ntion (f) to defog the windows.\n\u2022 To return the blower speed selector (2),\nair intake selector (3), and air flow selec-\nB\ntor (4) to automatic operation, push the\np\n\u201cAUTO\u201d switch (8).\nc\nl\nb\na (13)\n55T070340\n(14)\n55T070350\nBe careful not to cover the interior tem-\nperature sensor (13) located on the climate\ncontrol panel, or the solar sensor (14)\nlocated at the top of the driver\u2019s side dash-\nboard. These sensors are used by the\nautomatic system to regulate temperature.\n55TH0-74E"},295{"page_number": 341, "page_text": "Manual Operation\nYou can manually control the\ntrol system. Set the selec\ndesired positions.\nNOTE:\nIf you need maximum defrost\nfollowing procedure:\n1) Push the defrost switch (5\nthe defroster (the air cond\ntem will come on and the f\ntion (b) will be selected aut\n2) Set the blower speed selec\n3) Adjust the temperature se\n\u201cHI\u201d indication on the displa\n4) Adjust the side outlets so\non the side windows. OTH\nMaintenance\ne climate con- If you do not use the air conditioner for a\nctors to the long period, such as during winter, it may\nnot give the best performance when you\nstart using it again. To help maintain opti-\nmum performance and durability of your air\nconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.\nOperate the air conditioner at least once a\nmonth for one minute with the engine\nidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil H\nand helps protect the internal components. t\nYour air conditioner is equipped with air fil-\nP\nters. Clean or replace them as specified in\nA\n\u201cMaintenance Schedule\u201d in the \u201cINSPEC-\nb\nTION AND MAINTENANCE\u201d section. Have\nb\nthis job done by a Maruti Suzuki autho-\ns\nrized workshop as the lower glove box\nt\nmust be lowered for this job.\n55TB07003\nNOTE:\nting, take the Your vehicle uses the air conditioning\nrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called\n5) to turn on R-134a. R-134a replaced R-12 around\nditioning sys- 1993 for automotive applications. Other\nfresh air posi- refrigerants are available, including recy-\ntomatically). cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used\nctor to HIGH. in your vehicle.\nelector to the\nay.\nthe air blows HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nHow to Use Air Conditioning Sys-\ntem Effectively\nParking under the blazing sun\nAfter parking for a long time under the\nblazing sun, the interior temperature can\nbecome very high. Use the air conditioning\nsystem, with the windows or doors opened\nto ventilate the interior.\n7-26\n55TH0-74E"},296{"page_number": 342, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nRadio Antenna\nRemoval and Installation\n(1)Radio antenna\n7-27 D EQUIPMENT\nInstallation of Radio A\nfrequency Transmitters W\nA\nWe recommend that you always ask a\nS\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop about\nfrequency band, max output power, \u2022\nantenna position at vehicle and specific\nconditions for installation and/or use before\ninstalling a radio transmitter in your vehi-\ncle. Such equipments may cause the elec-\ntronic control system to malfunction if they \u2022\nare incorrectly installed or they are not\nsuited for the vehicle.\n\u2022\n55TB07014 Audio Function\nWhen Using Audio System with\nAppropriate Volume not to Disturb\nSafe Driving\n\u2022 When playing music or other audio, if a\nmobile phone is used inside or nearby\nthe vehicle, noise may be heard from the\nspeakers. This does not indicate a mal-\nfunction.\n\u2022 Navigation and audio equipment may\nnot function properly if they are inter-\nfered with unauthorized radio waves.\n\u2022 For further information about the fea-\ntures of the navigation or audio equip-\nment, refer to the instruction manuals.\n55TH0-74E"},297{"page_number": 343, "page_text": "NOTE:\nDue to poor quality of FM/AM s\ndisturbance/noise may be hea\nspeakers. It is recommended\nthe tuner system to prevent th\ndisturbance/noise in the speak OTH\nRemote Audio Controls\nsignal, some\n(if equipped)\nard from\nto switch off Controlling basic functions of the audio\nhe said system is available using the switches on\nV\nker. the steering wheel.\nY\nThe remote audio switches are available\n\u2022\nwhen the engine switch is in ACC or ON\n\u2022\nmode.\n\u2022\n\u2022 For operation of an audio system or a\nnavigation system, refer to the supple-\nmentary manual, provided along with it.\n\u2022 The operating procedure may be differ- M\nT\nent depending on an audio system or a\nnavigation system.\n\u201c\nw\n55TB07004\nt\n(1)Volume switch\ne\n(2)Mute switch\nm HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n(3)\u201cMODE\u201d switch\n(4)Select switch\n(5)Hands-free switch\n(6)Voice recognition switch\nVolume Switch (1)\nYou can adjust volume with this switch.\n\u2022 To increase the volume, press \u201c+\u201d side.\n\u2022 To decrease the volume, press \u201c\u2013\u201d side.\n\u2022 The volume will continue to increase or\ndecrease until this switch is released.\nMute Switch (2)\nTo mute this sound, press the switch (2).\n\u201cMODE\u201d Switch (3)\ne you press this switch, the audio\nuch as radio, etc. will be switched\nng on a navigation system or an\nstems, you can turn on the system\ning this switch, even when the\nnt itself is turned off.\nSwitch (4)\ne you press this switch, you can\noadcast station or music accord-\nur preference, along with the cur-\nlected mode.\nfree Switch (5)\nuse this switch for the equipment\nwhich has the hands-free function. To use\nthe function, you need to set up for the\nequipment. Refer to the supplementary\nmanual for details.\n7-28\n55TH0-74E"},298{"page_number": 344, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nVoice Recognition Switch\nYou can use this switch for th\nwhich has the voice recognit\nTo use the function, you need\nthe equipment. Refer to the su\nmanual for details.\n*: When using Apple CarPlay\nAutoTM on infotainment syst\nApple CarPlay\u00ae may not be\nyour country or region.\nFor details about Apple C\nthe following site:\nhttp://www.apple.com/ios/ca\nAndroid AutoTM may not be\nyour country or region.\nFor details about Android\nrefer to the Google support\nhttp://support.google.com/a\n7-29 D EQUIPMENT\nh (6)* Suzuki Connect (if equipped) T\nhe equipment y\nSuzuki Connect is an advanced Telematics\ntion function. s\nsolution that offers Connected car features\nd to set up for\nrelated to Vehicle Alerts & Notifications, T\nupplementary\nSafety & Security, Trips & Location & c\nRemote Vehicle Operation. a\ny\u00ae or Android h\nRefer to MARUTI SUZUKI website for\ntem s\nbelow details:\ne available in 1. Feature & Vehicle applicability\n2. Terms & Conditions\nCarPlay, visit 3. FAQs\n4. Suzuki Connect App Manual\narplay 5. Help & Contact us\n6. Suzuki Connect Alexa Skill Manual\ne available in\nNOTE:\nAuto, please \u2022 Application services are subject to\nsite: change. It is recommended to install the\nandroidauto latest updates from Google Play/Apple\nApp store for optimal experience.\n\u2022 Application functioning is subject to net-\nwork availability & also depends on\nSmartphone hardware & OS perfor-\nmance.\n\u2022 Amazon, Alexa and all related logos are\ntrademarks of Amazon.com, Inc. or its\naffiliates. The communication device equipped with\nyour vehicle includes free/open source\nsoftware.\nThe license information and/or source\ncode for free/open source software is\navailable at the following URL:\nhttps://www.denso-ten.com/support/\nsource/oem/sg1/\n55TH0-74E"},299{"page_number": 345, "page_text": "Roof Rails OTH\nWireless Charger T\n(if equipped)\nSmart phone equipped with wireless\ncharging function, can be charged by plac-\ning it on the charging area, provided the\ndevice is Qi certified as per Wireless\nPower Consortium. Wireless Charger can\nsupport only one smart phone at a time.\nThe Wireless Charger cannot be used with\na smart phone that is larger than the\ncharging area. Additionally, depending on\nthe smart phone, the Wireless Charger T\nmay not operate properly. Refer to the W\noperation manual of the smart phone.\n1\n55TB07016\nWireless charger uses inductive charging 2\ntechnology to charge the smart phones.\nInductive charging system are less efficient\nthan conventional charging through cable.\nAs a result, user may experience higher\ndevice temperature during charging. HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\nThe \u201cQi\u201d Symbol\n55TB07018\nThe \u201cQi\u201d symbol is a trademark of the\nWireless Power Consortium.\n1) Wireless charger\n2) Indicator light\n((22))\n((11))\n55TB07015\n7-30\n55TH0-74E"},300{"page_number": 346, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\n7-31 D EQUIPMENT 55TH0-74E"},301{"page_number": 347, "page_text": " OTH HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n7-32\n55TH0-74E"},302{"page_number": 348, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nphone equipped with wirele\nfunction at the center of Wirel\nFirmly close all the doors (i\ntailgate) and turn the igniti\nACC/IGNON. If the vehicle is\nmode, wireless charging is no\nPlace a Smart phone on t\nCharger (1) with its charging s\ndown.\nWhile charging, the indicator li\nwill be illuminated.\nIf charging does not begin, pla\nphone at the center of the cha\nWhen charging is complete, t\nindicator light (2) (green) will il\n7-33 D EQUIPMENT\nNOTE:\n\u2022 You can choose to turn the wireless\ncharging function ON or OFF in the user\nsettings mode on the Infotainment/Head\nUnit. For more details, refer to the man-\nual of the Infotainment/Head Unit.\n\u2022 Charging might take few seconds to initi-\nate depending on a portable device or a\nsmart phone.\n\u2022 If a certain amount of time has elapsed\nsince charging completed and the porta-\nble device has not been moved, the\nwireless charger will restart charging.\n\u2022 If the portable device is moved within the\ncharging area, charging will stop tempo-\ness charging rarily and then restart.\nless Charger. \u2022 Non compatible/Non Qi certified smart\nincluding the phones may generate FOD/error alerts\nion mode to \u2022 The surface of the portable device or\nin ACC OFF smart phone may slightly heat up during\not possible. charging process which is normal.\nthe Wireless\nsurface facing\night (2) (blue)\nace the smart\narging area.\nthe operation\nlluminate. 55TH0-74E"},303{"page_number": 349, "page_text": "Wireless charger indicator l\n*: Indicator light intensity may\n**: Depending on the smart ph\nError / malfunction status\n**: Go to Wireless Charger scr OTH\nlight status\nvary depending on the vehicle/ weather condition.\nhone, the indicator light may not turn green even after charging c\nreen in the Infotainment screen to see the details of error / malfu HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\ncompletion.\nunction.\n7-34\n55TH0-74E"},304{"page_number": 350, "page_text": "OTHER CONTROLS AND\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If there is communication l\nInfotainment System & Wi\nger, Wireless Charger scre\nbe visible. In this case conta\nest Maruti Suzuki authorize\nIndicator Unit may indicate R\nRed Continuous alert based\nmunication between the S\nand Wireless Charger.\n\u2022 Indicator Unit may indicate R\nRed Continuous alert based\nmunication between the S\nand Wireless Charger.\nThe wireless Charger can be\nwhen\nThe vehicle is in ACC ON mod\nSmart phones that can be ch\nSmart phones compatible with\nless charging standard can be\nthe Wireless Charger. How-ev\nbility with all devices which\nwireless charging standard is\nteed.\n7-35 D EQUIPMENT\nIf a cover or accessory is attached to T\nloss between the Smart phone i\nireless Char- Do not charge a Smart phone if a cover or c\neen may not accessory which is not Qi compatible is \u2022\nact your near- attached. Depending on the type of cover \u2022\ned workshop. and/or accessory attached (e.g. if a cover \u2022\nRed Blinking/ is very thick or has metal ring attached to\nd on the com- the cover), it may not be possible to charge\nSmart phone the Smart phone. If the Smart phone is\nplaced on the charging area and does not\nRed Blinking/ charge, remove the cover and/or accesso-\nd on the com- ries. \u2022\nSmart phone\nIf interference is heard in AM radio\nbroadcasts while charging\n\u2022\ne operated Some noise may be heard while using the\nWireless Charger.\n\u2022\nde.\nharged\nh the Qi wire-\ne charged by\nver, compati- \u2022\nmeet the Qi\ns not guaran- \u2022\n\u2022 The wireless charging function gets\ninterrupted when any of the following\ncondition is encountered\n\u2022 Vehicle is in ACC off mode.\n\u2022 When vehicle battery is too low.\n\u2022 When the engine switch / the power\nswitch is pressed or the brake / the\nclutch is pressed during cranking of the\nvehicle. Charging will be reinitiated once\nthe vehicle is successfully cranked or the\nbrake / the clutch is released.\n\u2022 If in situation other than the above, Wire-\nless Charger will not operate till the key\nsearch event is happening.\n\u2022 Depending on the vehicle drive mode\ncondition, charging might be impacted.\n\u2022 When any of the vehicle door (including\nthe tailgate) is opened or the Key Fob is\ntaken out of the vehicle. Charging will be\ninitiated once all doors are closed and\nthe Key Fob is inside the vehicle.\n\u2022 The Wireless Charger is turned off in the\nuser settings screen on the Infotainment.\n\u2022 When temperature increases abnormally\ninside the wireless Charger or the smart\nphone gets overheated.\n\u2022 When interior temperature of Wireless\nCharger goes beyond the set tempera-\nture, charging will stop. Once the tem-\nperature comes within the operating\nrange, charging function will resume.\n55TH0-74E"},305{"page_number": 351, "page_text": "\u2022 When the smart phone\nduring vehicle running\ncharging may be impacted.\n\u2022 The vehicle is parked at a\nthere is strong electromagne\nnoises such as FM/AM sta\ntion, electric power plant etc\n\u2022 For certain smart phone\ncharging speed may vary a\nmay stop due to their ow\nmechanisms defined by s\nmanufacturer.\n\u2022 For certain smart phones c\nalert may be displayed de\nsmart phone manufacturer\nnot be considered as a m\nthe Wireless Charger\n\u2022 User may face intermittent\nissue based on the smart\nposition and it should not b\nas malfunction of the Wirele\n\u2022 Forceful insertion of smart\ndamage the Wireless Charg OTH\nis displaced When the smart phone placed on Wire-\ng condition, less Charger is connected to USB cable\nIt charges by means as defined by the\nplace where smart phone manufacturer. Based on the\netic waves or above indicator LED status will get change\nation, TV sta- and user may get different Malfunction/\nc. Error alerts\nes, wireless\nand charging Cleaning the wireless charger\nwn protection\nsmart phone\ncharging stop\nepending on\nand it should\nmalfunction of\n/No charging \u2022 Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzene\nphone size/ or thinner for cleaning the charging pad.\nbe considered \u2022 Do not cover the charging pad with tow\ness Charger. els, clothing, or other objects while\nt phone may charging etc.\nger. \u2022 Do not spray aerosols which may come\nin contact with the charging pad surface. HER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT\n7-36\n55TH0-74E"},306{"page_number": 352, "page_text": " V\nVEHICLE LOAD\nVehicle Loading .........\nTrailer Towing ............\n54G215 VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING\nDING AND TOWING\n...........................................................8-1\n...........................................................8-1\n55TH0-74E"},307{"page_number": 353, "page_text": "VEHICLE LOADING AND\nVehicle Loading\nYour vehicle was designed\nweight capacities. The weight\nyour vehicle are indicated b\nVehicle Weight Rating (GVW\nPermissible maximum Axle W\nfront and rear). The GVWR an\nand rear) are listed in the \u201c\nTIONS\u201d section.\nGVWR \u2013 Maximum permis\nweight of the fully loaded vehic\nall the occupants, accessorie\nplus the trailer nose weight\ntrailer).\nPAW \u2013 (Front and Rear) Maxim\nsible weight on an individual a\nActual weight of the loaded\nactual loads at the front and re\nonly be determined by weigh\ncle. Compare these weights t\nand PAW (front and rear). If th\ncle weight or the load on\nexceeds these ratings, you m\nenough weight to bring the l\nthe rated capacity.\n8-1 D TOWING\nT\nfor specific Y\ncapacities of c\nby the Gross c\nWR) and the\nWeight (PAW,\nnd PAW (front\n\u201cSPECIFICA-\nssible overall\ncle (including\nes and cargo\nt if towing a\nmum permis-\naxle.\nvehicle and\near axles can\nhing the vehi-\nto the GVWR\nhe gross vehi-\nn either axle\nmust remove\nload down to Trailer Towing\nYour vehicle was originally designed to\ncarry people and a normal amount of\ncargo, not to tow a trailer.\n55TH0-74E"},308{"page_number": 354, "page_text": " I\nINSPECTION A\nMaintenance Schedule\nPeriodic Maintenance\nDrive Belt ...................\nEngine Oil and Filter .\nEngine Coolant ..........\nAir Cleaner .................\nSpark Plugs ...............\nGear Oil ......................\nClutch .........................\nBrakes ........................\nSteering Wheel ..........\nTyres ...........................\nBattery ........................\nFuses ..........................\nHeadlight Aiming .......\nBulb Replacement .....\n60G410\nWiper Blades .............\nWindshield Washer Flu\nAir Conditioning Syste\nPreparation Before Wi INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nAND MAINTENANCE\ne .......................................................9-2\nSchedule ........................................9-2\n...........................................................9-6\n...........................................................9-6\n...........................................................9-11\n...........................................................9-13\n...........................................................9-13\n...........................................................9-14\n...........................................................9-15\n...........................................................9-15\n...........................................................9-19\n...........................................................9-19\n...........................................................9-22\n...........................................................9-24\n...........................................................9-27\n...........................................................9-28\n...........................................................9-34\nuid ...................................................9-37\nem ....................................................9-37\ninter Season ....................................9-38\n55TH0-74E"},309{"page_number": 355, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\n9-1 NTENANCE\n59RN05750 55TH0-74E"},310{"page_number": 356, "page_text": "Maintenance Schedu\nThe following table shows the\nyou should perform regular\non your vehicle. This table s\nmeters and months when you\nform inspections, adjustment\nand other services. I\nule Periodic Maintenance Schedule\ne timing when\nmaintenance\nshows in kilo-\nu should per-\nts, lubrication\n\u201cC\u201d:Clean\n\u201cR\u201d:Replace or Change\n\u201cI\u201d: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or repla\n\u201cL\u201d: Lubricate\n\u201cT\u201d:Tighten to Specified Torque\n\u201cO\u201d:Rotate\nNOTE:\nThis table includes services as scheduled up to\ncarry out the same services at the same interva INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nace as necessary\no 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000 km,\nals respectively.\n9-2\n55TH0-74E"},311{"page_number": 357, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\n9-3 NTENANCE 55TH0-74E"},312{"page_number": 358, "page_text": " I INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n9-4\n55TH0-74E"},313{"page_number": 359, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\n9-5 NTENANCE 55TH0-74E"},314{"page_number": 360, "page_text": "Drive Belt\nThe drive belts tension\nmatically. If the belt is too\nbattery charging, engine\npower steering, poor ai\nexcessive belt wear can\nThe belts should also\nensure that they are not\nIf you need to replace\nhave it done by your Ma\nrized workshop. I\nEngine Oil and Filter F\nu\nSpecified Oil\no\n1) Preferred INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nFor India, be sure that the engine oil you\nuse comes under the quality classification\nof as listed below.\n9-6\n55TH0-74E"},315{"page_number": 361, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nExcept for India\n55WW--3300\n1) Preferred\nFor India, be sure that the eng\nuse comes under the quality c\nof as listed below.\n\u2022 API SN, SP\n\u2022 ILSAC GF-6\nExcept for India, be sure that t\nyou use comes under the qual\ntion\nas listed below.\n\u2022 API SN, SP\n\u2022 ILSAC GF-6\nSelect the appropriate oil visc\ning to the above chart.\nSAE 5W-30 (1) is the best cho\nfuel economy and good sta\nweather.\n9-7 NTENANCE\nNOTE: O\n\u2022 The replacement timing varies with the\n\u2022\ntype of engine oil that you choose. Refer\nto \u201cMaintenance schedule\u201d in this sec-\ntion for corresponding maintenance\nschedule.\n\u2022 We recommend that you use MARUTI\nSUZUKI genuine oil. To purchase it, see\na Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\n68PH70008\ngine oil you\nclassification\n\u2022\nthe engine oil\nlity classifica-\ncosity accord-\noice for good\narting in cold Oil Level Check\n\u2022 K12N model\n55TB0901\n\u2022 K10C (DITC) model\n68PM07004\n55TH0-74E"},316{"page_number": 362, "page_text": "Upp\nLowe\nIt is important to keep the eng\ncorrect level for proper lubric\nvehicle\u2019s engine. Check the\nthe vehicle on a level surface.\nindication may be inaccurate\nis on a slope. The oil leve\nchecked either before starting\nor at least 5 minutes after\nengine.\nPull out the oil dipstick, wipe th\na clean cloth, insert the dipstic\ninto the engine, and then rem\nThe oil on the stick should be\nupper and lower limits shown\nIf the oil level indication is ne\nlimit, add enough oil to raise\nthe upper limit. I\n1) When the GPF warning light comes on, R\nper drive at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph) or\ner\nhigher for more than 25 minutes to\nregenerate the GPF properly. For\ndetails, refer to \u201cGasoline particulate fil-\nter (GPF)\u201d in the \u201cOPERATING YOUR\nVEHICLE\u201d section.\n2) When the oil change request light\nblinks, change the engine oil and oil fil-\nter, and reset the oil life monitoring sys-\ntem. To reset the oil life monitoring\nsystem, consult a Maruti Suzuki autho-\n52D084 rized workshop.\nWhen the engine oil level exceeds the\ngine oil at the\nMAX level on the dipstick, consult a Maruti\ncation of your\nSuzuki authorized workshop.\noil level with\n. The oil level R\nif the vehicle t\nel should be t\ng the engine n\nstopping the a\ne\nhe oil off with u\nck all the way a\nmove it again.\ne between the\nn on the stick.\near the lower\ne the level to INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nRefilling\nOpen Close\n55T090140\nRemove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly\nthrough the filler hole to bring the oil level\nto the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful\nnot to overfill the oil. Too much oil is almost\nas bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the\nengine and allow it to idle for about a min-\nute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 minutes\nand check the oil level again.\n9-8\n55TH0-74E"},317{"page_number": 363, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND M\nChanging Engine Oil\nDrain the engine oil while\nwarm.\n2) Remove the oil filler ca\n9-9 remove the engine under cover (2).\n4) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.\n5) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug\nand drain the engine oil. 6\nN\nA\nf\nh\nTightening torque for drain plug:\n35 Nm (3.6 kg-m, 25.8 lb-ft) Recycle or properly dispose of used\noil and oil filters.\n6) Reinstall the drain plug with new gas-\nket. Tighten the plug with a wrench to\nthe specified torque.\nNOTE:\nAsk a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop\nfor changing engine oil and filter if you\nhave difficulties.\n55TH0-74E"},318{"page_number": 364, "page_text": "Oil Filter Replacement\n1) Remove the screws (1)\nremove the engine under c I\n(3)Loosen 7\n), and then (4)Tighten\ncover (2).\nTightening (viewed from filter top) INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n7) Tighten the filter as specified below\nfrom the point of contact with the\nmounting surface (or to the specified\ntorque) using an oil filter wrench.\nTightening torque for oil filter:\n3/4 turn or\n14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10.3 lb-ft)\n9-10\n55TH0-74E"},319{"page_number": 365, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nRefilling with Oil and Oil L\nCheck\n1) Pour oil through the fille\ninstall the filler cap.\nFor the approximate capac\nrefer to \u201cRecommended fue\nand capacities (approx.)\u201d\nCATIONS\u201d section.\n2) Start the engine and carefu\noil filter and the drain plug\nRun the engine at various\nleast 5 minutes.\n3) Stop the engine and wait\nutes. Check the oil level ag\noil if necessary. Check\nagain.\n9-11 NTENANCE\nLeakage Engine Coolant\ner hole and Selection of Coolant\nTo maintain optimum performance and\ncity of the oil, durability of your engine, use MARUTI\nel / lubricants SUZUKI genuine coolant or equivalent.\nin \u201cSPECIFI-\nThis type of coolant is the best for cooling\nully check the system for the following reasons:\ng for leakage. \u2022 The coolant helps maintain proper\nspeeds for at engine temperature.\n\u2022 It gives proper protection against freez-\nabout 5 min- ing and boiling.\ngain and add \u2022 It gives proper protection against corro-\nfor leakage sion and rust.\nFailure to use the proper coolant can dam-\nage your cooling system. Your Maruti\nSuzuki authorized workshop can help you\nselect the proper coolant. 55TH0-74E"},320{"page_number": 366, "page_text": "Coolant Level Check\nCheck the coolant level at t\ntank, not at the radiator. With\ncool, the coolant level should\n\u201cFULL\u201d and \u201cLOW\u201d marks.\nAdding Coolant I\nthe reservoir\nh the engine\nd be between\nis cool, remove the reservoir tank cap and\nadd coolant until the reservoir tank level\nreaches \u201cFULL\u201d mark. Never fill the reser-\nvoir tank above \u201cFULL\u201d mark. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nment\ndures are required, ask\nthorized workshop for\n9-12\n55TH0-74E"},321{"page_number": 367, "page_text": "3) Remove the element fr\ncleaner case. If it appears\nclean or replace it with a ne\n4) Reinstall the air cleaner ca\n9-13 rom the air\ns to be dirty,\new one.\nase securely.\n74TB09009\n2) Unclamp the side clamps and remove\nthe element from the air cleaner case. If he element appears to be dirty clean\nhe element or replace it with a new one\ns per periodic maintenance schedule.\nlamp the side clamps securely.\nark Plugs\nrk Plug Replacement and\npection\ne special procedures, materials and\ns are required, it is recommended that\ntrust this job to a Maruti Suzuki autho-\nd workshop.\n55TH0-74E"},322{"page_number": 368, "page_text": "Gear Oil\nManual Transmission Oil\nGear Shift oil\nWhen adding gear oil, use gea\nappropriate viscosity and grad\nin the chart below.\nWe highly recommend you us\n\u201cMARUTI GENUINE GEAR O\nmanual transmission oil / au\noil.\nManual transmission oil /\nShift oil I\n1. Oil filler and level plug\n(For K12N model)\nl / Auto\n2. Oil filler and level plug\n(For K10C(DITC) model)\nar oil with the\nde as shown To check the gear oil level, use the fol-\nlowing procedure:\n1) Park the vehicle on a level surface with\nse:\nthe parking brake applied. Then, stop\nOIL 75W\u201d for\nthe engine.\nuto gear shift 2) Remove the oil filler and level plug. G\n3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the S\n/ Auto Gear oil level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If t\ngear oil does not flow from the plug a\nhole, add oil through the filler plug hole\nuntil oil flows a little from the plug hole.\nTightening torque for oil filler and\nlevel plug\nManual transmission (1)\n21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft)\n56RM07006 Auto Gear Shift (1)\n21 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15.5 lb-ft) INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nGear Oil Change\nSince special procedures, materials and\ntools are required, ask a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop for this job.\n9-14\n55TH0-74E"},323{"page_number": 369, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nClutch pedal play \u201cd\u201d:\nMAX 10 mm\nMeasure the clutch pedal pla\nthe clutch pedal with your ha\nsuring the distance it moves\nslight resistance. The play i\npedal should be less than t\nvalues. If the play is more tha\nor clutch dragging is felt with th\ndepressed, have the clutch in\nMaruti Suzuki authorized work\n9-15 NTENANCE\n54G274 If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully\ndepressed, have the clutch inspected by a C\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop. If the t\nclutch fluid level is near \u201cMIN\u201d line, fill it up C\nay by moving to \u201cMAX\u201d line with DOT3 or SAE J1703 a\nand and mea- brake fluid.\nuntil you feel\nin the clutch\nthe specified\nan the above,\nhe pedal fully\nnspected by a\nkshop. 55TB0904\nCheck the brake fluid level by looking at\nthe reservoir in the engine compartment.\nCheck that the fluid level is between \u201cMAX\u201d\nand \u201cMIN\u201d lines.\n55TH0-74E"},324{"page_number": 370, "page_text": " I\nN\n\u2022\n\u2022 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nNOTE:\n\u2022 The fluid level can be expected to gradu-\nally fall as the brake pad and/or shoe\nwear.\n\u2022 Brake fluid absorbs water over time and\nbrake fluid with high water content may\ncause vapor lock or brake system mal-\nfunction.\nReplace the brake fluid according to the\nmaintenance schedule in this owner\u2019s\nmanual.\n9-16\n55TH0-74E"},325{"page_number": 371, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nBrake Pedal\nCheck brake pedal stroke. If\nso large, have the brake syste\nby a Maruti Suzuki authorized\nyou doubt the brake pedal is\nheight, check it as follows:\nMinimum distance between\nand floor carpet \u201ca\u201d\nWith the engine running, mea\ntance between the brake ped\ncarpet when the pedal is de\napproximately 30 kg of forc\nmum distance required is a\nSince your vehicle\u2019s brake sy\nadjusting, there is no nee\nadjustment.\nIf the pedal to floor carpet\nmeasured above is less than\ndistance required, have y\n9-17 NTENANCE\ninspected by a Maruti Suzuki authorized\nworkshop.\nthe stroke is\nem inspected NOTE:\nd workshop. If \u2022 When measuring the distance between\nat its normal the brake pedal and floor wall, be sure\nnot to include the floor mat or rubber on\nthe floor carpet in your measurement.\n\u2022 Measure the distance at the brake\npedal\u2019s side facing toward the driver\u2019s\ndoor.\nEXAMPLE\n54G108\nbrake pedal\n52RM70500\nasure the dis-\ndal and floor\nepressed with\nce. The mini-\nas specified.\nystem is self-\ned for pedal\ndistance as\nthe minimum\nyour vehicle 55TH0-74E"},326{"page_number": 372, "page_text": "Check the parking brake for p\nment by counting the numb\nmade by the ratchet teeth a\npull up on the parking brake\npoint of full engagement.\nbrake lever should stop betwe\nfied ratchet teeth and the\nshould be securely locked. If\nbrake is not properly adju\nbrakes drag is suspected ev\nlever has been fully release\nparking brake inspected and/o\na Maruti Suzuki authorized wor I\nproper adjust- I\nber of clicks t\nas you slowly e\ne lever to the p\nThe parking T\neen the speci- e\nrear wheels m\nf the parking a\nusted or the t\nven after the f\ned, have the\nor adjusted by\norkshop. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nIf the measured thickness or inner diame-\nter of the most worn part falls below or\nexceeds the value indicated above, the\nparts should be replaced with a new one.\nThe measurement involves disassembling\neach brake and requires the use of a\nmicrometer or caliper, which must be done\naccording to the instructions described in\nthe relevant service manual or available\nfrom the relevant repair information site.\n9-18\n55TH0-74E"},327{"page_number": 373, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nSteering Wheel\nSteering wheel play \u201cc\u201d:\nCheck the free play of the st\nby gently turning it from left\nmeasuring the distance tha\nbefore you feel slight resistan\nshould be between the specifi\nCheck that the steering whee\nand smoothly without rattling\nall the way to the right and to\ndriving very slowly in an open\namount of free play is not as\nyou find anything else to be\ninspection must be performed\nSuzuki authorized workshop.\n9-19 NTENANCE\nTyres T\nI\nm\nf\n1\n\u201cc\u201d\n55T090090 55T090020\n0\u201330 mm The front and rear tyre pressure specifica-\ntions are listed in the tyre information label\nteering wheel (1). Both front and rear tyres should have\nto right and the specified tyre pressure.\nat it moves\nNote that the value does not apply to the\nnce. The play\ncompact spare tyre, if equipped.\nied values.\nel turns easily\nby turning it\nthe left while\nn area. If the\ns specified or\nbe wrong, an\nd by a Maruti Tyre Inspection\nInspect your vehicle\u2019s tyres at least once a\nmonth or before long trip by performing the\nfollowing checks:\n1) Measure the air pressure with a tyre\ngauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-\nsary.\n55TH0-74E"},328{"page_number": 374, "page_text": "(1)\n(1)Indicator location mark\n2) Check that the depth o\ngroove is more than 1.6\nyou check this, the tyres h\nin tread wear indicators in\nWhen the indicators app\ntread surface, the remain\nthe tread is 1.6 mm or less\nshould be replaced.\n3) Check for abnormal wear\ndamage. Any tyres with cra\ndamage should be repla\ntyres show abnormal wea\ninspected by a Maruti S\nrized workshop. I\n4) Check for loose wheel nuts.\n5) Check that there are no nails, stones or\nother objects sticking into the tyres.\n74TB09003\nof the tread\nmm. To help\nhave molded-\nthe grooves.\npear on the\nning depth of\ns and the tyre\nr, cracks and\nacks or other\naced. If any\nar, have them\nSuzuki autho- INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n9-20\n55TH0-74E"},329{"page_number": 375, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nTyre Rotation\n4-tyre rotation\n5-tyre rotation\n9-21 NTENANCE\nTo avoid uneven wear of your tyres and to C\nprolong their life, rotate the tyres as illus- t\ntrated. Tyres should be rotated every 1\n10000 km. After rotation, adjust front and\nrear tyre pressures to the specification\nlisted on your vehicle\u2019s Tyre Information\nLabel. 2\nWheel Balancing\nIf the vehicle vibrates abnormally on\nsmooth road, have the wheel balanced at\n3\na Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\nWheel Alignment 4\nIn case of abnormal tyre wear or pulling\ntowards one side, have the wheel aligned 5\n65D459 at a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\nTubeless Tyres\nThe vehicle is equipped with Tubeless\n6\nTyres. In tubeless tyre, a thin layer of butyl\nrubber is used for lining the inside of the\ntubeless tyre. This layer is to prevent air\nloss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. The\nair pressure is maintained by the sealing\nbetween tyre bead and wheel rim. Tube-\nless tyres are having advantage of slow air\n7\nloss and preventing sudden deflation while\ndriving.\n8\n55T090680 Care and maintenance tips for tubeless\ntyres\n1) Always maintain recommended infla-\ntion pressure. Driving continuously at\nlow inflation pressure can lead to tyre\ndamage.\n2) In case any leakage is found, check for\nany nail penetration/valve core damage\nor rim bent. Damaged wheel must not\nbe used.\n3) In case tyre has run at low pressure, it\nmust be inspected for any defect.\n4) Whenever new tyre is fitted, replace the\nvalve.\n5) If continuous high speed driving is\nrequired, increase tyres pressure by 5\npsi over recommended inflation pres-\nsure.\n6) Never run the tyre beyond TWI (Tread\nwear indicator). The tyre is recom-\nmended to be replaced when the\nremaining tread has worn to this point.\nThe indicators are spaced across the\ntread around the tyre marked by a trian-\ngular symbol (TWI).\n7) Always prefer tubeless tyre mounting\nmachine. In case of manual mounting-\ntyre/wheel rim damage may occur.\n8) In case of any problem, please get in\ntouch with a Maruti Suzuki authorized\nworkshop.\n55TH0-74E"},330{"page_number": 376, "page_text": " I\nremoving corrosion, rinse with clean water.\nIf your vehicle is not going to be driven for\na month or longer, disconnect the cable\nfrom the negative terminal of the battery to\nhelp prevent discharge. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n9-22\n55TH0-74E"},331{"page_number": 377, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nNOTE:\nThe battery liquid is consum\nbattery is used. If the level is\nless than the center of upper\n(1) and lower level \u201cMIN\u201d (2),\nwater till it reaches the upp\n\u201cMAX\u201d (1).\n9-23 NTENANCE\nReplacement of the Battery N\n\u2022\n(3) (1)\n(2)\n\u2022\n(4)\n68PM00711\nTo remove the battery:\n1) Disconnect the negative cable (1).\n2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).\nmed when the 3) Remove the retainer nuts (3) and\ns found to be remove the retainer (4).\nr level \u201cMAX\u201d\nTo install the battery:\n, add distilled\n1) Install the battery in the reverse order of\nper level line\nremoval.\n2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery\ncables securely. NOTE:\n\u2022 When the battery is disconnected, some\nof the vehicle\u2019s functions will be initial-\nized and/or deactivated.\nThese functions must be required to\nreset after the battery is reconnected.\n\u2022 Do not disconnect the battery terminals\nfor at least one minute after the ignition\nswitch is turned off, or the engine switch\nis pressed to change the ignition mode\nto \u201cLOCK\u201d (OFF).\n55TH0-74E"},332{"page_number": 378, "page_text": " I\n(Battery label) F\nY\nd\nM\nT\n(5)\nt\nP\nT\na\nl\nPb\n(6) I\nT\nc\n51KM042\n(5) Crossed-out wheeled bin symbol T\n(6) Chemical symbol of \u201cPb\u201d v\nThe crossed-out wheeled bin symbol (5)\nlocated on the battery label indicates that\nthe used battery should be collected sepa-\nrately from ordinary household trash. The\nchemical symbol of \u201cPb\u201d (6) indicates the\nbattery contains more than 0.004% lead.\nBy ensuring the used battery is disposed\nof or recycled correctly, you will help pre-\nvent potential negative consequences for\nthe environment and human health, which\ncould otherwise be caused by inappropri-\nate trash handling of the battery. The recy-\ncling of materials will help to conserve\nnatural resources. For more detailed infor-\nmation about disposing of or recycling the\nused battery, consult a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nFuses\nYour vehicle has three types of fuses, as\ndescribed below:\nMain fuse\nThe main fuse takes current directly from\nthe lead-acid battery.\nPrimary fuses\nThese fuses are between the main fuse\nand individual fuses, and are for electrical\nload groups.\nIndividual fuses\nThese fuses are for individual electrical cir-\ncuits.\nTo remove a fuse, use the fuse puller pro-\nvided in the relay box cover.\n(1)\n(2)\n74TB09005\n(1)Fuse puller\n(2)Spare fuse\n9-24\n55TH0-74E"},333{"page_number": 379, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\n9-25 NTENANCE 55TH0-74E"},334{"page_number": 380, "page_text": "The main fuse, primary fuses\nthe individual fuses are loc\nengine compartment. If the\nblows, no electrical compone\ntion. If a primary fuse blows,\ncomponent in the corresp\ngroup will function. When r\nmain fuse, a primary fuse or\nfuse, use a genuine MARU\nreplacement.\nTo remove a fuse, use the fus\nvided in the relay box. The\neach fuse is shown in the bac\nbox cover.\nB I\nF\nand some of\ncated in the\ne main fuse\nent will func-\nno electrical\nponding load\nreplacing the\nan individual\nNOTE:\nUTI SUZUKI\nCheck that the relay box always carries\nspare fuses.\nse puller pro-\namperage of\nck of the relay\nOK\nBLOWN\n55T090620 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nFuses Under Dashboard\n74TB09001\n55T090590\n9-26\n55TH0-74E"},335{"page_number": 381, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\n9-27 NTENANCE\nH\n* Feature not available in the vehicle\nS\na\nt OK BLOWN\n55T090630\nHeadlight Aiming\nSince special procedures are required, ask\na Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for\nthis job.\n55TH0-74E"},336{"page_number": 382, "page_text": "Bulb Replacement\n(13) (12)\n( ) ( ) (5)\n4 3\n(1) (2) I\n(3) (12) (10)\n(11)\n(6)\n(7) (8) (9)\n55TB09012 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n9-28\n55TH0-74E"},337{"page_number": 383, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nIf you need to replace the fol\nindicated in the above table\nMaruti Suzuki authorized work\n*1: Since the lights are non-\ntype, you cannot repla\nReplace the target asse\nbulb is defective.\n9-29 NTENANCE\nllowing bulbs H\ne, consult a l\nkshop. f\nb\n-disassemble\nN\nace a bulb.\nembly if any S\na\nR\nd\nI\ny\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\n\u2022\nNOTE:\nThe inner surface of lens such as the \u2022\nheadlights or the rear combination lights \u2022\nmay be clouded or dew condensation may \u2022\noccur by driving on a rainy day or washing \u2022\nthe vehicle. This is a temporary phenome-\nnon caused by temperature difference\nbetween the inside and the outside of the\nlights. (This is the same phenomenon as\nthe windows are clouded on a rainy day.)\nAlso, it sometimes seems that water gets\ninto the lights because of water drop on the\nedge of the lens. This is a temporary phe-\nnomenon caused by water adherence to\nthe outside of the lights.\nThe above-mentioned phenomena are not\nvehicle malfunction. However, if water is piled up in the lights or\nlarge waterdrop adheres to the inner sur-\nface of lens, have your vehicle inspected\nby a Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\nNon-disassembled Type Lights\nSince the lights shown below are non-dis-\nassemble type, you cannot replace a bulb.\nReplace the target assembly if any bulb is\ndefective.\nIf you need to replace the assembly, ask\nyour Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop.\n\u2022 Headlight (LED type) (if equipped)\n\u2022 Position light and Daytime running light\n(LED type) (if equipped)\n\u2022 Tail/brake light (LED type)\n\u2022 Side turn signal light/hazard warning\nlight on outside rearview mirrors (if\nequipped)\n\u2022 High mount stop light\n\u2022 Front Turn Signal Light (LED type)\n\u2022 Rear Turn Signal Light\n\u2022 License Plate Light\n55TH0-74E"},338{"page_number": 384, "page_text": "Headlights\n(1)Headlight (high/low beam I\nS\nF\n3\n-\n1\nm)\n2 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nSide Turn Signal Light\nFender type (if equipped)\n(1)\n68PM00736\n1) Remove the light housing (1) by sliding\nto left with your finger.\n(2)\n68PM00717\n2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise and\npull it out from the light housing.\n9-30\n55TH0-74E"},339{"page_number": 385, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(4)Removal\n(5)Install\n3) To remove and install the\nside turn signal light (3), si\nor push in the bulb.\nOutside Rearview Mirror Typ\n(if equipped)\nLED module is used. Since s\ndures are required, we reco\ntake your vehicle to your M\nauthorized workshop for L\nreplacement.\n9-31 NTENANCE\nFront Turn Signal Light and V\nFront Position Light\nVehicle with the LED\nFor vehicle with the LED, Front turn signal\nlight and front position light replacement,\nwe recommend you to take your vehicle to\nthe Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop as\nspecial procedure for the same is required.\n68PM00718\n1\ne bulb of the\nimply pull out\npe\nspecial proce-\nommend you\nMaruti Suzuki\nLED module Vehicle with the bulb\n1\n1) Open the engine hood. To remove the\nbulb holder of the front turn signal light\nor the front position light from the light\nhousing, turn the holder counterclock-\nwise and pull it out.\n(2)\n(3)\n(4) (1)\n68PM00721\n55TH0-74E"},340{"page_number": 386, "page_text": "(3) Rem\n(4) Insta\n2) To re\nnal li\nin th\nTo in\nit clo\nbulb\npull\nDaytim\nequipp\nFor DR\nto take\nauthoriz\nfor the s\nRear C\nFor Rea\nwe reco\nthe Mar\nspecial\nLicens\nSince s\nrecomm\nto a Mar\nlight rep\nHigh M\nSince s\nrecomm\nto a Mar\nlight rep (3)Removal\n(4)Install E\new\nnt\nof\n460\ner-\ner\nch\n9-32\n55TH0-74E"},341{"page_number": 387, "page_text": "9-33 (4)Install new\nlug-\nthe\n90480\nmer-\niver\notch\n55TH0-74E"},342{"page_number": 388, "page_text": "(3)\n(4)\n(3)Removal\n(4)Install\n2) Pull the bulb out and then\none.\n3) After replacing the bulb, ins\ntesy light lens in the reve\nremoval. I\nGlove box light (if equipped) W\n55T090040\n74TB09004\nI\n1) Press inward on both sides of the glove\na\nbox and pull frontward and then\nr\ninsert a new unclamp it.\n2) To remove and install the bulb of the T\nstall the cour- glove box light (1), simply pull out or c\nerse order of push in the bulb.\nFront footwell lights (if equipped)\nSince special procedures are required, we\nrecommend you take your vehicle to your\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop for\nlight replacement.\nN\nS\nt\nv\nM\np INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nWiper Blades\n59RN09450\nIf the wiper blades become brittle or dam-\naged, or make streaks when wiping,\nreplace the wiper blades.\nTo install new wiper blades, follow the pro-\ncedures below.\nNOTE:\nSome wiper blades may be different from\nthe ones described here depending on\nvehicle specifications. If so, consult a\nMaruti Suzuki authorized workshop for\nproper replacement method.\n9-34\n55TH0-74E"},343{"page_number": 389, "page_text": "  "},344{"page_number": 390, "page_text": " I\n3\nN\nD\nt\n4\n5\n6 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n3) Slide the blade out as shown.\nNOTE:\nDo not flex the wiper blade frame end more\nthan necessary. If you do, it can break off.\n(1)\n(1)\n59RN09310\n(1)Retainer\n4) If the new blade is provided without the\ntwo metal retainers, move them from\nthe old blade to the new one.\n5) Install the new blade in the reverse\norder of removal.\nMake sure the blade is properly\nretained by all the hooks.\n6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in the\nreverse order of removal.\n9-36\n55TH0-74E"},345{"page_number": 391, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nWindshield Washer F\nCheck that there is washer flui\nRefill it if necessary. Use a\nwindshield washer fluid, dilute\nas necessary.\n9-37 NTENANCE\nFluid A\nI\nl\nn\ns\nm\nc\nO\nm\ni\na\nA\nS\na\n68PM07022 t\nid in the tank.\ngood quality\ned with water\n1 Air Conditioning System\nIf you do not use the air conditioner for a\nlong period, such as during winter, it may\nnot give the best performance when you\nstart using it again. To help maintain opti-\nmum performance and durability of your air\nconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.\nOperate the air conditioner at least once a\nmonth for one minute with the engine\nidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil\nand helps protect the internal components.\nAir Conditioner Filter Replacement\nSince special procedures are required, ask\na Maruti Suzuki authorized workshop for\nthis job.\n74TB09002\n1) To approach the air conditioner filter,\nremove the glove box by pressing both\nsides of the glove box inward and pull-\ning it out.\n55TH0-74E"},346{"page_number": 392, "page_text": "(2)\n(1) (\n(4)\n2) Remove the cover (1) and\nair conditioner filter (2).\nNOTE:\n\u2022 When you install a new filte\nthe UP mark (3) faces upwa\n\u2022 When you install the cove\nthe UP mark (4) faces upwa I\nPreparation Before Winter W\nSeason\nWindshield Washer Fluid\nTo prevent windshield washer fluid from\nfreezing, dilute it by the ratio according to\noutside temperature.\n(3)\nLead-acid Battery\nCheck the liquid measure and the specific\ngravity of lead-acid battery. When it\nbecomes cold, the battery performance\ngets worse. Also, it becomes difficult to\nstart the engine by the weak battery. Refer\nto \u201cBattery\u201d in the \u201cINSPECTION AND\nMAINTENANCE\u201d section.\nW\nd\n55T090070 r\nEngine Coolant\nd pull out the\nTo prevent the inside of engine from cor-\nroding and freezing, use the designated\nengine coolant. Refer to \u201cSpecifications\u201d in\nthe \u201cSPECIFICATIONS\u201d section.\ner, check that\nard.\nNOTE:\ner, check that\nTo check the concentration of engine cool-\nard.\nant or replace it, ask a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\nWinter Tyres and Chocks\n(1)\n(2)\n55T090670\n(1)Winter tyre\n(2)Chock\nWinter tyres and chocks are necessary to\ndrive on the snow roads or the frozen\nroads.\n9-38\n55TH0-74E"},347{"page_number": 393, "page_text": "INSPECTION AND MAIN\nBefore Your Driving\nSnow on the Roof\nRemove snow on the roof befo\ning. If you do not remove it, s\nduring your driving and it may\nview.\nFrozen Wiper Blades\nMelt ice by pouring lukewarm\nmelting it, wipe off water\nrefreezing. If you operate the\n9-39 NTENANCE\nforcedly when ice stays freezing, the wiper M\nrubbers may be damaged and the wiper m\nblades may be broken. r\nv\nSnow and Frost on the Window Glasses i\nb\n80J308 (1)\nore your driv-\nsnow may fall 82K261\ny hinder your\nUse the plastic board (1). You can remove\nsnow and frost not to damage the window\nglasses.\nFrozen Outside Rearview Mirrors\n65P60060\nm water. After 65P60070\nto prevent\nwiper blades Melt ice by pouring lukewarm water. After\nmelting it, wipe off water to prevent\nrefreezing. If you operate the outside rear-\nview mirrors forcedly when ice stays freez-\ning, the outside rearview mirrors may be\nbroken.\n55TH0-74E"},348{"page_number": 394, "page_text": "Frozen Doors\nPour lukewarm water except\non the door. After opening th\noff water. If you open the d\nwhen ice stays freezing,\naround the door may be come\nken.\nSnow Attaching to Shoes\nRemove snow attaching to s\ngetting in your vehicle. If I\nremove it, you may slip when operating the\npedals and the window glasses may mist\neasily because of high humidity inside the\nvehicle.\nWhen Parking the Vehicle Outside\n65P60080\nt the keyhole\nhe door, wipe\ndoor forcedly\nthe rubbers\ne off and bro- 80J315\n80J312\nshoes before\nyou do not INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE\n9-40\n55TH0-74E"},349{"page_number": 395, "page_text": " EMERGENCY S\nTowing by Tow Truck\nTowing by Using Towi\nTyre Changing Tool ..\nJacking Instructions .\nJump-starting Instruct\nRunning Out of Battery\nIf You Get a Flat Tyre W\nEngine Trouble: Starte\nEngine Trouble: Does\nEngine Trouble: Overh\nWarning Triangle .......\n60G411 EMERGENCY SERVICE\nSERVICE\n.........................................................10-1\ning Eye ............................................10-2\n...........................................................10-4\n...........................................................10-6\ntions ................................................10-11\ny ......................................................10-13\nWhile Driving .................................10-13\ner Does not Operate ......................10-13\nnot Start ........................................10-14\nheating ............................................10-14\n..........................................................10-15\n55TH0-74E"},350{"page_number": 396, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\nTowing by Tow Truck\nIf you need to have your ve\ncontact a professional ser\nSuzuki authorized workshop\nyou with detailed towing instru\n10-1 k 2-wheel Drive (2WD) Manual Trans-\nmission or Auto Gear Shift\nehicle towed,\nManual transmission vehicles or Auto Gear\nrvice. Maruti\nShift may be towed using either of the fol-\ncan provide\nlowing methods.\nuctions.\n\u2022 Being towed from the front:\nLift the front wheels and keep the rear\nwheels on the ground. Before the vehicle\nis towed, make sure that the parking\nbrake is released.\n\u2022 Being towed from the rear:\nLifted and the front wheels on the\nground, provided the steering and drive-\ntrain are in operational condition. Before\ntowing, check that transmission is in\nneutral, the steering wheel is unlocked\n(vehicle without keyless push start sys-\ntem - the ignition key should be in \u201cACC\u201d\nposition) (vehicle with keyless push start\nsystem - the ignition mode is ACC), and\nthe steering wheel is secured with a\nclamping device designed for towing\nservice. 55TH0-74E"},351{"page_number": 397, "page_text": "1) Remove the cover (1) by\nhandle (2) covered with a\nas shown in the illustration\nNOTE:\nWe recommend that you fast\nwith tape to prevent damage\ning. using a jack ((44)) ((55))\nsoft cloth (3)\nn.\n55TB1003\n3) To tighten the towing eye (4), turn it\nten the cover clockwise by using a wheel Wrench (5)\ne during tow- until the towing eye (4) is securely\ninstalled. 10-2\n55TH0-74E"},352{"page_number": 398, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\n10-3 Towing by Using a Rope\n1) Hang a towing cable on a towing eye\nhorizontally, so that the hanging side\nwould be the same for the towing vehi-\ncle and the towed vehicle if possible.\n2) Keep the engine running.\n\u2022 When you cannot start the engine,\npress the engine switch to change the\nignition mode to the position other\nthan LOCK (OFF).\n\u2022 Turn the steering wheel to left and\nright to check that the steering lock is\nreleased.\n55TB1004\n3\nN\n\u2022\n\u2022 3) Shift the gearshift lever into \u201cN\u201d.\nNOTE:\n\u2022 If you cannot shift the gearshift lever into\n\u201cN\u201d, towing by using a towing cable is not\npossible. Consult a Maruti Suzuki autho-\nrized workshop.\n\u2022 If you cannot shift the gearshift lever\nfrom \u201cP\u201d to the other position with the\nengine running and the brake pedal\ndepressed, because of malfunction and\nrunning out of the lead-acid battery, can-\ncel the shift lock system referring to\n\u201cCanceling the Shift Lock System\u201d in the\n\u201cOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE\u201d section.\n55TH0-74E"},353{"page_number": 399, "page_text": "4) During towing, make sure\ncable is not slack. To avoi\ncarefully drive your vehic\nthe brake lights of the front\n\u2022 To warn the driver of a fo\ncle, turn on the hazard w\nof the towed vehicle. that a towing Tyre Changing Tool\nid a collision,\ncle checking\nt vehicle.\nollowing vehi-\nwarning lights\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(1)Jack\n(2)Wheel wrench\n(3)Jack handle\n(4)Towing eye\nNOTE:\nFor vehicle fitted with CNG fuel system, refer to EMERGENCY SERVICE\n(1)\n55TB1005\no the supplementary owner's manual.\n10-4\n55TH0-74E"},354{"page_number": 400, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\nThe tyre changing tools are s\nluggage compartment.\nRefer to \u201cLuggage Comp\n\u201cQUICK GUIDE\u201d section.\nWhen using the jack, check th\ndeformation or damage on the\nAlso, check that there is no\nscrew part and grease is appli\nThe tyre changing tools are s\nluggage compartment, belo\ncompartment boards.\nTo remove the luggage c\nboard easily, lift the board fr\nprovided on the board and pul\nTo remove the jack (1), turn it\nterclockwise by using jack ha\npull the jack out of the storage\n10-5 stowed in the\n((33))\npartment\u201d in\nhat there is no\ne jack. ((22))\no dirt on the\nied on it.\nstowed in the\now luggage\ncompartment 55RM08003\nrom the hole NOTE:\nT\nll it out. If you are facing difficulty to use the jack\nb\nhandle (3) alone, use jack handle (3) and\nw\nwheel wrench (2) together as shown in the\nillustration for removal of jack\nTo stow the jack (1), place it\nbracket and turn the shaft c\nthe jack is securely held in pl\n55TB1006\nts shaft coun-\nandle (3) and\ne bracket. A\nc\ns 55TB1007\nTo stow the jack (1), place it in the storage\nbracket (5) and turn the shaft clockwise\nwith the hand.\n74TB07013\nAfter temporarily tightening the jack till it\ncontacts the jack holder bracket , turn the\nshaft approximately 90\u00b0 to 180\u00b0 by using\n55TH0-74E"},355{"page_number": 401, "page_text": "jack handle (3) to securely ho\nplace.\n(7)\nTo remove the spare tyre, tur\ncounterclockwise and remove old the jack in J\n1\n2\n(7)\n68PM08008\nReturn the spare tyre back into the lug-\n3\ngage compartment in the reverse order of\nremoval and tighten its bolt (7) clockwise\nas shown in the above illustration.\nWhile replacing tyre with alloy wheel make\nsure to remove the wheel cap before keep-\ning the tyre in the trunk.\n68PM08007\nrn the bolt (7) 4\ne it. EMERGENCY SERVICE\nJacking Instructions\n1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.\n2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift\ninto \u201cR\u201d (Reverse) if your vehicle has a\nmanual transmission or Auto Gear\nShift.\n3) Turn on the hazard warning switch if\nyour vehicle is near traffic.\n59RN10010\n4) Block the front and rear of the wheel\ndiagonally opposite to the wheel being\nlifted.\n10-6\n55TH0-74E"},356{"page_number": 402, "page_text": "5) Position the jack at an ang\nin the illustration and raise\nturning the jack handle clo\nthe jack-head groove fits\njacking bar boss (1)beneat\nbody.\n10-7 59R80200\ngle as shown\ne the jack by\nockwise until\ns around the\nth the vehicle 55TH0-74E"},357{"page_number": 403, "page_text": "Raising Vehicle with Gara\n\u2022 Apply the garage jack to\npoints indicated below.\n\u2022 Always support the raised\njack stands (commercially\nthe points indicated below.\n(1)Front\n(2)Rear\n(3)Jack stand\n(4)Garage jack\n(5)Jacking point for garage ja age Jack\no one of the\n((11))\nvehicle with\navailable) at\n(3)\nack\n(1)\n(1)\n(5)\n(4) EMERGENCY SERVICE\n(2)\n(3)\n(2)\n(5)\n(4)\n55T100140\n10-8\n55TH0-74E"},358{"page_number": 404, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\n(a)Specified position of jack\nfront side\n(b)Specified position of jack\nrear side\nNOTE:\nFor more details, consult a M\nauthorized workshop.\n10-9 ls\nl, use the following pro-\n4\nk and tools.\n2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel\n55T100180\nnuts.\nk stand for the\n3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking\ninstructions in this section).\nk stand for the\nMaruti Suzuki 4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.\n55TH0-74E"},359{"page_number": 405, "page_text": "(2)\n(3)\n(4\n(3)\n5) Clean any mud or dirt off f\nface of the wheel (1), hub\npart (3) and surface of the\n(4) with a clean cloth. Cl\ncarefully; it may be hot from\n6) Install the new wheel and\nwheel nuts with their cone\nfacing the wheel. Tighte\nsnugly by hand until th\nsecurely seated on the hub (1)\nLoosen\nTighten\n(4)\n(5) 68PM08010\n(1) Tightening torque for wheel nuts\nR\n100 Nm (10.2 kg-m, 74.0 lb-ft)\ng\nr\n7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts\na\nwith a wrench in numerical order as\nshown in the illustration.\n4)\n84S08170\nfrom the sur-\nb (2), thread\ne wheel nuts\nlean the hub\nm driving.\nd replace the\ne shaped end\nen each nut\nhe wheel is\nb. EMERGENCY SERVICE\n(1)\n68PM08001\nReturn the spare tyre back into the lug-\ngage compartment in the reverse order of\nremoval and tighten its bolt (1) clockwise\nas shown in the above illustration.\n10-10\n55TH0-74E"},360{"page_number": 406, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\nYour vehicle includes two to\nwrench and a jack crank, one\na flat end.\nUse the tool with the flat end w\n(3) to remove the full whe\nshown above.\nWhen installing the cover, mak\nis positioned so that it does\nfoul the air valve.\n10-11 1\nand sparks away from the battery\nor an explosion may occur. Never\nools, a wheel smoke when working near the bat-\nof which has tery.\n\u2022 If the booster battery you use for\nwith soft cloth jump-starting is installed in another 2\neel cover, as vehicle, check that the two vehicles\nare not touching each other.\n\u2022 If your lead-acid battery discharges\nrepeatedly, for no apparent reason,\nhave your vehicle inspected by a\nMaruti Suzuki authorized work-\nshop.\n\u2022 To avoid harm to yourself or dam-\nage to your vehicle or battery, fol-\nlow the jump-starting instructions\nbelow.\n68PM08012 If you are in doubt, call for qualified\nke sure that it road service.\nnot cover or 1) Use only a 12-volt lead-acid battery to\njump-start your vehicle. Position the\ngood 12-volt lead-acid battery close to\nyour vehicle so that the jump leads will\nreach both batteries. When using a bat-\ntery installed on another vehicle, check\nthat two vehicles do not touch each\nother. Set the parking brakes fully on\nboth vehicles.\n2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except\nthose necessary for safety reasons (for\nexample, headlights or hazard lights).\n55TH0-74E"},361{"page_number": 407, "page_text": "3) Connect jump leads as foll\n1. Connect one end of th\nlead to the positive (+\nthe discharged battery ( 2. Connect the other end to the positive 4\n(+) terminal of the booster battery\n(2).\n3. Connect one end of the second jump\nlead to the negative (\u2013) terminal of\nthe booster battery (2). 5\n4. Make the final connection to an\nunpainted, heavy metal part (i.e. 6\nengine mount bolt (3)) of engine cyl-\ninder head in the vehicle with the\ndischarged battery (1).\n55T100150\nlows:\nhe first jump\n+) terminal of\n(1). EMERGENCY SERVICE\n4) If the booster battery you are using is\nfitted to another vehicle, start the\nengine of the vehicle with the booster\nbattery. Run the engine at moderate\nspeed.\n5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the\ndischarged battery.\n6) Remove the jump leads in the exact\nreverse order in which you connected\nthem.\n10-12\n55TH0-74E"},362{"page_number": 408, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\nRunning Out of Batte\nIn the following cases, the le\nbattery is running out.\n\u2022 The starter does not en\nattempting to turn on the en\nstarter rotation is too weak\nengine start.\n\u2022 The headlight illumination\nlow or the horn volume is lo\n10-13 ery If You Get a Flat Tyre While E\nead-acid Driving n\nFirmly hold the steering wheel and care- 1\nngage when fully apply the brakes to slow down the\nngine. Or, the vehicle and stop it in a safe place.\nto make the\nis extremely\now.\n2 Engine Trouble: Starter Does\nnot Operate\n1) Try turning the ignition mode to START\nwith the headlights turned on to deter-\nmine the lead-acid battery condition. If\nthe headlights go excessively dim or go\noff, it usually means that either the\nlead-acid battery is discharged or the\nbattery terminal contact is poor.\nRecharge the lead-acid battery or cor-\nrect battery terminal contact as neces-\nsary.\n2) If the headlights remain bright, check\nthe fuses. If the reason for failure of the\nstarter is not obvious, there may be a\nmajor electrical problem. Have the vehi-\ncle inspected by a Maruti Suzuki autho-\nrized workshop.\n55TH0-74E"},363{"page_number": 409, "page_text": "Engine Trouble: Does\nStart\nMake sure that your vehicle\nfuel and battery.\nIf the engine does not start un\ncondition, press the accelera\nthe way to the floor and hold it\ning the engine.\nRefer to \u201cStarting / Stopping E\ncle without Keyless Push Sta\nequipped)\u201d or \u201cStarting / Stop\n(Vehicle with Keyless Push S\n(if equipped)\u201d in \u201cOPERAT\nVEHICLE\u201d section.\nIf the engine still does not sta\nvehicle inspected at a Maruti S\nrized workshop.\n\u2022 Do not operate the starte\nmore than 12 seconds.\nNOTE:\nIf the engine refuses to star\nmotor automatically stops af\nperiod of time. After the starte\nautomatically stopped or if t\nthing abnormal in the engine\ntem, the starter motor runs o\nengine switch is held pressed. s not Engine Trouble: Overheating I\nw\nThe engine could overheat temporarily\np\nunder severe driving conditions. If the high\nhas enough w\nengine coolant temperature warning light\ncomes on as overheating or the engine 1\nnder very cold\ncoolant temperature gauge indicates over-\nator pedal all\nheating during driving:\nt while crank-\n1) Turn off the air conditioner.\nEngine (Vehi- 2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and 2\nart System) (if park.\npping Engine 3) Run the engine at a normal idle speed\nStart System) for a few minutes until the high engine\nTING YOUR coolant temperature warning light goes\noff or the indicator is within the normal,\nart have your acceptable temperature range between\nSuzuki autho- \u201cH\u201d and \u201cC\u201d. 3\ner motor for\nN\nrt, the starter\nI\nfter a certain\nw\ner motor has\nthere is any- r\nstarting sys-\nonly while the\n. EMERGENCY SERVICE\nIf the high engine coolant temperature\nwarning light does not go off or the tem-\nperature indication does not come down to\nwithin the normal, acceptable range:\n1) Turn off the engine and check that the\nwater pump belt and pulleys are not\ndamaged or slipping. If any abnormality\nis found, correct it.\n2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.\nIf it is found to be lower than \u201cLOW\u201d\nline, check radiator, water pump, radia-\ntor hoses and heater hoses for leakage.\nIf leakage that may cause overheating\nis found, do not run the engine until\nthese problems have been corrected.\n3) If leakage is not found, carefully add\ncoolant to the reservoir and then the\nradiator, if necessary. (Refer to \u201cEngine\ncoolant\u201d in \u201cINSPECTION AND MAIN-\nTENANCE\u201d section.)\nNOTE:\nIf engine overheats and you are not sure\nwhat to do, contact a Maruti Suzuki autho-\nrized workshop.\n10-14\n55TH0-74E"},364{"page_number": 410, "page_text": "EMERGENCY SERVICE\nWARNING\n\u2022 It is hazardous to remove\ntor cap when the water te\nis high, because scaldin\nsteam may be blown\npressure. The cap shou\ntaken off when the co\nperature has lowered.\n\u2022 To help prevent perso\nkeep hands, tools and\naway from the engine c\nand air-conditioner fan. T\ntric fans can automatica\nwithout warning.\n10-15 Warning Triangle \u2022\n\u2022\n(1)\n55T100010\n\u2022\nIn case of vehicle break-down or during\nemergency stopping, where, your vehicle\ncould become a potential traffic hazard,\nkeep the warning triangle, provided with\nyour vehicle, on the road free from any\n79J007 obstacles behind your vehicle so as to\nwarn the approaching traffic, at an approxi-\nmate distance of 50-100 m. The reflecting\nside of the triangle should face the oncom-\ne the radia-\ning traffic. Please activate the hazard\nemperature\nwarning lamps before alighting the vehicle\nng fluid and\nto keep the warning triangle.\nout under\nuld only be\noolant tem- (2) (2)\nonal injury,\nd clothing\ncooling fan\nThese elec-\nally turn on\n(3)\n55T100020 \u2022 Remove the warning triangle carefully\nfrom the cover as shown by arrow (1).\n\u2022 Open both the reflector arms as shown\nby arrow (2) and lock the arms with each\nother with the clip provided in the right\narm. Open the bottom stand in counter\nclock-wise direction as shown by arrow\n(3). Position the warning triangle behind\nthe vehicle on a plain surface.\n\u2022 Reverse the removal procedure for\nkeeping inside the cover.\n55T100030\n55TH0-74E"},365{"page_number": 411, "page_text": " APPEARANCE\nCorrosion Prevention\nCleaning Exterior ......\nCleaning Interior ........\n60G412 APPEARANCE CARE\nE CARE\n.........................................................11-1\n...........................................................11-2\n...........................................................11-6\n55TH0-74E"},366{"page_number": 412, "page_text": "APPEARANCE CARE\nCorrosion Prevention\nIt is important to take good\nvehicle to protect it from corr\nbelow are instructions for how\nyour vehicle to prevent corro\nread and follow these instructi\nImportant Information ab\nsion\nCommon causes of corrosio\n1) Accumulation of road salt,\nor chemicals in hard-to-re\nthe vehicle underbody or fr\n2) Chipping, scratches and an\ntreated or painted met\nresulting from minor accide\nsion by stones and gravel.\n3) Any or all of the below\npoints:\n\u2022 Continuous exposure to sun\n\u2022 Hard water & sea water co\ntact with vehicle.\n\u2022 Foot rubbing (skirting).\nEnvironmental conditions w\nerate corrosion\n1) Road salt, dust control ch\nbreeze or industrial pollu\naccelerate the corrosion of\n2) High humidity will increas\ncorrosion particularly whe\nperature range is just abo\ning point.\n11-1 n 3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle R\nfor an extended period of time may pro- F\ncare of your\nmote corrosion even when other body r\nrosion. Listed\nsections are completely dry. i\nw to maintain\n4) High temperatures will cause an accel- y\nosion. Please\nerated rate of corrosion to parts of the R\nions carefully.\nvehicle which are not well-ventilated to a\npermit quick drying. w\nbout Corro-\nr\nThis information illustrates the necessity of\ni\nkeeping your vehicle (particularly the\non s\nunderbody) as clean and dry as possible. It\ndirt, moisture F\nis equally important to repair any damage\neach areas of u\nto the paint or protective coatings as soon\nrame.\nas possible.\nny damage to R\ntal surfaces C\nents or abra- t\nHow to Help Prevent Corrosion\na\nw mentioned Wash your vehicle frequently t\nThe best way to preserve the finish on your f\nvehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to g\nnlight\nkeep it clean with frequent washing. q\noming in con-\nWash your vehicle at least once during the\nwinter and once immediately after the win-\nter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the\nunderside, as clean and dry as possible.\nwhich accel-\nIf you frequently drive on salted roads,\nyour vehicle should be washed at least\nhemicals, sea\nonce a month during the winter. If you live\nution will all\nnear the ocean, your vehicle should be\nf metal.\nwashed at least once a month throughout\nse the rate of\nthe year.\nen the tem-\nove the freez- For washing instructions, refer to \u201cCleaning\nExterior\u201d section. Remove foreign material deposits\nForeign materials such as salts, chemicals,\nroad oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and\nindustrial fall-out may damage the finish of\nyour vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.\nRemove these types of deposits as quickly\nas possible. If these deposits are difficult to\nwash off, an additional cleaner may be\nrequired. Check that any cleaner you use\nis not harmful to painted surfaces and is\nspecifically intended for your purposes.\nFollow the manufacturer\u2019s directions when\nusing these special cleaners.\nRepair finish damage\nCarefully examine your vehicle for damage\nto the painted surfaces. Should you find\nany chips or scratches in the paint, touch\nthem up immediately to prevent corrosion\nfrom starting. If the chips or scratches have\ngone through to the bare metal, have a\nqualified body shop make the repair.\n55TH0-74E"},367{"page_number": 413, "page_text": "Keep passenger and luggag\nments clean\nMoisture, dirt or mud can\nunder the floor mats and may\nsion. Occasionally, check u\nmats to ensure that this area\ndry. More frequent checks are\nthe vehicle is used for off-road\nwet weather.\nCertain cargos such as chem\ners, cleaners, salts, etc. are e\nrosive by nature. These prod\nbe transported in sealed conta\nare spilled or leaked, clean\narea immediately.\nPark your vehicle in a dry\nlated area\nPark your vehicle to save it f\nous exposure to direct sunl\npark your vehicle in a damp,\nlated area. If you often wash\nin the garage and place it ther\ndition, your garage may be da\nhumidity in the garage may ca\nerate corrosion. A wet vehicle\neven in a heated garage if the\npoor. ge compart- Cleaning Exterior N\nD\naccumulate For Keeping the Paintwork Beauti- n\ncause corro- ful r\nunder these To keep your vehicle\u2019s beautiful appear- a\nis clean and ance for a long term, daily care is import-\ne necessary if ant.\nd driving or in\n\u2022 For parking and storing the vehicle, we\nrecommend garages with good ventila-\nmicals, fertiliz-\ntion and locations with roofs.\nextremely cor-\n\u2022 The following situations may cause rust-\nducts should\ning and discoloration of the paint. Wash\nainers. If they\nand dry the your vehicle promptly.\n\u2013 When driving in coastal areas or on\nroads sprayed with antifreeze agent\ny, well-venti- (Wash the underside of the vehicle\nand around the wheel wells especially)\nfrom continu- \u2013 When bird droppings, dead insects, \u2022\nlight. Do not sap, iron dust, soot or smoke residue,\npoorly-venti- coal tar, etc., adhere to the paint or\nyour vehicle when the vehicle gets wet with acid\nre in wet con- rain\namp. The high \u2013 When the vehicle is dirty with dust or\nause or accel- mud\nmay corrode\ne ventilation is \u2022 Give the vehicle a wax about once a\nmonth or whenever the water-repelling\nability of the painted surfaces has\ndeclined. Follow all instructions on the\npackage of the wax (sold separately). APPEARANCE CARE\nNOTE:\nDo not use wax on plastic parts that are\nnot coated. Waxing these surfaces could\nresult in a whitened or uneven appear-\nance.\n80J302\n\u2022 Chips from flying rocks, scratches, etc.\ncan cause rust. Repair these areas as\nsoon as possible.\n11-2\n55TH0-74E"},368{"page_number": 414, "page_text": "APPEARANCE CARE\nWashing\n11-3  55TH0-74E"},369{"page_number": 415, "page_text": "Washing by hand\nWhen washing the vehicle, p\nplace where direct sunlight do\nit as much as possible an\ninstructions below:\n1) Flush the underside of bod\nhousings with pressurize\nremove mud and debris. U\nwater. 4\n5\n68PM09005 6\n80J303 2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.\npark it in the Remove dirt and mud from the body\noes not fall on exterior with running water. You may\nnd follow the use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use\nhard materials which can scratch the\ndy and wheel paint or plastic. Remember that the\ned water to headlight covers or lenses are made of\nUse plenty of plastic in many cases.\n3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild\ndetergent or car wash soap using a\nsponge or soft cloth. The sponge or\ncloth should be frequently soaked in the\nsoap solution. APPEARANCE CARE\n4) Once the dirt has been completely\nremoved, rinse off the detergent with\nrunning water.\n5) Wipe off the vehicle body with a wet\nchamois or cloth and allow it to dry in\nthe shade.\n6) Check carefully for damage to painted\nsurfaces. If there is any damage, touch\nup the damage following the procedure\nbelow:\n1. Clean all damaged spots and allow\nthem to dry.\n2. Stir the paint and touch up the dam-\naged spots lightly using a small\nbrush.\n3. Allow the paint to dry completely.\n11-4\n55TH0-74E"},370{"page_number": 416, "page_text": "APPEARANCE CARE\nWashing by an automatic ca\nWashing by a high-pressure\n11-5 ar wash Caring for the Windshield C\nIf an oil film, etc. adheres to the windshield W\nand the windshield wipers cannot clean it, o\nuse a glass cleaner (sold separately) to d\nclean the windshield by hand.\nCaring for Lights\nWash the lens part of light and wipe it off\nwith a soft cloth.\ne cleaner Caring for Cameras\nWash the lens part of camera and wipe it\noff with a soft cloth. If the lens part is very\ndirty, use a mild detergent.\n55TH0-74E"},371{"page_number": 417, "page_text": "Caring for Aluminum Whe\nNOTE:\n\u2022 Do not use an acidic or al\ngent, or a cleaner containin\nsolvent to wash alumin\nThese types of cleaners wi\nmanent spots, discoloration\non the finished surface and\nthe center cap.\n\u2022 Do not use a bristle brush\ncontaining an abrasive ma\nwill damage the finished sur eels Waxing C\nlkaline deter-\nng petroleum\nnum wheels\nill cause per-\nn and cracks\nd damage to\nh and a soap\naterial. These\nrface.\nAfter washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-\nishing are recommended to further protect\nand beautify the paint.\n\u2022 Only use waxes and polishes of good\nquality.\n\u2022 When using waxes and polishes,\nobserve the precautions specified by the\nmanufacturers. APPEARANCE CARE\nCleaning Interior\nequipment, audio components,\nswitches, wiring under the floor, or\nother electrical parts become wet,\nthere is a risk of fire or malfunction,\nand the SRS airbag system could\nfail to function normally.\nIf you pour water or spill a drink in\nthe vehicle, consult a Maruti Suzuki\nauthorized workshop as soon as\npossible for inspection.\n11-6\n55TH0-74E"},372{"page_number": 418, "page_text": "APPEARANCE CARE\nNOTE:\nTo prevent liquid-based air fre\nspilling, it is recommended to\ntainers in place, or use solid-ty\neners instead.\n11-7 Vinyl Upholstery\nPrepare a solution of soap or mild deter-\nN\ngent dissolved in warm water. Apply the\n\u2022\nsolution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft\ncloth and let it soak for a few minutes to\nloosen dirt.\n\u2022\nRub the surface with a clean, damp cloth\nto remove dirt and the soap solution. If\nsome dirt still remains on the surface,\nrepeat this procedure.\nFabric Upholstery \u2022\nRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.\nUsing a mild soap solution, rub stained\nareas with a clean damp cloth. To remove\nsoap, rub the areas again with a cloth\n\u2022\ndampened with water. Repeat this until the\nstain is removed, or use a commercial fab-\nric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a\nfabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-\nfacturer\u2019s instructions and precautions.\nS\nLeather Upholstery\nC\nRemove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.\nD\nUsing a mild soap or saddle soap solution,\nT\nwipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.\nTo remove soap, wipe the areas again with V\nesheners from\na soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the\nfix their con- O\nareas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this\nype air fresh- w\nuntil the dirt or stain is removed, or use a\nh\ncommercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt\nr\nor stains. If you use a leather cleaner,\nd\ncarefully follow the manufacturer\u2019s instruc-\ntions and precautions. Do not use solvent\ntype cleaners or abrasive cleaners. NOTE:\n\u2022 In order to keep the leather upholstery\nlooking good, it should be cleaned at\nleast twice a year.\n\u2022 If the leather upholstery becomes wet,\nimmediately wipe it dry with a tissue\npaper or a soft cloth. Water may cause\nthe leather to harden and shrink if it is\nnot wiped off.\n\u2022 When parking on sunny days, select a\nshady place or use a sunshade. If the\nleather upholstery is exposed to the\ndirect sunlight for a long time, it may dis-\ncolor and shrink.\n\u2022 As is common with natural materials,\nleather is inherently irregular in grain and\ncowhide has spots in its natural state.\nThese do not affect the performance of\nthe leather in any way.\nSeat Belts\nClean seat belts with mild soap and water.\nDo not use bleach or dye on the belts.\nThey may weaken the fabric of the belts.\nVinyl Floor Mats\nOrdinary dirt can be removed from vinyl\nwith water or the mild soap. Use a brush to\nhelp loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,\nrinse the mat thoroughly with water and\ndry it in the shade.\n55TH0-74E"},373{"page_number": 419, "page_text": "Carpets\nRemove the dirt and soil as mu\nble with a vacuum cleaner. U\nsoap solution, rub stained a\nclean damp cloth. To remove s\nareas again with a cloth dam\nwater. Repeat this until t\nremoved, or use a comme\ncleaner for tougher stains. If y\npet cleaner, carefully follow t\nturer\u2019s instructions and precau\nInstrument Panel and Con\nRemove loose dirt with a vacu\nGently wipe dirt off with a tigh\ndamp clean cloth. Repeat this\nis removed. I\nuch as possi- N\nUsing a mild W\nareas with a o\nsoap, rub the w\nmpened with\nH\nthe stain is\nercial carpet T\nyou use a car- p\nthe manufac- a\nutions.\nnsole\nuum cleaner.\n68PM09004\nhtly squeezed\ns until the dirt APPEARANCE CARE\nInside of the Tailgate Window\nNOTE:\nWipe the window along the antenna wires\nor heat wires by a soft cloth dampened\nwith water to avoid damaging these wires.\nHead-up Display\nThe surface of the display is coated, so\nplease wipe off the dirt with a soft cloth like\nan eyeglass wipe.\n11-8\n55TH0-74E"},374{"page_number": 420, "page_text": " SPECIFICATIO\nVehicle Identification\nFASTag (if equipped).\nHigh Security Registra\nFuel Recommendation\nSpecifications ............\n84MM01001 SPECIFICATIONS\nONS\n..........................................................12-1\n...........................................................12-2\nation Plate (HSRP) (if applicable)....12-3\nn ........................................................12-4\n...........................................................12-5\n55TH0-74E"}]375